advertisement
User’s Manual
Model 336
Temperature Controller
Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc.
575 McCorkle Blvd.
Westerville, Ohio 43082-8888 USA [email protected]
www.lakeshore.com
Fax: (614) 891-1392
Telephone: (614) 891-2243
Methods and apparatus disclosed and described herein have been developed solely on company funds of
Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. No government or other contractual support or relationship whatsoever has existed which in any way affects or mitigates proprietary rights of Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. in these developments.
Methods and apparatus disclosed herein may be subject to U.S. Patents existing or applied for.
Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. reserves the right to add, improve, modify, or withdraw functions, design modifications, or products at any time without notice. Lake Shore shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
Rev. 1.8
P/N 119-048 03 January 2014
| www.lakeshore.com
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
WARRANTY PERIOD: THREE (3) YEARS
1.Lake Shore warrants that products manufactured by Lake Shore (the
"Product") will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for three years from the date of Purchaser's physical receipt of the Product (the "Warranty Period"). If Lake Shore receives notice of any such defects during the Warranty Period and the defective Product is shipped freight prepaid back to Lake Shore, Lake Shore will, at its option, either repair or replace the Product (if it is so defective) without charge for parts, service labor or associated customary return shipping cost to the Purchaser. Replacement for the Product may be by either new or equivalent in performance to new. Replacement or repaired parts, or a replaced Product, will be warranted for only the unexpired portion of the original warranty or 90 days (whichever is greater)..
2.Lake Shore warrants the Product only if the Product has been sold by an authorized Lake Shore employee, sales representative, dealer or an authorized Lake Shore original equipment manufacturer (OEM).
3.The Product may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use when it is originally sold to the Purchaser.
4.The Warranty Period begins on the date of Purchaser's physical receipt of the Product or later on the date of operational training and verification (OT&V) of the Product if the service is performed by Lake
Shore, provided that if the Purchaser schedules or delays the Lake
Shore OT&V for more than 30 days after delivery then the Warranty
Period begins on the 31st day after Purchaser's physical receipt of the
Product.
5.This limited warranty does not apply to defects in the Product resulting from (a) improper or inadequate installation (unless OT&V services are performed by Lake Shore), maintenance, repair or calibration, (b) fuses, software, power surges, lightning and nonrechargeable batteries, (c) software, interfacing, parts or other supplies not furnished by Lake Shore, (d) unauthorized modification or misuse, (e) operation outside of the published specifications, (f ) improper site preparation or site maintenance (g) natural disasters such as flood, fire, wind, or earthquake, or (h) damage during shipment other than original shipment to you if shipped through a Lake
Shore carrier.
6.This limited warranty does not cover: (a) regularly scheduled or ordinary and expected recalibrations of the Product; (b) accessories to the
Product (such as probe tips and cables, holders, wire, grease, varnish, feed throughs, etc.); (c) consumables used in conjunction with the
Product (such as probe tips and cables, probe holders, sample tails, rods and holders, ceramic putty for mounting samples, Hall sample cards, Hall sample enclosures, etc.); or, (d) non-Lake Shore branded
Products that are integrated with the Product.
7. To the extent allowed by applicable law,, this limited warranty is the only warranty applicable to the Product and replaces all other warranties or conditions, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Specifically, except as provided herein,
LakeShore undertakes no responsibility that the products will be fit for any particular purpose for which you may be buying the Products.
Any implied warranty is limited in duration to the warranty period.
No oral or written information, or advice given by the Company, its
Agents or Employees, shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this limited warranty. Some countries, states or provinces do not allow limitations on an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country to country, state to state or province to province.
8.Further, with regard to the United Nations Convention for International Sale of Goods (CISC,) if CISG is found to apply in relation to this agreement, which is specifically disclaimed by Lake Shore, then this limited warranty excludes warranties that: (a) the Product is fit for the purpose for which goods of the same description would ordinarily be used, (b) the Product is fit for any particular purpose expressly or impliedly made known to Lake Shore at the time of the conclusion of the contract. (c) the Product is contained or packaged in a manner usual for such goods or in a manner adequate to preserve and protect such goods where it is shipped by someone other than a carrier hired by Lake Shore.
9. Lake Shore disclaims any warranties of technological value or of non-infringement with respect to the Product and Lake Shore shall have no duty to defend, indemnify, or hold harmless you from and against any or all damages or costs incurred by you arising from the infringement of patents or trademarks or violation or copyrights by the Product.
10.THIS WARRANTY IS NOT TRANSFERRABLE. This warranty is not transferrable.
11.Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, neither Lake
Shore nor any of its subsidiaries, affiliates or suppliers will be held liable for direct, special, incidental, consequential or other damages
(including lost profit, lost data, or downtime costs) arising out of the use, inability to use or result of use of the product, whether based in warranty, contract, tort or other legal theory, regardless whether or not Lake Shore has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Purchaser's use of the Product is entirely at Purchaser's risk. Some countries, states and provinces do not allow the exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
12.This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary within or between jurisdictions where the product is purchased and/or used. Some jurisdictions do not allow limitation in certain warranties, and so the above limitations or exclusions of some warranties stated above may not apply to you.
13.Except to the extent allowed by applicable law, the terms of this limited warranty statement do not exclude, restrict or modify the mandatory statutory rights applicable to the sale of the product to you.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
CERTIFICATION
Lake Shore certifies that this product has been inspected and tested in accordance with its published specifications and that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment. The accuracy and calibration of this product at the time of shipment are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST); formerly known as the National Bureau of Standards (NBS).
FIRMWARE LIMITATIONS
Lake Shore has worked to ensure that the Model 336 firmware is as free of errors as possible, and that the results you obtain from the instrument are accurate and reliable. However, as with any computer-based software, the possibility of errors exists.
In any important research, as when using any laboratory equipment, results should be carefully examined and rechecked before final conclusions are drawn. Neither Lake Shore nor anyone else involved in the creation or production of this firmware can pay for loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of the product, or property damage caused by this product or its failure to work, or any other incidental or consequential damages. Use of our product implies that you understand the Lake Shore license agreement and statement of limited warranty.
FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
The firmware in this instrument is protected by United States copyright law and international treaty provisions. To maintain the warranty, the code contained in the firmware must not be modified. Any changes made to the code is at the user's risk. Lake Shore will assume no responsibility for damage or errors incurred as result of any changes made to the firmware.
FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (continued)
Under the terms of this agreement you may only use the Model 336 firmware as physically installed in the instrument. Archival copies are strictly forbidden. You may not decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the firmware. If you suspect there are problems with the firmware, return the instrument to Lake Shore for repair under the terms of the Limited Warranty specified above. Any unauthorized duplication or use of the Model 336 firmware in whole or in part, in print, or in any other storage and retrieval system is forbidden.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Many manufacturers and sellers claim designations used to distinguish their products as trademarks. Where those designations appear in this manual and Lake Shore was aware of a trademark claim, they appear with initial capital letters and the ™ or ® symbol.
Alumel™ and Chromel™ are trademarks of
Conceptech, Inc., Corporation
Apiezon™ is a registered trademark of M&I Materials, Ltd.
CalCurve™, Cernox™, SoftCal™, Rox™, Curve Handler™ are trademarks of Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc.
Java™ is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. of Santa Clara, CA
LabVIEW® is a registered trademark of National Instruments.
Mac® is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
Microsoft Windows®, Excel®, and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Stycast® is a trademark of Emerson & Cuming.
WinZip™ is a registered trademark of Nico Mak of Connecticut.
Copyright 2009 - 2014 Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. All rights reserved. No portion of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the express written permission of Lake Shore.
| www.lakeshore.com
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) for the Model 336 Temperature Controller
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) of electronic equipment is a growing concern worldwide. Emissions of and immunity to electromagnetic interference is now part of the design and manufacture of most electronics. To qualify for the CE Mark, the Model 336 meets or exceeds the requirements of the European EMC Directive 89/336/EEC as a
CLASS A product. A Class A product is allowed to radiate more RF than a Class B product and must include the following warning:
WARNING:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
The instrument was tested under normal operating conditions with sensor and interface cables attached. If the installation and operating instructions in the User's Manual are followed, there should be no degradation in EMC performance.
This instrument is not intended for use in close proximity to RF Transmitters such as two-way radios and cell phones. Exposure to RF interference greater than that found in a typical laboratory environment may disturb the sensitive measurement circuitry of the instrument.
Pay special attention to instrument cabling. Improperly installed cabling may defeat even the best EMC protection.
For the best performance from any precision instrument, follow the grounding and shielding instructions in the
User's Manual. In addition, the installer of the Model 336 should consider the following:
D
Shield measurement and computer interface cables.
D
Leave no unused or unterminated cables attached to the instrument.
D
Make cable runs as short and direct as possible. Higher radiated emissions are possible with long cables.
D
Do not tightly bundle cables that carry different types of signals.
| www.lakeshore.com
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Table of Contents
i
Chapter 1
Introduction
Chapter 2
Cooling System Design and
Temperature
Control
1.3.4.2 Unpowered Analog Outputs (Outputs 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
| www.lakeshore.com
Chapter 3
Installation
Chapter 4
Operation
Model 336 Temperature Controller
3.8.5 Powering Outputs 3 and 4 Using an External Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
iii
4.4.2 Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Resistor Sensor Input Setup . . . . . . . 52
4.4.3 Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) Resistor Sensor Input Setup . . . . . . 52
4.4.6.1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.4.6.2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure 54
4.5.1.4.1 Closed Loop PID Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
| www.lakeshore.com
Chapter 5
Advanced
Operation
Chapter 6
Computer
Interface Operation
5.6.1.1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.10.2 SoftCal™ Accuracy With DT-400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.2.6 Status System Detail: Status Byte Register and Service Request . . . . . . . . . . 101
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Chapter 7
Options and
Accessories
v
6.2.6.6 Using Operation Complete (*OPC) and
Operation Complete Query (*OPC?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.3.3.1 Installing the Driver From Windows® Update in
6.3.3.2 Installing the Driver From Windows® Update in Windows® XP . . . 105
6.3.3.4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.4.1.2 Network Addresss Configuration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.4.2.3 Viewing Network Configuration Parameters and
| www.lakeshore.com
Chapter 8
Service
Appendix A
Temperature Scales
Appendix B
Handling Liquid
Helium and
Nitrogen
Appendix C
Curve Tables
8.11.1 Identification of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components . . . . . . . . 161
8.11.2 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.1 Product Description
Chapter 1: Introduction
1
1.1 Product
Description
FIGURE
1-1
Model 336 front view
Features:
D
Operates down to 300 mK with appropriate NTC RTD sensors
D
Four sensor inputs and four independent control outputs
D
Two PID control loops: 100 W and 50 W into a 50
) or 25
)
load
D
Autotuning automatically collects PID parameters
D
Automatically switch sensor inputs using zones to allow continuous measurement and control from 300 mK to 1505 K
D
Custom display setup allows you to label each sensor input
D
Ethernet, USB, and IEEE-488 interfaces
D
Supports diode, RTD, and thermocouple temperature sensors
D
Sensor excitation current reversal eliminates thermal EMF errors for resistance sensors
D
±
10 V analog voltage outputs, alarms, and relays
The first of a new generation of innovative temperature measurement and control solutions by Lake Shore, the Model 336 temperature controller comes standard equipped with many advanced features promised to deliver the functionality and reliable service you’ve come to expect from the world leader in cryogenic thermometry. The Model 336 is the only temperature controller available with four sensor inputs, four control outputs, and 150 W of low noise heater power. Two independent heater outputs providing 100 W and 50 W can be associated with any of the four sensor inputs and programmed for closed loop temperature control in proportional-integral-derivative (PID) mode. The improved autotuning feature of the Model 336 can be used to automatically collect PID parameters, so you spend less time tuning your controller and more time conducting experiments.
The Model 336 supports the industry’s most advanced line of cryogenic temperature sensors as manufactured by Lake Shore, including diodes, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and thermocouples. The controller’s zone tuning feature allows you to measure and control temperatures seamlessly from 300 mK to over 1,500 K by automatically switching temperature sensor inputs when your temperature range goes beyond the usable range of a given sensor. You’ll never again have to be concerned with temperature sensor over or under errors and measurement continuity issues. Alarms, relays, and ±10 V analog voltage outputs are available to help automate secondary control functions.
| www.lakeshore.com
2
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
1.1.1 Sensor Inputs
1.1.2 Temperature
Control
Another innovative first from Lake Shore, the ability to custom label sensor inputs eliminates the guesswork in remembering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated. As we strive to maintain increasingly demanding workloads, ease of use and the ability to stay connected from anywhere in the world are critical attributes. With standard Ethernet, USB, and IEEE-488 interfaces and an intuitive menu structure and logic, the Model 336 was designed with efficiency, reliable connectivity, and ease of use in mind. While you may need to leave your lab, Ethernet ensures you’ll always be connected to your experiments. The new intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic, bright graphic display, and LED indicators enhance the user friendly front panel interface of the Model 336.
In many applications, the unparalleled feature set of the Model 336 allows you to replace several instruments with one, saving time, money and valuable laboratory space. Delivering more feedback, tighter control, and faster cycle times, the
Model 336 keeps up with increasingly complex temperature measurement and control applications. It is the ideal solution for general purpose to advanced laboratory applications. Put the Model 336 temperature controller to use in your lab and let it take control of your measurement environment.
The Model 336 offers 4 standard sensor inputs that are compatible with diode and
RTD temperature sensors. The field installable Model 3060 thermocouple input option provides support for up to two thermocouple inputs by adding thermocouple functionality to inputs C and D.
Sensor inputs feature a high-resolution 24-bit analog-to-digital converter; each input has its own current source, providing fast settling times. All four sensor inputs are optically isolated from other circuits to reduce noise and to provide repeatable sensor measurements. Current reversal eliminates thermal electromotive force
(EMF) errors in resistance sensors. Nine excitation currents facilitate temperature measurement and control down to 300 mK using appropriate negative temperature coefficient (NTC) RTDs. Autorange mode automatically scales excitation current in
NTC RTDs to reduce self heating at low temperatures as sensor resistance changes by many orders of magnitude. Temperatures down to 1.4 K can be measured and controlled using silicon or GaAlAs diodes. Software selects the appropriate excitation current and signal gain levels when the sensor type is entered via the instrument front panel. The unique zone setting feature automatically switches sensor inputs, enabling you to measure temperatures from 300 mK to over 1,500 K without interrupting your experiment.
The Model 336 includes standard temperature sensor response curves for silicon diodes, platinum RTDs, ruthenium oxide RTDs, and thermocouples. Non-volatile memory can also store up to 39 200-point CalCurves for Lake Shore calibrated temperature sensors or user curves. A built-in SoftCal™ algorithm can be used to generate curves for silicon diodes and platinum RTDs that can be stored as user curves.
Temperature sensor calibration data can be easily uploaded and manipulated using the Lake Shore curve handler software.
Providing a total of 150 W of heater power, the Model 336 is the most powerful temperature controller available. Delivering very clean heater power, it precisely controls temperature throughout the full scale temperature range for excellent measurement reliability, efficiency, and throughput. Two independent PID control outputs supplying 100 W and 50 W of heater power can be associated with any of the four standard sensor inputs. Precise control output is calculated based on your temperature setpoint and feedback from the control sensor. Wide tuning parameters accommodate most cryogenic cooling systems and many high-temperature ovens commonly used in laboratories. PID values can be manually set for fine control, or the improved
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.1.3 Interface
1.1.3 Interface 3
autotuning feature can automate the tuning process. Autotune collects PID parameters and provides information to help build zone tables. The setpoint ramp feature provides smooth, continuous setpoint changes and predictable setpoint approaches without the worry of overshoot or excessive settling times. When combined with the zone setting feature, which enables automatic switching of sensor inputs and scales current excitation through 10 different preloaded temperature zones, the Model 336 provides continuous measurement and control from 300 mK to 1505 K.
Control outputs 1 and 2 are variable DC current sources referenced to chassis ground.
Output 1 can provide 100 W of continuous power to a 25
) load or 50 W to a 50
)
or
25
)
load. Output 2 provides 50 W to 25
)
or 50
)
heater loads. Outputs 3 and 4 are variable DC voltage source outputs providing two ±10 V analog outputs. When not in use to extend the temperature controller heater power, these outputs can function as manually controlled voltage sources.
Temperature limit settings for inputs are provided as a safeguard against system damage. Each input is assigned a temperature limit, and if any input exceeds that limit, all control channels are automatically disabled.
The Model 336 is standard equipped with Ethernet, universal serial bus (USB) and parallel (IEEE-488) interfaces. In addition to gathering data, nearly every function of the instrument can be controlled through a computer interface. You can download the Lake Shore curve handler software to your computer to easily enter and manipulate sensor calibration curves for storage in the instrument’s non-volatile memory.
Ethernet provides the ability to access and monitor instrument activities via the internet from anywhere in the world. The USB interface emulates an RS-232 serial port at a fixed 57,600 baud rate, but with the physical plug-ins of a USB. It also allows you to download firmware upgrades, ensuring the most current firmware version is loaded into your instrument without having to physically change anything.
Each sensor input has a high and low alarm that offer latching and non-latching operation. The 2 relays can be used in conjunction with the alarms to alert you of a fault condition and perform simple on/off control. Relays can be assigned to any alarm or operated manually.
The ±10 V analog voltage outputs on outputs 3 and 4 can be configured to send a voltage proportional to temperature to a strip chart recorder or data acquisition system.
You may select the scale and data sent to the output, including temperature or sensor units.
b
Sensor input connectors
c
Terminal block
d
Ethernetinterface
e
USB interface
f
IEEE-488 interface
g
Line input assembly
FIGURE
1-2
Model 336 rear panel h
Output 2 heater
i
Output 1 heater
j
Thermocouple
option inputs
| www.lakeshore.com
4
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
1.1.4 Configurable
Display
The Model 336 offers a bright, graphic liquid crystal display with an LED backlight that simultaneously displays up to 8 readings. You can show all 4 loops, or if you need to monitor 1 input, you can display just that one in greater detail. Or you can custom configure each display location to suit your experiment. Data from any input can be assigned to any of the locations, and your choice of temperature or sensor units can be displayed. For added convenience, you can also custom label each sensor input, eliminating the guesswork in remembering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated.
1.1.5 Three Option
Cards
1.2 Sensor
Selection
FIGURE
1-3
Displays showing four loop mode, input display mode and custom display mode
Field installable input option cards can expand your sensor selection to include silicon diodes (like DT-670), capacitance sensors or thermocouples. Once installed, the option input can be selected and named from the front panel like any other input type. These option cards further expand the application versatility of the Model 336 temperature controller by allowing specialized sensors to be switched in and out to achieve specific measurement objectives.
For example, addition of the thermocouple input option enables continuous measurement to 1000 K and above. Alternatively, the capacitance sensor option card enables a magnetics-impervious capacitance temperature sensor to be temporarily switched in for elimination of magneto-resistive effects while taking low temperature sample measurements under high or changing fields. The 4-channel scanner option card enables use of additional sensors for supplemental monitoring.
Silicon diodes are the best choice for general cryogenic use from 1.4 K to above room temperature. Diodes are economical to use because they follow a standard curve and are interchangeable in many applications. They are not suitable for use in ionizing radiation or magnetic fields.
Cernox™ thin-film RTDs offer high sensitivity and low magnetic field-induced errors over the 0.3 K to 420 K temperature range. Cernox sensors require calibration.
Platinum RTDs offer high uniform sensitivity from 30 K to over 800 K. With excellent reproducibility, they are useful as thermometry standards. They follow a standard curveabove 70 K and are interchangeable in many applications.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.2 Sensor Selection
Model Useful Range
Diodes
(3062)
Positive Temperature
Coefficient RTDs
Negative
Temperature
Coefficient RTDs
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
GaAlAs Diode
GaAlAs Diode
GaAlAs Diode
100
)
Platinum
100
)
Platinum
Rhodium-Iron
Rhodium-Iron
Cernox™
Cernox™
Cernox™
Cernox™
Cernox™
Germanium
Germanium
Germanium
Germanium
Germanium
Germanium
Carbon-Glass
Carbon-Glass
Carbon-Glass
Rox™
Rox™
Rox™
CX-1070-HT
CX-1080-HT
GR-200A-100
GR-200A-250
GR-200A/B-500
GR-200A/B-1000
GR-200A/B-1500
GR-200A/B-2500
CGR-1-500
CGR-1-1000
CGR-1-2000
RX-102
RX-103
RX-202
Capacitance
3061
Thermocouples
3060
Type K
Type E
CS-501
9006-006
9006-004
Chromel-AuFe 0.07% 9006-002
1
Non-HT version maximum temperature: 325 K
2
Low temperature limited by input resistance range
3
Low temperature specified with self-heating error:
"
5 mK
DT-670-SD
DT-670E-BR
DT-414
DT-421
DT-470-SD
DT-471-SD
TG-120-P
TG-120-PL
TG-120-SD
PT-102/3
PT-111
RF-800-4
RF-100T/U
CX-1010
CX-1030-HT
CX-1050-HT
1.4 K to 290 K
3.2 K to 1505 K
3.2 K to 934 K
1.2 K to 610 K
TABLE 1-1
Sensor temperature range
4 K to 420 K
1
20 K to 420 K
1
0.3 K to 100 K
0.5 K to 100 K
1.4 K to 100 K
1.4 K to 100 K
1.4 K to 100 K
1.4 K to 100 K
1.4 K to 325 K
1.7 K to 325 K
2
2 K to 325 K
2
0.3 K to 40 K
3
1.4 K to 40 K
0.3 K to 40 K
3
1.4 K to 500 K
30 K to 500 K
1.4 K to 375 K
1.4 K to 325 K
1.4 K to 500 K
10 K to 500 K
1.4 K to 325 K
1.4 K to 325 K
1.4 K to 500 K
14 K to 873 K
14 K to 673 K
1.4 K to 500 K
1.4 K to 325 K
0.3 K to 325 K
1
0.3 K to 420 K
1, 3
1.4 K to 420 K
1
Magnetic Field Use
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T
#
60 K & B
"
3 T
T > 4.2 K & B
"
5 T
T > 4.2 K & B
"
5 T
T > 4.2 K & B
"
5 T
T > 40 K & B
"
2.5 T
T > 40 K & B
"
2.5 T
T > 77 K & B
"
8 T
T > 77 K & B
"
8 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
Not recommended
Not recommended
Not recommended
Not recommended
Not recommended
Not recommended
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
19 T
T > 2 K & B
"
10 T
T > 2 K & B
"
10 T
T > 2 K & B
"
10 T
T>4.2 K & B
"
18.7 T
Not recommended
Not recommended
Not recommended
5
| www.lakeshore.com
6
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
Example
Lake Shore
Sensor
Temperature
Nominal
Resistance/
Voltage
Typical
Sensor
Sensitivity
4
100
Silicon Diode
Silicon Diode
GaAlAs Diode
)
500
Platinum RTD
)
Full Scale
Cernox™
Cernox™
Germanium
Germanium
DT-670-CO-13 with 1.4H calibration
DT-470-SD-13 with 1.4H calibration
TG-120-SD with 1.4H calibration
PT-103 with 14J calibration
CX-1010-SD with 0.3L calibration
CX-1050-SD-HT with 1.4M calibration
GR-300-AA with 0.3D calibration
GR-1400-AA with 1.4D calibration
6
0.35 K
1.4 K
4.2 K
100 K
1.8 K
4.2 K
10 K
100 K
0.3 K
0.5 K
4.2 K
300 K
1.4 K
4.2 K
77 K
420 K
1.4 K
77 K
300 K
475 K
30 K
77 K
300 K
500 K
1.4 K
77 K
300 K
500 K
1.4 K
77 K
300 K
475 K
Carbon-Glass
Rox™
Capacitance
Thermocouple
50 mV
3060
CGR-1-500 with 1.4L calibration
RX-102A-AA with 0.3B calibration
CS-501
Type K
4.2
77
200
75 K
300 K
600 K
1505 K
1.4 K
4.2 K
77 K
300 K
0.5 K
1.4 K
4.2 K
40 K
103900
584.6
14.33
8.55
3701
2005
1370
1049
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
6.0 nF
9.1 nF
19.2 nF
-5862.9 µV
1075.3 µV
13325 µV
49998.3 µV
-520000
-422.3
-0.098
)
-0.0094
-5478
-667
-80.3
-1.06
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
/K
/K
/K
27 pF/K
52 pF/K
/K
/K
/K
174 pF/K
/K
15.6 µV/K
40.6 µV/K
41.7 µV/K
/K
36.006 µV/K
4
Typical sensor sensitivities were taken from representative calibrations for the sensor listed
5
Control stability of the electronics only, in an ideal thermal system
6
Non-HT version maximum temperature: 325 K
7
Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation
2322.4
)
1248.2
)
277.32
)
30.392
)
26566
)
3507.2
)
205.67
)
45.03
)
18225
)
449
)
94
)
2.7
)
15288
)
1689
)
253
)
2.8
)
1.664 V
1.028 V
0.5597 V
0.0907 V
1.6981 V
1.0203 V
0.5189 V
0.0906 V
5.391 V
1.422 V
0.8978 V
0.3778 V
3.660
)
20.38
)
110.35
)
185.668
)
-10785
)
/K
-2665.2
)
/K
-32.209
)
/K
-0.0654
)
/K
-48449
)
/K
-1120.8
)
/K
-2.4116
)
/K
-0.0829
)
/K
-193453
)
/K
-581
)
/K
-26.6
)
/K
-0.024
)
/K
-26868
)
/K
-862
)
/K
-62.0
)
/K
-0.021
)
/K
-12.49 mV/K
-1.73 mV/K
-2.3 mV/K
-2.12 mV/K
-13.1 mV/K
-1.92 mV/K
-2.4 mV/K
-2.22 mV/K
-97.5 mV/K
-1.24 mV/K
-2.85 mV/K
-3.15 mV/K
0.191
)
/K
0.423
)
/K
0.387
)
/K
0.378
)
/K
TABLE 1-2
Typical sensor performance
4 µK
41 µK
56µK
6.3 mK
28 µK
91 µK
73 µK
7.1 mK
8.5 µK
26 µK
140 µK
23 mK
20 µK
196 µK
1.9 mK
18 mK
0.2 mK
16 mK
7 mK
6.4 mK
1.1 mK
0.5 mK
5.2mK
5.3 mK
0.8 mK
5.8 mK
4.4 mK
4.7 mK
0.8 mK
5.2 mK
4.2 mK
4.5 mK
13 µK
63 µK
4.6 mK
16 mK
41 µK
128µK
902 µK
62 mK
74 mK
39 mK
12 mK
26 mK
10 mK
10 mK
11 mK
Measurement
Resolution:
Temperature
Equivalents
±0.1 mK
±0.2 mK
±3.8 mK
±339 mK
±0.3 mK
±2.1 mK
±38 mK
±338 mK
±48 µK
±481 µK
±1.8 mK
±152 mK
±302 µK
±900 µK
±1.8 mK
±177 mK
±0.1 mK
±0.8 mK
±108 mK
±760 mK
±0.5 mK
±1.4 mK
±8 mK
±500 mK
Electronic
Accuracy:
Temperature
Equivalents
Temperature
Accuracy
including
Electronic
Accuracy,
CalCurve and
Calibrated Sensor
±13 mK
±76 mK
±47 mK
±40 mK
±13 mK
±69 mK
±45 mK
±38 mK
±7 mK
±180 mK
±60 mK
±38 mK
±13 mK
±10 mK
±39 mK
±60 mK
±25 mK
±98 mK
±79 mK
±90 mK
±25 mK
±91 mK
±77 mK
±88 mK
±19 mK
±202 mK
±92 mK
±88 mK
±23 mK
±22 mK
±62 mK
±106 mK
NA
±3.6 mK
±4.7 mK
±8.8 mK
±414 mK
±5.3 mK
±7.1 mK
±54 mK
±403 mK
±4.2 mK
±4.7 mK
±6.8 mK
±175mK
±4.5 mK
±5.1 mK
±6.8 mK
±200 mK
±4.1 mK
±4.8 mK
±133 mK
±865 mK
±5 mK
±6.4 mK
±24 mK
±537 K
Calibration not available from
Lake Shore
±0.25 K
7
±0.038 K
7
±0.184 K
7
±0.73 K
7
Calibration not available from
Lake Shore
Electronic
Control
Stability
5
:
Temperature
Equivalents
±17 µK
±52 µK
±280 µK
±46 mK
±40 µK
±392 µK
±3.8 mK
±36 mK
±8 µK
±82 µK
±112 µK
±12.6 mK
±56 µK
±182 µK
±146 µK
±14.2 mK
±1.6 mK
±11.6 mK
±8.8 mK
±9.4 mK
±1.6 mK
±10.4 mK
±8.4 mK
±9 mK
±0.4 mK
±32 mK
±14 mK
±13 mK
±2.2 mK
±1.0 mK
±10.4 mK
±10.6 mK
±26 µK
±126 µK
±9.2 mK
±32 mK
±82 µK
±256 µK
±1.8 mK
±124 mK
±14.8 mK
±7.7 mK
±23 mK
±52 mK
±20 mK
±20 mK
±22 mK
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.3 Model 336 Specifications 7
1.3 Model 336
Specifications
1.3.1 Input
Specifications
Standard inputs and scanner option
Model 3062
Sensor
Temperature Coefficient
Diode
Negative
Input Range Excitation
Current
Display
Resolution
Measurement
Resolution
Electronic
Accuracy
(at 25 °C)
Measurement Temperature
Coefficient
Electronic
Control Stability 8
PTC RTD
NTC RTD
10 mV
Negative
Positive
Negative
0 V to 2.5 V
0 V to 10 V
0
)
to 10
)
0
)
to 30
)
0
)
to 100
)
0
)
to 300
)
0
)
to 1 k
)
0
)
to 3 k
)
0
)
to 10 k
)
0
)
to 10
)
0
)
to 30
)
0
)
to 100
)
0
)
to 300
)
0
)
to 1 k
)
0
)
to 3 k
)
0
)
to 10 k
)
0
)
to 30 k
)
0
)
to 100 k
)
10 µA ±0.05% 9,10
10 µA ±0.05% 9,10
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
1 mA 11
300 µA 11
100 µA 11
30µA 11
10 µA 11
3 µA 11
1 µA 11
300 nA 11
100 nA 11
100 µV
100 µV
0.1 m
)
0.1 m
)
1 m
)
1 m
)
10 m
)
10 m
)
100 m
)
0.1 m
)
0.1 m
)
1 m
)
1 m
)
10 m
)
10 m
)
100 m
)
100 m
)
1
)
10 µV
20 µV
0.2 m
0.2 m
2 m
2 m
20 m
20 m
)
)
200 m
0.2 m
0.2 m
1 m
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
±80 µV ±0.005% of rdg
±320 µV ±0.01% of rdg
±0.002
)
±0.01% of rdg
±0.002
)
±0.01% of rdg
(10 µV + 0.0005% of rdg)/°C
(20 µV + 0.0005% of rdg)/°C
(0.01 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
(0.03 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
(0.1 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C ±0.004
)
±0.01% of rdg
±0.004
)
±0.01% of rdg
±0.04
)
±0.02% of rdg
±0.04
)
±0.02% of rdg
(0.3 m
(1 m
(3 m
)
)
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±0.4
)
±0.02% of rdg
(10 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±0.002
)
±0.06% of rdg
(0.01 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±0.002
)
±0.06% of rdg
(0.03 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±0.01
)
±0.04%
of rdg
(0.1 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±20 µV
±40 µV
±0.4 m
±0.4 m
±4 m
±4 m
±40 m
±40 m
±400 m
±0.3 m
±0.9 m
±3 m
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
10 m
20 m
2 m
)
)
+0.002% of rdg
)
+0.002% of rdg
100 m
)
+0.002% of rdg
±0.01
)
±0.04% of rdg
(0.3 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±0.1
)
±0.04% of rdg
±0.1
)
±0.04% of rdg
±1.0
)
±0.04% of rdg
(1 m
(3 m
)
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
(10 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C
±9 m
±30 m
±90 m
)
)
)
±0.004% of rdg
±0.004% of rdg
±300 m
)
±0.004% of rdg
200 m
)
+0.002% of rdg
±2.0
)
±0.04% of rdg
1
)
+0.005% of rdg ±10.0
)
±0.04% of rdg
(30 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C ±900 m
)
±0.004% of rdg
(100 m
)
+ 0.001% of rdg)/°C ±3
)
±0.01% of rdg
8 Control stability of the electronics only, in ideal thermal system
9 Current source error has negligible effect on measurement accuracy
10 Diode input excitation can be set to 1 mA
11 Current source error is removed during calibration
12 Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation
TABLE 1-3
Input specifications
| www.lakeshore.com
8
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
Thermocouple option
Model 3060
Sensor
Temperature Coefficient
Thermocouple
3060
Positive
Input Range
±50 mV
Excitation
Current
NA
Display
Resolution
0.1 µV
Measurement
Resolution
0.4µV
Electronic
Accuracy
(at 25 °C)
±1 µV ±0.05% of rdg
12
13
Control stability of the electronics only, in ideal thermal system
TABLE 1-4
Thermocouple option input specifications
Measurement Temperature
Coefficient
(0.1 µV + 0.001% of rdg)/°C
Electronic
Control
Stability
13
±0.8µV
Capacitance option
Model 3061
Capacitance
3061
Sensor
Temperature Coefficient
Positive or negative
Input Range Excitation
Current
Display
Resolution
Measurement
Resolution
Electronic
Accuracy
(at 25 °C)
0.1 nF to 15 nF 3.496 kHz 1 mA square wave
1 nF to 150 nF 3.496 kHz 10 mA square wave
0.1 pF
1 pF
0.05 pF
0.5 pF
±50 pF ±0.1% of rdg
±50 pF ±0.1% of rdg
14 Control stability of the electronics only, in ideal thermal system
TABLE 1-5
Capacitance option input specifications
Measurement Temperature
Coefficient
2.5 pF/°C
5 pF/°C
Electronic
Control
Stability 14
0.1 pF
1 pF
1.3.2 Sensor Input
Configuration
Measurement type
Excitation
Supported sensors
Standard curves
Input connector
Diode/RTD
4-lead differential
Thermocouple
2-lead differential, room temperature compensated
Constant current with current reversal for RTDs
Diodes
: Silicon, GaAlAs
RTDs
: 100
)
Platinum (option), 1000 ) Platinum, Germanium,
Carbon-Glass, Cernox™, and Rox™
DT-470, DT-670, DT-500-D, DT-500-E1,
PT-100, PT-1000, RX-102A, RX-202A
6-pin DIN
NA
Most thermocouple types
Type E, Type K, Type T, AuFe
0.07% vs. Cr, AuFe 0.03% vs. CR
Screw terminals in a ceramic isothermal block
TABLE 1-6
Sensor input configuration
1.3.3 Thermometry
Number of inputs
Input configuration
Supported option cards
Option slots
Isolation
A/D resolution
Autorange
User curves
SoftCal™
Math
Filter
4 (8 with Model 3062)
Inputs can be configured from the front panel to accept any of the supported input types. Thermocouple and capacitance inputs require an optional input card that can be installed in the field.
Thermocouple (3060), capacitance (3061), or scanner (3062)
1
Sensor inputs optically isolated from other circuits but not each other
24-bit
Input accuracy
Measurement resolution
Sensor dependent, refer to Input Specifications table
Sensor dependent, refer to Input Specifications table
Maximum update rate
10 rdg/s on each input, 5 rdg/s when configured as 100 k
)
NTC RTD with reversal on
Maximum update rate (scanner)
The maximum update rate for a scanned input is 10 rdg/s distributed among the enabled channels. Any channel configured as 100 k
)
RTD with reversal on changes the update rate for the channel to 5 rdg/s
Automatically selects appropriate NTC RTD or PTC RTD range
Room for 39 200-point CalCurves™ or user curves
Improves accuracy of DT-470 diode to ±0.25 K from 30 K to 375 K; improves accuracy of platinum RTDs to ±0.25 K from 70 K to 325 K; stored as user curves
Maximum and minimum
Averages 2 to 64 input readings
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.3.4 Control There are 4 control outputs.
1.3.4.1 Heater Outputs (Outputs 1 and 2)
Control type
Update rate
Tuning
Control stability
Setpoint rampin
Closed loop digital PID with manual heater output or open loop
10/s
Autotune (one loop at a time), PID, PID zones
Sensor dependent, see Input Specifications table
PID control settings
Proportional (gain)
0 to 1000 with 0.1 setting resolution
Integral (reset)
Derivative (rate)
1 to 1000 (1000/s) with 0.1 setting resolution
1 to 200% with 1% resolution
Manual output
Zone control
0 to 100% with 0.01% setting resolution
10 temperature zones with P, I, D, manual heater out, heater range, control channel, ramp rate
0.1 K/min to 100 K/min
1.3.4 Control 9
Type
D/A resolution
Max power
Max current
Compliance voltage
Heater load for max power
Heater load range
Ranges
Heater noise
Grounding
Heater connector
Safety limits
25
)
setting 50
)
setting
Variable DC current source
16-bit
100 W
2 A
50 V
25
)
50 W
1 A
50 V
50
)
10
)
to 100
)
3 (decade steps in power)
0.12 µA RMS (dominated by line frequency and its harmonics)
Output referenced to chassis ground
Dual banana
Curve temperature, power up heater off, short circuit protection
TABLE 1-7
Output 1
Type
D/A resolution
Max power
Max current
Compliance voltage
Heater load for max power
Heater load range
Ranges
Heater noise
Grounding
Heater connector
Safety limits
25
)
setting 50
)
setting
Variable DC current source
16-bit
50 W
1.41 A
35.4 V
25
)
50 W
1 A
50 V
50
)
10
)
to 100
)
3 (decade steps in power)
0.12 µA RMS (dominated by line frequency and its harmonics)
Output referenced to chassis ground
Dual banana
Curve temperature, power up heater off, short circuit protection
TABLE 1-8
Output 2
| www.lakeshore.com
10
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
1.3.4.2 Unpowered Analog Outputs (Outputs 3 and 4)
Control type
Tuning
Control stability
PID control settings
Proportional (gain)
Integral (reset)
Derivative (rate)
Manual output
Zone control
Closed loop PID, PID zones, warm up heater mode, manual output or
Monitor Out
Autotune (one loop at a time), PID, PID zones
Sensor dependedn, see Input Specifications table
0 to 1000 with 0.1 setting resolution
1 to 1000 (1000/s) with 0.1 setting resolution
1 to 200% with 1% resolution
0 to 100% with 0.01% setting resolution
10 temperature zones with P, I, D, manual heater out, heater range, control channel, ramp rate
0.1 K/min to 100 K/min
Setpoint ramping
Warm up heater mode settings
Warm up percentage
Warm up mode
Monitor Out settings
Scale
Data source
Settings
Type
Update rate
Range
Resolution
Accuracy
Noise
Minimum load resistance
Connector
0 to 100% with 1% resolution
Continuous control or auto-off
User selected
Temperature or sensor units
Input, source, top of scale, bottom of scale or manual
Variable DC voltage source
10/s
±10 V
16-bit, 0.3 mV
±2.5 mV
0.3 mV RMS
1 k
)
(short-circuit protected)
Detachable terminal block
1.3.5 Front Panel
Display
Number of reading displays
Display units
Reading source
Display update rate
8-line by 40-character (240 × 64 pixel) graphic LCD display module with
LED backlight
1 to 8
K, °C, V, mV,
)
Temperature, sensor units, max, and min
2 rdg/s
Temperature display resolution
0.0001° from 0° to 99.9999°, 0.001° from 100° to 999.999°,
0.01° above 1000°
Sensor units display resolution
Sensor dependent, to 6 digits
Other displays
Input name, setpoint, heater range, heater output, and PID
Setpoint setting resolution
Heater output display
Same as display resolution (actual resolution is sensor dependent)
Numeric display in percent of full scale for power or current
Heater output resolution
Display annunciators
LED annunciators
Keypad
Front panel features
0.01%
Control input, alarm, tuning
Remote, Ethernet status, alarm, control outputs
27-key silicone elastomer keypad
Front panel curve entry, display contrast control, and keypad lock-out
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.3.6 Interface
1.3.7 General
IEEE-488.2
Capabilities
Reading rate
Software support
USB
Function
Baud Rate
Connector
Reading rate
Software support
Ethernet
Function
Connector
Reading rate
Software support
Alarms
Number
Data source
Settings
Actuators
Relays
Number
Contacts
Contact rating
Operation
Connector
SH1, AH1, T5, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, C0, E1
To 10 rdg/s on each input
LabVIEW™ driver (contact Lake Shore for availability)
Emulates a standard RS-232 serial port
57,600
B-type USB connector
To 10 rdg/s on each input
LabVIEW™ driver (contact Lake Shore for availability)
TCP/IP web interface, curve handler, configuration backup, chart recorder
RJ-45
To 10 rdg/s on each input
LabVIEW™ driver (contact Lake Shore for availability)
4, high and low for each input
Temperature or sensor units
Source, high setpoint, low setpoint, deadband, latching or non-latching, audible on/off, and visible on/off
Display annunciator, beeper, and relays
2
Normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common (C)
30 VDC at 3 A
Activate relays on high, low, or both alarms for any input, or manual mode
Detachable terminal block
1.3.6 Interface 11
Ambient temperature
Power requirement
Size
Weight
Approval
15 °C to 35 °C at rated accuracy;
5 °C to 40 °C at reduced accuracy
100, 120, 220, 240, VAC, ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz, 250 VA
435 mm W × 89 mm H × 368 mm D
(17 in × 3.5 in × 14.5 in), full rack
7.6 kg (16.8 lb)
CE mark
| www.lakeshore.com
12
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
1.4 Safety
Summary and
Symbols
Observe these general safety precautions during all phases of instrument operation, service, and repair. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended instrument use. Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. assumes no liability for Customer failure to comply with these requirements.
The Model 336 protects the operator and surrounding area from electric shock or burn, mechanical hazards, excessive temperature, and spread of fire from the instrument. Environmental conditions outside of the conditions below may pose a hazard to the operator and surrounding area.
D
Indoor use
D
Altitude to 2000 m
D
Temperature for safe operation: 5 °C to 40 °C
D
Maximum relative humidity: 80% for temperature up to 31 °C decreasing linearly to 50% at 40 °C
D
Power supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of the nominal voltage
D
Overvoltage category II
D
Pollution degree 2
Ground the Instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the instrument is equipped with a 3-conductor AC power cable. Plug the power cable into an approved 3-contact electrical outlet or use a
3-contact adapter with the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Ventilation
The instrument has ventilation holes in its side covers. Do not block these holes when the instrument is operating.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep Away from Live Circuits
Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers. Refer component replacement and internal adjustments to qualified maintenance personnel. Do not replace components with power cable connected. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Instrument
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument. Return the instrument to an authorized Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc. representative for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Cleaning
Do not submerge instrument. Clean only with a damp cloth and mild detergent. Exterior only.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
1.4 Safety Summary and Symbols 13
3
Direct current (power line)
Alternating current (power line)
Alternating or direct current (power line)
Three-phase alternating current (power line)
Earth (ground) terminal
Protective conductor terminal
Frame or chassis terminal
On (supply)
Off (supply)
FIGURE
1-4
Safety symbols
Equipment protected throughout by double insulation or reinforces insulation (equivalent to Class II of
IEC 536—see Annex H)
CAUTION: High voltages; danger of electric shock; background color: yellow; symbol and outline: black
!
CAUTION or WARNING: See instrument documentation; background color: yellow; symbol and outline: black
| www.lakeshore.com
14
c
HAPTER
1:
Introduction
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.2.1 Temperature Range 15
Chapter 2: Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
2.1 General
Selecting the proper cryostat or cooling source is probably the most important decision in designing a temperature control system. The cooling source defines minimum temperature, cool-down time, and cooling power. Information on choosing a cooling source is beyond the scope of this manual. This chapter provides information on how to get the best temperature measurement and control from cooling sources with proper setup including sensor and heater installation.
2.2 Temperature
Sensor Selection
This section attempts to answer some of the basic questions concerning temperature sensor selection. Additional useful information on temperature sensor selection is available in the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog. The catalog has a large reference section that includes sensor characteristics and sensor selection criteria.
2.2.1 Temperature
Range
You must consider several important sensor parameters when choosing a sensor. The first is experimental temperature range. Some sensors can be damaged by temperatures that are either too high or too low. Manufacturer recommendations should always be followed.
Sensor sensitivity changes with temperature and can limit the useful range of a sensor. It is important not to specify a range larger than necessary. If you perform an experiment at liquid helium temperature, a very high sensitivity is needed for good measurement resolution at that temperature. That same resolution may not be required to monitor warm up to room temperature. Two different sensors may be required to tightly cover the range from base temperature to room temperature, but lowering the resolution requirement on warm up may allow a less expensive,
1 sensor solution.
Another thing to consider when choosing a temperature sensor is that instruments like the Model 336 are not able to read some sensors over their entire temperature range. Lake Shore sells calibrated sensors that operate down to 20 millikelvin (mK), but the Model 336 is limited to above 300 mK in its standard configuration.
2.2.2 Sensor Sensitivity
Temperature sensor sensitivity is a measure of how much a sensor signal changes when the temperature changes. It is an important sensor characteristic because so many measurement parameters are related to it. Resolution, accuracy, noise floor, and even control stability depend on sensitivity. Many sensors have different sensitivities at different temperatures. For example, a platinum sensor has good sensitivity at higher temperatures, but it has limited use below 30 K because its sensitivity drops sharply. It is difficult to determine if a sensor has adequate sensitivity over the experi-
mental temperature range. This manual has specifications (section 1.3) that include
sensor sensitivity translated into temperature resolution and accuracy at different points. This is typical sensor response and can be used as a guide when choosing a sensor to be used with the Model 336.
| www.lakeshore.com
16
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
2.2.3 Environmental
Conditions
2.2.4 Measurement
Accuracy
2.2.5 Sensor Package
2.3 Sensor
Calibrations
The experimental environment is also important when choosing a sensor. Environmental factors such as high vacuum, magnetic field, corrosive chemicals, or even radiation can limit the use of some types of sensors. Lake Shore has devoted much time to developing sensor packages that withstand the temperatures, vacuum levels, and bonding materials found in typical cryogenic cooling systems.
Experiments done in magnetic fields are very common. Field dependence of temperature sensors is an important selection criteria for sensors used in these experiments.
This manual briefly qualifies the field dependence of most common sensors in the
specifications (section 1.3). Detailed field dependence tables are included in the
Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog. When available, specific data on other environmental factors is also included in the catalog.
Temperature measurements have several sources of uncertainty that reduce accuracy. Be sure to account for errors induced by both the sensor and the instrumentation when computing accuracy. The instrument has measurement error in reading the sensor signal, and error in calculating a temperature using a temperature response curve. Error results when the sensor is compared to a calibration standard and the temperature response of a sensor will shift with time and with repeated thermal cycling (from very cold temperatures to room temperature). Instrument and sensor manufacturers specify these errors, but there are things you can do to maintain good accuracy. For example, choose a sensor that has good sensitivity in the most critical temperature range, as sensitivity can minimize the effect of most error
sources. Install the sensor properly following guidelines in section 2.4. Calibrate the
sensor and instrument periodically, or in some other way null the time dependent errors. Use a sensor calibration that is appropriate for the accuracy requirement.
There are different packages for the various types of sensors. Some types of sensors can even be purchased as bare chips without any package. A sensor package generally determines its size, thermal and electrical contact to the outside, and sometimes limits temperature range. When different packages are available for a sensor, you should consider the mounting surface for the sensor and how the leads will be thermally anchored when choosing.
It can sometimes be confusing to choose the right sensor, get it calibrated, translate the calibration data into a temperature response curve that the Model 336 can understand, and then load the curve into the instrument. Lake Shore provides a variety of calibration services to fit different accuracy requirements and budgets.
Best
Better
Good
Precision calibration
SoftCal™
Sensors using standard curves
All sensors can be calibrated over various temperature ranges.
Lake Shore has defined calibration ranges available
for each sensor type.
An abbreviated calibration (2-point: 77 K and 305 K; 3-point: 4.2 K,
77 K, and 305 K; or 3-point: 77 K, 305 K, and 480 K), which is available for 400 Series silicon diodes and platinum sensors
Silicon diodes follow standard curves
Platinum resistors follow standard curves
Ruthenium oxide (Rox™) resistors follow standard curves
Thermocouples follow standard curves
GaAlAs diode, carbon-glass, Cernox™, germanium, and rhodiumiron sensors can be purchased uncalibrated, but must be calibrated to accurately read in temperature units
TABLE 2-1
Sensor diode sensor calibrations
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.3.1 Precision
Calibration
2.3.2 SoftCal™
2.3.3 Sensors Using
Standard Curves
2.3.4 Curve Handler™
2.3.1 Precision Calibration 17
To calibrate, Lake Shore compares a sensor with an unknown temperature response to an accepted standard. Lake Shore temperature standards are traceable to the
U.S. National Institute of Standards and Testing (NIST) or the National Physical Laboratory in Great Britain. These standards allow Lake Shore to calibrate sensors from
20 mK to above room temperature. Calibrated sensors are more expensive than uncalibrated sensors of the same type because of the labor, cryogen use, and capitol equipment used in the process.
Precision calibration provides the most accurate temperature sensors available from
Lake Shore. Uncertainty from sensor calibration is almost always smaller than the error contributed by the Model 336. The Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and
Control Catalog has complete accuracy specifications for calibrated sensors.
Calibrated sensors include the measured test data printed and plotted, the coefficients of a Chebychev polynomial that have been fitted to the data, and two tables of data points to be used as interpolation tables. Both interpolation tables are optimized to allow accurate temperature conversion. The smaller table, called a breakpoint interpolation table, is sized to fit into instruments like the Model 336 where it is called a temperature response curve.
It is important to look at instrument specifications before ordering calibrated sensors. A calibrated sensor is required when a sensor does not follow a standard curve if you wish to display in temperature. Otherwise the Model 336 will operate in sensor units like ohms or volts. The Model 336 may not work over the full temperature range of some sensors. The standard inputs in are limited to operation above 300 mK even with sensors that can be calibrated to 20 mK.
SoftCal™ is a good solution for applications that do not require the accuracy of a precision calibration. The SoftCal™ algorithm uses the well-behaved nature of sensors that follow a standard curve to improve the accuracy of individual sensors. A few known temperature points are required to perform SoftCal™. The Model 336 can also perform a SoftCal™ calibration. You need to provide one, two, or three known temperature reference points. The range and accuracy of the calibration is based on these
Lake Shore offers two or three point SoftCal™ calibrated sensors that include both the large interpolation table and the smaller breakpoint interpolation table for 400 series diode and Platinum sensors.
Some types of sensors behave in a very predictable manner and a standard temperature response curve can be created for them. Standard curves are a convenient and inexpensive way to get reasonable temperature accuracy. Sensors that have a standard curve are often used when interchangeability is important. Some individual sensors are selected for their ability to match a published standard curve, but in general these sensors do not provide the accuracy of a calibrated sensor. For convenience, the
Model 336 has several standard curves included in firmware.
Lake Shore provides a software application, called Curve Handler™, which makes loading temperature curves into the Model 336 a very simple process. The program can copy curves from properly formatted files into the Model 336 user curve locations. You can also use it to read curves from the Model 336 and save them to files.
Lake Shore calibrated sensors are provided with a CD containing all the proper formats to load curves using the Curve Handler™ software program.
| www.lakeshore.com
18
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
There are two versions of the Curve Handler™ application. The fully featured version is a 32-bit Microsoft Windows™ application that must be installed on a Windows™
PC. This version works with the IEEE-488 and USB computer interfaces on the
Model 336, and allows you to manipulate the temperature curves directly in the program window. This version will also work with all existing Lake Shore temperature controller and temperature monitor instruments. The Windows™ version of the
Curve Handler™ application is available, free of charge, from the Lake Shore website at www.lakeshore.com.
The second version of Curve Handler™ is written in the Java™ programming language and is available through the Ethernet web interface on the Model 336. This version allows you to copy curves from files to the Model 336, and vice versa, but it does not allow manipulation of curve data and only works using the Ethernet interface. Refer
to section 6.4.4 for details on connecting to the web interface and opening the
embedded Curve Handler™ application.
2.4 Sensor
Installation
2.4.1 Mounting
Materials
2.4.2 Sensor Location
2.4.3 Thermal
Conductivity
This section highlights some of the important elements of proper sensor installation.
For more detailed information, Lake Shore sensors are shipped with installation instructions that cover that specific sensor type and package. The Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog includes an installation section as well.
To further help you properly install sensors, Lake Shore offers a line of cryogenic accessories. Many of the materials discussed are available through Lake Shore and can be ordered with sensors or instruments.
Choosing appropriate mounting materials is very important in a cryogenic environment. The high vacuum used to insulate cryostats is one consideration. Materials used in these applications should have a low vapor pressure so they do not evaporate or out-gas and spoil the vacuum insulation. Metals and ceramics do not have this problem, but greases and varnishes must be checked. Another consideration is the wide extremes in temperature most sensors are exposed to. The linear expansion coefficient of materials becomes important when temperature changes are large.
Never try to permanently bond materials with linear expansion coefficients that differ by more than three. Use a flexible mounting scheme or the parts will break apart, potentially damaging them. The thermal expansion or contraction of rigid clamps or holders could crush fragile samples or sensors that do not have the same coefficient.
Thermal conductivity is a property of materials that can change with temperature. Do not assume that a thermal anchor grease that works well at room temperature and above will do the same job at low temperatures.
Finding a good place to mount a sensor in an already crowded cryostat is never easy.
There are fewer problems if the entire load and sample holder are at the same temperature. Unfortunately, this not the case in many systems. Temperature gradients
(differences in temperature) exist because there is seldom perfect balance between the cooling source and heat sources. Even in a well-controlled system, unwanted heat sources like thermal radiation and heat conducting through mounting structures can cause gradients. For best accuracy, position sensors near the sample, so that little or no heat flows between the sample and sensor. This may not, however, be the best location for temperature control as discussed below.
The ability of heat to flow through a material is called thermal conductivity. Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that is intended to be the same temperature. Copper and aluminum are examples of metals that have good thermal conductivity, while stainless steel does not. Non-metallic, electricallyinsulating materials like alumina oxide and similar ceramics have good thermal con-
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.4.4 Contact Area 19
2.4.4 Contact Area ductivity, while G-10 epoxy-impregnated fiberglass does not. Sensor packages, cooling loads, and sample holders should have good thermal conductivity to reduce temperature gradients. Surprisingly, the connections between thermally conductive
Thermal contact area greatly affects thermal conduction because a larger area has more opportunity to transfer heat. Even when the size of a sensor package is fixed, thermal contact area can be improved with the use of a gasket material like indium foil and cryogenic grease. A soft gasket material forms into the rough mating surface to increase the area of the two surfaces that are in contact. Good gasket materials are soft, thin, and have good thermal conductivity. They must also withstand the environmental extremes. Indium foil and cryogenic grease are good examples.
2.4.5 Contact Pressure When sensors are permanently mounted, the solder or epoxy used to hold the sensor act as both gasket and adhesive. Permanent mounting is not a good solution for everyone because it limits flexibility and can potentially damage sensors. Much care should be taken not to over heat or mechanically stress sensor packages. Less permanent mountings require some pressure to hold the sensor to its mounting surface.
Pressure greatly improves the action of gasket material to increase thermal conductivity and reduce thermal gradients. A spring clamp is recommended so that different rates of thermal expansion do not increase or decrease pressure with temperature change.
2.4.6 Lead Wire Different types of sensors come with different types and lengths of electrical leads. In general a significant length of lead wire must be added to the sensor for proper thermal anchoring and connecting to a bulk head connector at the vacuum boundary. The lead wire must be a good electrical conductor, but should not be a good thermal conductor, or heat will transfer down the leads and change the temperature reading of the sensor. Small 30 AWG to 40 AWG wire made of an alloy like phosphor bronze is much better than copper wire. Thin wire insulation is preferred, and twisted wire should be used to reduce the effect of RF noise if it is present. The wire used on the room temperature side of the vacuum boundary is not critical, so copper cable is normally used.
| www.lakeshore.com
20
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
To room temperature
Vacuum shroud
Refrigerator first stage
Vacuum space
Radiation shield
Thermal anchor
(bobbin)
Dental floss tie-down
-or-
Cryogenic tape
Thermal anchor
(bobbin)
Cryogenic wire
(small diameter, large AWG)
Sensor
2.4.7 Lead Soldering
2.4.8 Thermal
2.4.9 Thermal
Radiation
Second stage and sample holder
Drawing not to scale
Optical window
(if required)
FIGURE 2-1
Typical sensor installation in a mechanical refrigerator
Anchoring Leads
Heater
(wiring not shown for clarity)
When you solder additional wire to short sensor leads, be careful not to overheat the sensor. A thermal anchor such as a metal wire clamp or alligator clip will anchor the leads and protect the sensor. Leads should be tinned before bonding to reduce the time that heat is applied to the sensor lead. Clean the solder flux after soldering to prevent corrosion or outgassing in vacuum .
Sensor leads can be a significant source of error if they are not properly anchored.
Heat will transfer down even small leads and alter the sensor reading. The goal of thermal anchoring is to cool the leads to a temperature as close to the sensor as possible. This can be accomplished by putting a significant length of lead wire in thermal contact with every cooled surface between room temperature and the sensor. You can adhere lead wires to cold surfaces with varnish over a thin electrical insulator like cigarette paper. They can also be wound onto a bobbin that is firmly attached to the cold surface. Some sensor packages include a thermal anchor bobbin and wrapped lead wires to simplify thermal anchoring.
Thermal (black body) radiation is one of the ways heat is transferred. Warm surfaces radiate heat to cold surfaces even through a vacuum. The difference in temperature between the surfaces is one thing that determines how much heat is transferred.
Thermal radiation causes thermal gradients and reduces measurement accuracy.
Many cooling systems include a radiation shield. The purpose of the shield is to surround the sample stage, sample, and sensor with a surface that is at or near their temperature to minimize radiation. The shield is exposed to the room temperature
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.5.1 Heater Resistance and Power 21
surface of the vacuum shroud on its outer surface, so some cooling power must be directed to the shield to keep it near the load temperature. If the cooling system does not include an integrated radiation shield (or one cannot be easily made), one alternative is to wrap several layers of super-insulation (aluminized mylar) loosely between the vacuum shroud and load. This reduces radiation transfer to the sample space.
There is a variety of resistive heaters that can be used as the controlled heating source for temperature control. The mostly metal alloys like nichrome are usually wire or foil.
Shapes and sizes vary to permit installation into different systems.
2.5 Heater
Selection and
Installation
2.5.1 Heater Resistance and Power
Cryogenic cooling systems have a wide range of cooling power. The resistive heater must be able to provide sufficient heating power to warm the system. The Model 336 can provide up to 100 W of power from Output 1 and up to 50 W of power from
Output 2. TABLE 2-2 provides the current and voltage limits, as well as the resulting
maximum power for each output for the 25
)
and 50
)
settings, using nominal heater load values.
Output 1
Output 2
Current limit
Voltage limit
Max power
Current limit
Voltage limit
Max power
25
)
setting (25
)
heater)
2 A
50 V
100 W
1.41 A
50 V
50 W
50
)
setting (50
)
heater)
1 A
50 V
50 W
1 A
50 V
50 W
TABLE 2-2
Current and voltage limits with resulting max power
Even though the Model 336 heater outputs are current sources, they have a limit of
50 V (called the compliance voltage). This compliance voltage also limits maximum power. So for heaters values other than 25
)
or 50
)
, calculate the maximum power using the following equations: P = I 2 R and P = V 2 /R, where P is maximum power, I is max current, V is max voltage, and R is the heater resistance. The current and voltage limits are in place at the same time, so the smaller of the two computations gives the maximum power available to the heater.
Example 1: A 20
)
heater is connected to Output 1, and the heater resistance setting is set to 25
)
, which can provide up to 2 A of current, and up to 50 V.
Current Limit
P = I 2 R
P = (2 A) 2 x (20
)
)
P = 80 W
Voltage Limit:
P = V 2 /R
P = (50 V) 2
P = 125 W
/(20
)
)
The power limit is the smaller of the two, or 80 W, limited by current.
Example 2: A 60
)
heater is connected to Output 2, and the heater resistance setting is set to 50
)
, which can provide up to 1 A of current, and up to 50 V.
Current Limit
P = I 2 R
P = (1 A) 2 x (60
)
)
P = 60 W
Voltage Limit:
P = V 2 /R
P = (50 V) 2
P = 41.7 W
/(60
)
)
The power limit is the smaller of the two, or 41.7 W, limited by voltage.
| www.lakeshore.com
22
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
2.5.2 Heater Location
2.5.3 Heater Types
2.5.4 Heater Wiring
It is possible to choose a heater value that results in a maximum power greater than the power rating of 50 W for output 2, but doing so can cause the Model 336 to work improperly. In this situation the max user current setting should be used to limit the power. Refer
to section 4.5.1.1.1 for details on using the max user current setting.
The resistor chosen as a heater must be able to withstand the power being dissipated in it. Pre-packaged resistors have a power specification that is usually given for the resistor in free air. This power may need to be derated if used in a vacuum where convection cooling cannot take place and it is not adequately anchored to a cooled surface. The Model 336 has a current limit feature which allows you to specify the
maximum output current for each heater output (section 4.5.1.1), which when set
appropriately will help protect the heater from being over heated.
For best temperature measurement accuracy, position the heater so that temperature gradients across the sample is minimized. For best control the heater should be in close thermal contact with the cooling power. Geometry of the load can make one or both of these difficult to achieve. That is why there are several heater shapes and sizes.
Resistive wire like nichrome is the most flexible type of heater available. The wire can be purchased with electrical insulation and has a predictable resistance per given length. This type of heater wire can be wrapped around a load to give balanced, even heating of the area. Similar to sensor lead wire, the entire length of the heater wire should be in good thermal contact with the load to allow for thermal transfer. Thermal anchoring also protects the wire from over heating and burning out.
Resistive heater wire is also wound into cartridge heaters. Cartridge heaters are more convenient, but are bulky and more difficult to place on small loads. A typical cartridge is 6.35 mm (0.25 in) in diameter and 25.4 mm (1 in) long. The cartridge should be snugly held in a hole in the load or clamped to a flat surface. Thermal anchoring for good thermal contact is again important.
Foil heaters are thin layers of resistive material adhered to, or screened onto, electrically insulating sheets. There are a variety of shapes and sizes. The proper size heater can evenly heat a flat surface or around a round load. The entire active area should be in good thermal contact with the load, not only for maximum heating effect, but to keep spots in the heater from over heating and burning out.
When wiring inside a vacuum shroud, we recommend using 30 AWG copper wire for heater leads. Too much heat can transfer in when larger wire is used. Thermal anchoring, similar to that used for the sensor leads, should be included so that any heat transfer does not warm the load when the heater is not running. The lead wires should be twisted to minimize noise coupling between the heater and other leads in the system. When wiring outside the vacuum shroud, you can use larger gage copper, and twisting is still recommended.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.6 Consideration for Good Control
2.6.1 Thermal
Conductivity
2.6.2 Thermal Lag
2.6.3 Two-Sensor
Approach
2.6.4 Thermal Mass
2.6.5 System
Non-Linearity
2.6.1 Thermal Conductivity 23
Most of the techniques discussed in section 2.4 and section 2.5 to improve cryogenic
temperature accuracy apply to control as well. There is an obvious exception in sen-
sor location. A compromise is suggested below in section 2.6.3.
Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that is intended to be at the same temperature. Most systems begin with materials that have good conductivity themselves, but as sensors, heaters, sample holders, etc., are added to an ever more crowded space, the junctions between parts are often overlooked. In order for control to work well, junctions between the elements of the control loop must be in close thermal contact and have good thermal conductivity.
Gasket materials should always be used along with reasonable pressure (section
Poor thermal conductivity causes thermal gradients that reduce accuracy and also cause thermal lag that make it difficult for controllers to do their job. Thermal lag is the time it takes for a change in heating or cooling power to propagate through the load and get to the feedback sensor. Because the feedback sensor is the only thing that lets the controller know what is happening in the system, slow information to the sensor slows the response time. For example, if the temperature at the load drops slightly below the setpoint, the controller gradually increases heating power. If the feedback information is slow, the controller puts too much heat into the system before it is told to reduce heat. The excess heat causes a temperature overshoot, which degrades control stability. The best way to improve thermal lag is to pay close attention to thermal conductivity both in the parts used and their junctions.
There is a conflict between the best sensor location for measurement accuracy and the best sensor location for control. For measurement accuracy the sensor should be very near the sample being measured, which is away from the heating and cooling sources to reduce heat flow across the sample and thermal gradients. The best control stability is achieved when the feedback sensor is near both the heater and cooling source to reduce thermal lag. If both control stability and measurement accuracy are critical it may be necessary to use two sensors, one for each function. Many temperature controllers including the Model 336 have multiple sensor inputs for this reason.
Cryogenic designers understandably want to keep the thermal mass of the load as small as possible so the system can cool quickly and improve cycle time. Small mass can also have the advantage of reduced thermal gradients. Controlling a very small mass is difficult because there is no buffer to adsorb small changes in the system.
Without buffering, small disturbances can very quickly create large temperature changes. In some systems it is necessary to add a small amount of thermal mass such as a copper block in order to improve control stability.
Because of nonlinearities, a system controlling well at one temperature may not control well at another temperature. While nonlinearities exist in all temperature control systems, they are most evident at cryogenic temperatures. When the operating temperature changes the behavior of the control loop, the controller must be retuned. As an example, a thermal mass acts differently at different temperatures. The specific heat of the load material is a major factor in thermal mass. The specific heat of materials like copper change as much as three orders of magnitude when cooled from
100 K to 10 K. Changes in cooling power and sensor sensitivity are also sources of nonlinearity.
| www.lakeshore.com
24
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
2.7 PID Control
The cooling power of most cooling sources also changes with load temperature. This is very important when operating at temperatures near the highest or lowest temperature that a system can reach. Nonlinearities within a few degrees of these high and low temperatures make it very difficult to configure them for stable control. If difficulty is encountered, it is recommended to gain experience with the system at temperatures several degrees away from the limit and gradually approach it in small steps.
Keep an eye on temperature sensitivity. Sensitivity not only affects control stability, but it also contributes to the overall control system gain. The large changes in sensitivity that make some sensors so useful may make it necessary to retune the control loop more often.
For closed-loop operation, the Model 336 temperature controller uses an algorithm called PID control. The control equation for the PID algorithm has three variable
terms: proportional (P), integral (I), and derivative (D). See FIGURE 2-2. Changing
these variables for best control of a system is called tuning. The PID equation in the
Model 336 is:
2.7.1 Proportional (P)
2.7.2 Integral (I)
Heater Output =
dt
where the error (e) is defined as: e = Setpoint – Feedback Reading.
Proportional is discussed in section 2.7.1. Integral is discussed in section 2.7.2. Deriv-
The Proportional term, also called gain, must have a value greater than 0 for the control loop to operate. The value of the proportional term is multiplied by the error (e) which is defined as the difference between the setpoint and feedback temperatures, to generate the proportional contribution to the output: Output (P) = Pe. If proportional is acting alone, with no integral, there must always be an error or the output will go to 0. A great deal must be known about the load, sensor, and controller to compute a proportional setting (P). Most often, the proportional setting is determined by trial and error. The proportional setting is part of the overall control loop gain, and so are the heater range and cooling power. The proportional setting will need to change if either of these change.
In the control loop, the integral term, also called reset, looks at error over time to build the integral contribution to the output:
Output (I) =
d t
By adding the integral to proportional contributions, the error that is necessary in a proportional only system can be eliminated. When the error is at 0, controlling at the setpoint, the output is held constant by the integral contribution. The integral setting
(I) is more predictable than the gain setting. It is related to the dominant time con-
stant of the load. As discussed in section 2.8.3, measuring this time constant allows a
reasonable calculation of the integral setting. In the Model 336, the integral term is not set in seconds like some other systems. The integral setting can be derived by dividing 1000 by the integral seconds: I setting
= 1000 / I seconds
.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.7.3 Derivative (D)
2.7.4 Manual Output
2.7.3 Derivative (D) 25
The derivative term, also called rate, acts on the change in error with time to make its contribution to the output:
Output (D) =
PD dt
By reacting to a fast changing error signal the derivative can work to boost the output when the setpoint changes quickly, reducing the time it takes for temperature to reach the setpoint. It can also see the error decreasing rapidly when the temperature nears the setpoint and reduce the output for less overshoot. The derivative term can be useful in fast changing systems, but it is often turned off during steady state control because it reacts too strongly to small disturbances. The derivative setting (D) is related to the dominant time constant of the load similar to the I-setting and is therefore set relative to I-setting when used.
The Model 336 has a control setting that is not a normal part of a PID control loop.
Manual Output can be used for open loop control, meaning feedback is ignored and the heater output stays at the user's manual setting. This is a good way to put constant heating power into a load when needed. The Manual Output term can also be added to the PID output. Some users prefer to set a power near that necessary to control at a setpoint and let the closed loop make up the small difference. Manual Output is set in percent of full scale current or power for a given heater range
Manual Output should be set to 0% when not in use.
| www.lakeshore.com
26
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 2-2
Examples of PID control
2.8.1 Setting Heater Range 27
2.8 Manual Tuning
There has been a lot written about tuning closed loop control systems and specifically
PID control loops. This section does not attempt to compete with control theory experts. It describes a few basic rules of thumb to help less experienced users get started. This technique will not solve every problem, but it has worked for many others in the field. This section assumes you have worked through the operation sections of this manual, have a good temperature reading from the sensor chosen as a control sensor, and are operating Loop 1. It is also a good idea to begin at the center of the temperature range of the cooling system (not close to its highest or lowest tempera-
ture). Autotune (section 2.9) is another good place to begin, and do not forget the
power of trial and error.
2.8.1 Setting Heater
Range
2.8.2 Tuning
Proportional
Setting an appropriate heater output range is an important first part of the tuning process. The heater range should allow enough heater power to comfortably overcome the cooling power of the cooling system. If the heater range will not provide enough power, the load will not be able to reach the setpoint temperature. Conversely, if the range is set too high, the load may have very large temperature changes that take a long time to settle out. Delicate loads can even be damaged by too much power.
Often there is little information on the cooling power of the cooling system at the desired setpoint. If this is the case, try the following: allow the load to cool completely with the heater off. Set Manual Output to 50% while in Open Loop control mode. Turn the heater to the lowest range and write down the temperature rise (if any). Select the next highest heater range and continue the process until the load warms up to room temperature. Do not leave the system unattended; the heater may have to be turned off manually to prevent overheating. If the load never reaches room temperature, some adjustment may be needed in heater resistance or load.
The list of heater range versus load temperature is a good reference for selecting the proper heater range. It is common for systems to require two or more heater ranges for good control over their full temperature. Lower heater ranges are normally needed for lower temperature. The Model 336 is of no use controlling at or below the temperature reached when the heater was off. Many systems can be tuned to control within a degree or two above that temperature.
The proportional setting is so closely tied to heater range that they can be thought of as fine and course adjustments of the same setting. An appropriate heater range must be known before moving on to the proportional setting.
1. Allow the cooling system to cool and stabilize with the heater off.
2. Place the Model 336 in closed loop PID mode tuning,
3. Turn integral, derivative and manual output settings to 0.
4. Enter a setpoint several degrees above the cooling system’s lowest temperature.
5. Enter a low proportional setting of approximately 5 or 10, and enter the appro-
priate heater range as described in section 2.8.1.
6. The load temperature should stabilize at a temperature below the setpoint. The heater display should show a value greater than 0% and less than 100%. If the load temperature does not stabilize below the setpoint, do one of the following:
a. If the load temperature and heater display reading swing rapidly, the proportional setting or possibly the heater range may be set too high.
Reduce the proportional setting or the heater range, and go back to step 6.
b. If the load temperature and heater display reading change very slowly, a condition described as drift, it is an indication of a proportional setting that is too low. Increase the proportional setting and go back to step 6.
| www.lakeshore.com
28
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
2.8.3 Tuning Integral
7. Gradually increase the proportional setting by doubling it each time. At each new setting, allow time for the temperature of the load to stabilize.
8. Repeat step 7 until you reach a setting in which the load temperature begins a sustained and predictable oscillation, rising and falling in a consistent period of
The goal is to find the proportional value in which the oscillation begins, do not turn the setting so high that temperature and heater output changes become extreme.
9. If step 8 is achieved, complete steps 10 and 11, if not skip to step 12.
10. Record the proportional setting and the amount of time it takes for the load to change from one temperature peak to the next. The time is called the oscillation period of the load. It helps describe the dominant time constant of the load, which is used in setting integral.
11. Reduce the proportional setting by half. The appropriate proportional setting is one half of the value required for sustained oscillation in step 8. See
FIGURE 2-2(b). Continue to Tuning Integral section 2.8.3.
12. There are a few systems that will stabilize and not oscillate with a very high proportional setting and a proper heater range setting. For these systems, setting a proportional setting of one half of the highest setting is a good starting point.
Continue to the Tuning Integral section 2.8.3.
When the proportional setting is chosen and the integral is set to 0 (off), the
Model 336 controls the load temperature below the setpoint. Setting the integral allows the Model 336 control algorithm to gradually eliminate the difference in tem-
perature by integrating the error over time. See FIGURE 2-2(d). An integral setting
that is too low causes the load to take too long to reach the setpoint. An integral setting that is too high creates instability and can cause the load temperature to oscillate.
1. Begin this part of the tuning process with the system controlling in proportional only mode.
2. Use the oscillation period of the load that was measured in section 2.8.2 in sec-
onds. Divide 1000 by the oscillation period to get the integral setting.
3. Enter the integral setting into the Model 336 and watch the load temperature approach the setpoint.
4. Adjust the integral setting if necessary:
a. If the temperature does not stabilize and begins to oscillate around the setpoint, the integral setting is too high and should be reduced by one half.
b. If the temperature is stable but never reaches the setpoint, the integral setting is too low and should be doubled.
5. Verify the integral setting by making a few small (2 K to 5 K) changes in setpoint, and watch the load temperature react.
Trial and error can help improve the integral setting by optimizing for experimental needs. Faster integrals, for example, get to the setpoint more quickly at the expense of greater overshoot. In most systems, setpoint changes that raise the temperature act differently than changes that lower the temperature.
If it was not possible to measure the oscillation period of the load during proportional setting, start with an integral setting of 20. If the load becomes unstable, reduce the setting by half. If the load is stable, make a series of small, two to five degree changes in the setpoint and watch the load react. Continue to increase the integral setting until the desired response is achieved.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
2.8.4 Tuning Derivative 29
2.8.4 Tuning Derivative If an experiment requires frequent changes in setpoint, derivative should be consid-
ered. See FIGURE 2-2(e). A derivative setting of 0, off, is recommended when the con-
trol system is seldom changed and data is taken when the load is at steady state.
The derivative setting is entered into the Model 336 as a percentage of the integral time constant. The setting range is 0–200% where 100% = ¼ I seconds. Start with a setting of 50% to 100%.
Again, do not be afraid to make some small setpoint changes; halving or doubling this setting to watch the affect. Expect positive setpoint changes to react differently from negative setpoint changes.
2.9 Autotuning
Choosing appropriate PID control settings can be tedious. Systems can take several minutes to complete a setpoint change, making it difficult to watch the display for oscillation periods and signs of instability. With the Autotune feature, the Model 336 automates the tuning process by measuring system characteristics and, along with some assumptions about typical cryogenic systems, computes setting values for P, I, and D. Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not set the manual output or heater range. Setting an inappropriate heater range is potentially dangerous to some loads, so the Model 336 does not automate that step of the tuning process.
When Autotune is initiated, step changes are applied to the setpoint and the system response is observed to determine the best tuning parameters.
The Autotuning message appears when autotuning, and the display is configured to show the output of the control loop being tuned. The message blinks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing, and displays the current stage of the process, such as
Stage 3 of 7. If the tuning process completes successfully, then the message is removed and the new PID parameters are configured. If the algorithm fails, the message stops blinking to indicate that it is no longer processing, and a failure message appears to indicate which stage of the process failed.
There are situations where Autotune is not the answer. The algorithm can be fooled when cooling systems are very fast, very slow, have a large thermal lag, or have a nonlinear relationship between heater power and load temperature. If a load can reach a new setpoint in under 10 sec (with an appropriate I-setting >500), the cooling system is too fast for Autotuning. Systems with a very small thermal mass can be this fast.
Adding mass is a solution, but is unappealing to users who need the speed for fast cycle times. Manual tuning is not difficult on these systems because new settings can be tested very quickly. Some systems are too slow for the Autotune algorithm. Any system that takes more than 15 min to stabilize at a new setpoint is too slow (with an appropriate I-setting <5).
Thermal lag can be improved by using the sensor and heater installation techniques
discussed in section 2.4 to section 2.6. Lag times up to a few seconds should be
expected; much larger lags can be a problem. System nonlinearity is a problem for both autotune and manual tuning. It is most commonly noticed when controlling near the maximum or minimum temperature of a temperature control system. It is not uncommon; however, for a user to buy a cryogenic cooling system specifically to operate near its minimum temperature. If this is the case, try to tune the system at 5 degrees above the minimum temperature and gradually reduce the setpoint, manually adjusting the control settings with each step. Any time the mechanical cooling action of a cryogenic refrigerator can be seen as periodic temperature fluctuations, the mass is too small or temperature too low to autotune.
| www.lakeshore.com
30
2.10 Zone Tuning
2.11
c
HAPTER
2:
Cooling System Design and Temperature Control
Thermoelectric
Devices
Once the PID tuning parameters have been chosen for a given setpoint, the whole process may have to be done again for other setpoints significantly far away that have different tuning needs. Trying to remember when to use which set of tuning parameters can be difficult. The Model 336 has a Zone feature as one of its tuning modes that can help.
To use the Zone feature, you must determine the best tuning parameters for each part of the temperature range of interest. Then enter the parameters into the Model 336 where up to 10 zones can be defined with different P, I, D, heater range, manual output, ramp rate, and control input settings. An upper boundary setting is assigned as the maximum temperature for that zone. The minimum temperature for a zone is the upper boundary for the previous zone, and 0 K is the starting point for the first zone.
When Zone tuning is on, each time the setpoint changes, appropriate control parameters are chosen automatically. Zone tuning works best when used in conjunction
with setpoint ramping (section 4.5.1.5.7).
You can determine control parameters manually or you can use the Autotune feature.
Autotune is a good way to determine a set of tuning parameters for the control sys-
tem that can then be entered as zones (section 2.9).
A thermoelectric device, sometimes referred to as a Peltier device, or a solid state heat pump, is a device that takes advantage of the Peltier effect. When a DC current is applied to the device, heat is transferred from one side of the device to the other. Heat can be transferred in either direction by reversing the polarity of the current. Thermoelectric devices are well suited for controlling temperatures near room temperature since they have both heating and cooling capabilities. Since thermoelectric devices are solid state, they are free of the mechanical vibrations associated with mechanical coolers. Some thermoelectric coolers, in a stacked configuration, are capable of cooling devices down to cryogenic temperatures (about 100 K). These are often used to cool and maintain the temperatures of charge-coupled device (CCD) sensors.
Since thermoelectric devices are capable of both heating and cooling, they require a controller that has a bipolar output to take full advantage of this. The Model 336 can be configured for bipolar control on Output 3 or 4. Closed loop PID control works the same in bipolar mode as it does in unipolar mode except that the output can go nega-
tive instead of stopping at zero. Refer to section 5.4 to setup Output 2 in bipolar
mode.
The Model 336 cannot drive a thermoelectric device directly. Most thermoelectric devices require high current (approximately 3 A) and low voltage (typically < 10 V).
Output 3 or 4 are capable of ±1 mA. An external power amplifier is necessary to boost the power up to a level that will effectively control the thermoelectric device. Refer to
section 3.8.5 for more information on using an external power amplifier with Output
2.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Chapter 3: Installation
3.1 General 31
3.1 General
3.2 Inspection and
Unpacking
3.3 Rear Panel
Definition
This chapter provides general installation instructions for the Model 336 temperature controller. Please read this entire chapter before installing the instrument and powering it on to ensure the best possible performance and maintain operator safety.
For instrument operating instructions refer to Chapter 4 and Chapter 5. For computer interface installation and operation refer to Chapter 6.
Inspect shipping containers for external damage before opening them. Photograph any container that has significant damage before opening it. Inspect all items for both visible and hidden damage that occurred during shipment. If there is visible damage to the contents of the container, contact the shipping company and
Lake Shore immediately, preferably within five days of receipt of goods, for instructions on how to file a proper insurance claim. Lake Shore products are insured against damage during shipment, but a timely claim must be filed before Lake Shore will take further action. Procedures vary slightly with shipping companies. Keep all damaged shipping materials and contents until instructed to either return or discard them.
Open the shipping container and keep the container and shipping materials until all contents have been accounted for. Check off each item on the packing list as it is unpacked. Instruments themselves may be shipped as several parts. The items included with the Model 336 are listed below. Contact Lake Shore immediately if there is a shortage of parts or accessories. Lake Shore is not responsible for any missing items if not notified within 60 days of shipment.
If the instrument must be returned for recalibration, replacement or repair, a Return
Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained from a factory representative before
it is returned. Refer to section 8.14.2 for the Lake Shore RMA procedure.
Items Included with Model 336 temperature controller:
D
1 Model 336 instrument
D
1 Model 336 user's manual
D
4 sensor input mating connector, 6-pin DIN (G-106-233)
D
2 heater output connectors, dual banana, for heater Outputs 1 and 2
D
1 terminal block mating connector, 10-pin terminal block, for Outputs 3 and 4, and relays 1 and 2
D
1 line power cord
D
1 line power cord for alternative voltage*
* Included only when purchased with VAC-120-ALL power option.
This section provides a description of the Model 336 rear panel connections. The rear
panel consists of the Input A, B, C, and D sensor input connectors (#1 in FIGURE 3-1),
Output 3 and 4 analog voltage output and relays 1 and 2 terminal block connector
(2), RJ-45 Ethernet connector (3), USB B-type connector (4), IEEE-488 interface connector (5), line input assembly (6), Output 1 and 2 heater output connectors (7 and 8),
and the thermocouple option card inputs (9) . Refer to section 8.10 for rear panel con-
nector pin-out details.
| www.lakeshore.com
32
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
Always turn off the instrument before making any rear panel connections. This is especially critical when making sensor to instrument connections.
3.4 Line Input
Assembly
FIGURE 3-1
Model 336 rear panel
This section describes how to properly connect the Model 336 to line power. Please follow these instructions carefully to ensure proper operation of the instrument and the safety of operators.
3.4.1 Line Voltage
3.4.2 Line Fuse and
Fuse Holder
FIGURE 3-2
Line input assembly
The Model 336 has four different AC line voltage configurations so that it can be operated from line power anywhere in the world. The nominal voltage and voltage range of each configuration is shown below. (The recommended setting for 230 V operation is 240 V.)
Nominal
100 V
120 V
220 V
240 V
Minimum
90 V
108 V
198 V
216 V
TABLE 3-1
Line voltage
Maximum
110 V
132 V
242 V
264 V
AC line voltage is set at Lake Shore, but it is good to verify that the AC line voltage indicator in the fuse drawer window is appropriate before turning the instrument on. The instrument may be damaged if turned on with the wrong voltage selected. Also remove and verify that the proper fuse is installed before plugging in and turning on the instru-
ment. Refer to section 8.5 for instructions on changing the line voltage configuration.
The line fuse is an important safety feature of the Model 336. If a fuse ever fails, it is important to replace it with the value and type indicated on the rear panel for the line voltage setting. The letter T on the fuse rating indicates that the instrument requires a time-delay or slow-blow fuse. Fuse values should be verified any time line voltage
configuration is changed. Refer to section 8.6 for instructions for changing and verify-
ing a line fuse.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
3.4.3 Power Cord
3.4.4 Power Switch
3.5 Diode/Resistor
Sensor Inputs
3.5.1 Sensor Input
Connector and Pinout
3.4.3 Power Cord 33
The Model 336 includes a 3-conductor power cord that mates with the IEC 320-C14 line cord receptacle. Line voltage is present on the two outside conductors and the center conductor is a safety ground. The safety ground attaches to the instrument chassis and protects the user in case of a component failure. A CE approved power cord is included with instruments shipped to Europe; a domestic power cord is included with all other instruments (unless otherwise specified when ordered).
Always plug the power cord into a properly grounded receptacle to ensure safe instrument operation.
The delicate nature of measurements being taken with this instrument may necessitate additional grounding including ground strapping of the instrument chassis. In these cases the operators safety should remain the highest priority and low impedance from the instrument chassis to safety ground should always be maintained.
The power switch is part of the line input assembly on the rear panel of the Model 336 and turns line power to the instrument on and off. When the circle is depressed, power is off. When the line is depressed, power is on.
This section details how to connect diode and resistor sensors to the Model 336 standard inputs and the Model 3062 4-channel scanner option card input channels. Refer
to section 4.4 to configure the inputs. Refer to section 3.6 for a description of the
optional capacitance input and section 3.7 for a description of the thermocouple
input.
The input connectors are 6-pin DIN 45322 sockets. The sensor connector pins are
defined in FIGURE 3-3 and TABLE 3-2. Four mating connectors (6-pin DIN plugs) are
included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument. These are common connectors, so additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronics suppliers. They can also be ordered from Lake Shore as G-106-233.
FIGURE 3-3
Sensor input connector
Pin
3
4
1
2
5
6
Symbol Description
I–
V–
None
V+
I+
None
–Current
–Voltage
Shield
+Voltage
+Current
Shield
TABLE 3-2
Diode/resistor input connector details
| www.lakeshore.com
34
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
3.5.2 Sensor Lead Cable The sensor lead cable used outside the cooling system can be much different from what is used inside. Between the instrument and vacuum shroud, heat leak is not a concern. In this case, choose cabling to minimize error and noise pick up. Larger conductor, 22 AWG to 28 AWG stranded copper wire is recommended because it has low resistance yet remains flexible when several wires are bundled in a cable. The arrangement of wires in a cable is also important. For best results, voltage leads, V+ and V- should be twisted together and current leads I+ and I- should be twisted together. The twisted pairs of voltage and current leads should then be covered with a braided or foil shield that is connected to the shield pin of the instrument. This type of cable is available through local electronics suppliers. Instrument specifications are given assuming 3 m (10 ft) of sensor cable. Longer cables, 30 m (100 ft) or more, can be used, but environmental conditions may degrade accuracy and noise specifica-
tions. Refer to section 2.4.6 for information about wiring inside the cryostat.
3.5.3 Grounding and
Shielding Sensor Leads
The sensor inputs are isolated from earth ground to reduce the amount of earth ground referenced noise that is present on the measurement leads. Connecting sensor leads to earth ground on the chassis of the instrument or in the cooling system will defeat that isolation. Grounding leads on more than one sensor prevents the sensor excitation current sources from operating.
Shielding the sensor lead cable is important to keep external noise from entering the measurement. A shield is most effective when it is near the measurement potential so the Model 336 offers a shield at measurement common. The shield of the sensor cable should be connected to the shield pin of the input connector. The shields should not be connected to earth ground on the instrument chassis. One shield should be connected to the cryostat’s ground as long as it is near earth ground. Connecting at more than one point will cause a ground loop, which adds noise to the measurement.
The shells of the input connectors are at the same potential as the shield pin on the
Model 336. Older Lake Shore controllers are not configured this way.
3.5.4 Sensor Polarity This section describes the diode/resistor sensor inputs.
Lake Shore sensors are shipped with instructions that indicate which sensor leads are which. It is important to follow these instructions for plus and minus leads (polarity) as well as voltage and current when applicable. Diode sensors do not operate in the wrong polarity. They look like an open circuit to the instrument. Two-lead resistors can operate with any lead arrangement and the sensor instructions may not specify.
Four-lead resistors can be more dependent on lead arrangement. Follow any specified lead assignment for four-lead resistors. Mixing leads could give a reading that appears correct but is not the most accurate.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Cathode Anode
FIGURE 3-4
DT-670-SD Diode sensor leads
3.5.5 Four-Lead Sensor
Measurement
3.5.5 Four-Lead Sensor Measurement 35
All sensors, including both two-lead and four-lead can be measured with a four-lead technique. The purpose of a four-lead measurement is to eliminate the effect of lead resistance on the measurement. If it is not taken out, lead resistance is a direct error when measuring a sensor.
In a four-lead measurement, current leads and voltage leads are run separately up to the sensor. With separate leads there is little current in the voltage leads, so their resistance does not enter into the measurement. Resistance in the current leads will not change the measurement as long as the voltage compliance of the current source is not reached. When two-lead sensors are used in four-lead measurements, the short leads on the sensor have an insignificant resistance.
Resistive sensor
V
I
I
V
+
+
–
–
Diode
(option only)
I
V
+
+
V
I
–
–
3.5.6 Two-Lead Sensor
Measurement
FIGURE 3-5
4-lead measurement
There are times when crowding in a cryogenic system forces users to read sensors in a two-lead configuration because there are not enough feedthroughs or room for lead wires. If this is the case, plus voltage to plus current and minus voltage to minus current leads are attached at the back of the instrument or at the vacuum feedthrough.
The error in a resistive measurement is the resistance of the lead wire run with current and voltage together. If the leads contribute 2
)
or 3
)
to a 10 k
)
reading, the error can probably be tolerated. When measuring voltage for diode sensors, you can calculate the error in voltage as the lead resistance times the current, typically 10 µA.
For example: a 10
)
lead resistance times 10 µA results in a 0.1 mV error in voltage.
Given the sensitivity of a silicon diode at 4.2 K, the error in temperature would be only
3 mK. At 77 K the sensitivity of a silicon diode is lower so the error would be close to
50 mK. Again, this may not be a problem for every user. Connectors are also a big source of error when making two-lead measurements. Connector contact resistance is unpredictable and changes with time and temperature. Minimize interconnections
when making two-lead measurements. Refer to FIGURE 3-6 for an image of a two-
lead sensor measurement.
| www.lakeshore.com
36
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
I
+
V
+
V
–
I
–
3.5.7 Lowering
Measurement Noise
3.6 Capacitance
Sensor Inputs
(Model 3061)
FIGURE 3-6
2-lead sensor measurement
Good instrument hardware setup technique is one of the least expensive ways to reduce measurement noise. The suggestions fall into two categories: (1) do not let noise from the outside enter into the measurement, and (2) let the instrument
isolation and other hardware features work to their best advantage. Here are some further suggestions:
D
Use four-lead measurement whenever possible
D
Do not connect sensor leads to chassis or earth ground
D
Use twisted shielded cable outside the cooling system
D
Attach the shield pin on the sensor connector to the cable shield
D
Do not attach more than one cable shield at the other end of the cable
D
Run different inputs and outputs in their own shielded cable
D
Use twisted wire inside the cooling system
D
Use similar technique for heater leads
D
Use a grounded receptacle for the instrument power cord
D
Consider ground strapping the instrument chassis to other instruments or computers
This section provides information for a Model 336 configured with the capacitance sensor input option card. Capacitance inputs are not installed on the standard Model
336, but it can be added by purchasing the Model 3061 capacitance input option.
Refer to section 7.6 for installation of the Model 3061.
The Model 3061 adds a capacitance input to the Model 336, appearing on the display as input D. The card has separate voltage feedback and current excitation for the sensor. The Model 3061 is intended to control temperature in strong magnetic fields using a Lake Shore Model CS-501 capacitance temperature sensor. The standard inputs remain in the instrument and are fully functional.
Upon changing control to the capacitive sensor, the PID values will need to be optimized.
The Model 336 does not support temperature conversion for the capacitance input.
The temperature response of capacitance sensors shifts with thermal cycling, making calibration unpredictable. All Model 3061 option measurement and control must be done in sensor units. With this option, two sensors should be installed at the control point. Use a resistive sensor in one of the standard inputs to establish a control temperature and stabilize the system in a low magnetic field. Before increasing the field strength, shift control to the capacitance sensor to maintain the current temperature.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
3.6.1 Wiring, Guarding and Shielding
3.7 Thermocouple
Sensor Inputs
(Thermocouple
Model 3060)
3.6.1 Wiring, Guarding and Shielding 37
The capacitance input uses the same 6-pin din connector as the standard inputs, and the same pins for current excitation and voltage feedback. Cable capacitance in longer cables can cause large sensor reading errors if proper guarding and shielding methods are not applied. To address this problem, a driven guard is provided on pin 6, and a shield pin is provided on pin 3. The guard pin should be connected to a foil shield that surrounds a single twisted pair of wires used for I+ and V+. The shield pin on pin 3 should be connected to a foil shield that surrounds a single twisted pair of wires used for I- and V-. See FIGURE 3-7. This wiring scheme must be applied to ensure proper sensor readings using the Model 3061 capacitance option
Guard
V
+
I
+
Cs
V
–
I
–
Shield
FIGURE 3-7
Capacitance Input shield and gard
The 3.496 kHz excitation of the option card can interfere with the sensitive DC measurements of the standard inputs. Tightly twist the lead wires of each sensor and separate them from the leads from the other sensor. Test any system for sensor interference before it is permanently sealed
The information in this section is for a Model 336 configured with thermocouple sensor inputs. Thermocouple inputs are not installed on the standard Model 336, but can be added by purchasing the Model 3060 dual thermocouple input option. Refer to
section 7.6 for installation of the Model 3060.
Do not leave thermocouple inputs unconnected. Short inputs when not in use.
3.7.1 Sensor Input
Terminals
Attach sensor leads to the screws on the off-white ceramic terminal blocks. Sensor connection is important when using thermocouples because the measured signal is small. Many measurement errors can be avoided with proper sensor installation. The block has two thermocouple inputs and each input has two screw terminals; one pos-
itive, one negative. See FIGURE 3-8.
| www.lakeshore.com
38
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
Remove all insulation, then tighten the screws on the thermocouple wires. Keep the ceramic terminal blocks away from heat sources including sunlight and shield them from fans or room drafts.
3.7.2 Thermocouple
Installation
3.7.3 Grounding and
Shielding
3.8 Heater Output
Setup
3.8.1 Heater Output
Description
FIGURE 3-8
Thermocouple input definition and common connector polarities (inputs shown shorted)
Thermocouples are commonly used in high-temperature applications. Cryogenic use of thermocouples offers some unique challenges. A general installation guideline is
provided in section 2.4. Consider the following when using thermocouples at low
temperatures:
D
Thermocouple wire is generally more thermally conductive than other sensor lead wire. Smaller gauge wire and more thermal anchoring may be needed to prevent leads from heating the sample.
D
Attaching lead wires and passing them through vacuum tight connectors is often necessary in cryogenic systems. Remember, the thermocouple wire is the sensor; any time it joins or contacts other metal, there is potential for error.
D
Temperature verification and calibration of room temperature compensation is difficult after the sensor is installed. When possible, keep a piece of scrap wire from each installation for future use.
D
Thermocouples can be spot-welded to the cryostat for good thermal anchoring as long as the cryostat has a potential close to earth ground.
Care must be taken to minimize the amount of noise contributed by ground loops, when grounding thermocouple inputs. For lowest measurement noise, do not ground thermocouple sensors. The instrument operates with slightly more noise if one of the thermocouples is grounded. Be sure to minimize loop area when grounding both thermocouples. The instrument does not offer a shield connection on the terminal block. Twisting the thermocouple wires helps reject noise. If shielding is necessary, extend the shield from the oven or cryostat to cover the thermocouple wire, but do not attach the shield to the instrument.
The following section covers the heater wiring from the vacuum shroud to the instru-
ment for both heater outputs. Specifications are detailed in section 1.3. For help on
choosing and installing an appropriate resistive heater, refer to section 2.5.
Both powered heater outputs (Outputs 1 and 2) are traditional control outputs for a cryogenic temperature controller. Both are variable DC current sources with software settable ranges and limits. Both are configurable for optimization using either a 25
) or a 50
)
heater resistance. At the 50
)
setting, both outputs are limited to a maximum output current of 1 A. At the 25
)
setting, the maximum heater output current is 2 A for Output 1, and 1.41 A for Output 2. The compliance voltage of each output is
50 V minimum, but can reach as high as 58 V if the heater resistance is higher than the nominal setting. Heater power is applied in one of three ranges: high, med, or low.
Each range is one decade lower in power. Refer to TABLE 4-14 for maximum current
and power ratings into different heater resistance.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
3.8.2 Heater Output
Connectors
3.8.2 Heater Output Connectors 39
Dual banana jacks on the rear panel of the instrument are used for connecting wires to the heater outputs. Two standard dual banana plug mating connectors are included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument. This is a common jack and additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronic suppliers, or from Lake Shore as P/N 106-009. The heater is connected between the HI and LO terminals.
3.8.3 Heater Output
Wiring
3.8.4 Heater Output
Noise
3.8.5 Powering Outputs
3 and 4 Using an
External Power Supply
FIGURE 3-9
Rear panel showing heater output connectors
Heater output current is what determines the size (gauge) of wire needed to connect the heater. The maximum current that can be sourced from heater Output 1 is 2 A.
When less current is needed to power a cooling system, it can be limited with range settings.
When setting up a temperature control system, the lead wire for the heater must be capable of carrying a continuous current that is greater than the maximum current.
Wire manufacturers recommend 26 AWG or larger wire to carry 2 A of current, but there is little advantage in using wire smaller than 20 AWG to 22 AWG outside the cryostat. Inside the cryostat, smaller gauge wire is often desirable.
It is recommended to use twisted heater leads. Large changes in heater current can induce noise in measurement leads and twisting reduces the effect. It is also recommended to run heater leads in a separate cable from the measurement leads to further reduce interaction.
There is a chassis ground point at the rear panel of the instrument for shielding the heater cable if necessary. The cable shield can be tied to this point using a 3.18 mm
(#4) spade terminal, or ring connector. The shield should not be connected at the opposite end of the cable and should never be tied to the heater output leads.
For best noise performance, do not connect the resistive heater or its leads to ground.
Also avoid connecting heater leads to sensor leads or any other instrument inputs or outputs.
The heater output circuitry in the Model 336 is capable of sourcing 100 W of power.
This type of circuitry can generate some electrical noise. The Model 336 was designed to generate as little noise as possible, but even noise that is a small percentage of the output voltage or current can be too much when sensitive measurements are being made near by.
Outputs 3 and 4 cannot power heaters directly when used in warm up control mode.
These unpowered outputs must be used to program an external power supply which in turn powers the heater. This section describes choosing and installing an external
supply. Section 5.5 describes operation of warm up control mode.
| www.lakeshore.com
40
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
3.8.5.1 Choosing a Power Supply
D
Voltage Programmable:
the power supply must be voltage programmable so that
Outputs 3 or 4 (control output) can control it. Ideally the supply’s programming input should have a range of 0 to 10 V that corresponds to 0 to 10 V range of the control output. This guarantees that 0 to 100% of the control output scales to
0 to 100% power out of the supply. Supplies with different programming input
ranges can be used as described in section 3.8.5.4.
D
DC Output Capable
: the power supply must be capable of continuous DC output.
Most commercial audio amplifiers are not suitable because they are AC coupled and cannot provide a DC output.
D
Output Type:
most available voltage programmable power supplies are configured for voltage output. This is different than Outputs 1 and 2 on the 336 which are configured for current output. The differences between the two are not significant when used in warm up mode.
D
Output Voltage:
Lake Shore recommends supplies with a working output voltage between 10 V and 50 V. Voltage higher than 50 V poses a shock hazard and should only be used if operator safety can be assured by the installer. Voltage lower than
10 V becomes impractical because the current necessary provide any meaningful power is too high for most cryogenic wiring.
D
Output Power:
there is no limit to the maximum power of the supply. Typical warm up applications normally range between 25 W and 200 W.
3.8.5.2 Power Supply Setup
Follow all operation and safety instruction in the power supply manual during setup.
Consider the following suggestions for protecting the power supply and heater load.
D
Short circuits are common in cryogenic lead wiring. If the power supply does not specify that it is short circuit protected the power output should be wired with a fuse in series to prevent damage.
D
Unipolar power supplies are designed to use a positive programming voltage and some can be damaged if the programming voltage is negative. Be careful when wiring the system to maintain the correct polarity. Also, never set the control output of the Model336 to bipolar mode.
D
Some power supplies can be damaged if there is a programming voltage present at their input when they are turned off. This can happen if the Model 336 and power supply use a different source of line power or are turned on and off individually. It can be avoided if the two instruments share a switched power strip.
D
The heater and wiring in the system must be rated for both the maximum current and maximum voltage provided by the power supply. The Model 336 can be set to warm up using less than full power if the load will not tolerate the full power of the supply.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
3.8.5 Powering Outputs 3 and 4 Using an External Power Supply 41
3.8.5.3 Connecting to the Model 336
The voltage programming cable attaches to the removable terminal block on the rear
panel of the Model 336 (FIGURE 3-10). Output number and polarity of the output
leads are indicated on the silk screen. The negative (–) terminals are connected internally to the instrument chassis to provide a ground reference.
FIGURE 3-10
Output terminal block
In the most basic configuration, a two-conductor cable connects directly from the output terminals to the power supply programming input. Copper wire size
20 AWG to 26 AWG is recommended.
3.8.5.4 Programming Voltages Under 10 V
A voltage divider FIGURE 3-11 can be used to reduce the control output voltage if the
programming input of the power supply has a range of less than 0 V to 10 V to ensure full output resolution, and protection against overloading the external supply programming inputs. The output voltage is proportional to the ratio of resistors
R1 to R2: Vout = 10V x R1/(R1+R2). It is also important to keep the sum of R1 + R2 >
1000
)
or the Model 336 output may not reach the output voltage setting due to internal overload protection. For a programming input range of 0 V to 5 V, recommended values are: R1 = R2 = 2000
)
. For a programming input range of 0 V to 1 V, recommended values are: R1 = 500
)
, R2 = 4500
)
. Exact resistor value, type and tolerance are generally not important for this application.
Model 350
Output 3+
Power supply
R2
Program input+
R1
Output 3– Program input–
FIGURE 3-11
Voltage divider circuit for Output 3
| www.lakeshore.com
42
c
HAPTER
3:
Installation
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.1 General
Chapter 4: Operation
4.1 General 43
This chapter provides instructions for the general operating features of the
Model 336 temperature controller. Advanced operation is in Chapter 5. Computer interface instructions are in Chapter 6.
4.1.1 Understanding
Menu Navigation
FIGURE 4-1
Model 336 front panel
Each feature that is discussed in this chapter will include a menu navigation section.
This section is intended to be a quick guide through the necessary key presses to arrive at and set the desired features. See FIGURE 4-2 and TABLE 4-1 for an explanation of the conventions used in the menu navigation.
A B
C D E
Input Setup
Input
Enter
Q
Room Compensation
(Off or On)
FIGURE 4-2
Menu navigation example
C
D
E
Item
A
B
Convention
Bold
Q
Italic type
(Parentheses)
Enter
Explanation
Typically, the first word in the menu navigation is in bold type, which indicates the first key you will need to press.
The arrow indicates that the screen is advancing to the next screen. In the menu navigation, the item that follows the arrow is the next item you would see on the screen or the next action that you will need to perform.
Often, the words that follow the arrow are in italic type. The italic type indicates that there is a setting that needs to be selected.
The items that follow the italicized word and which are in parentheses, are the available selections to which you can set the desired feature.
Press Enter on the keypad.
TABLE 4-1
Menu navigation key
| www.lakeshore.com
44
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.2 Front Panel
Description
4.2.1 Keypad
Definitions
Key
A, B, C, and D
Setpoint
Proportional (P)
Integral (I)
Derivative (D)
Heater Range
Manual Out
All Off
This section provides a description of the front panel controls and indicators for the
Model 336.
The keypad is divided into two sections. The Direct Operation section includes all keys to the left of the number-pad, and the Menu/Number Pad section includes the standard 12 number-pad keys and the
Up
,
Down
,
Escape
, and
Enter
keys
(FIGURE 4-1). The Direct Operation keys provide one touch access to the most often
used functions of the Model 336. The Number Pad keys, with the exception of the decimal point key, are dual function keys. If the instrument is in the number entry mode, the keys are used to enter numbers. If it is in normal operating mode, the number keys provide menu entry points. An abbreviated description of each key is provided as fol-
lows. A more detailed description of each function is provided in section 4.3
4.2.1.1 Direct Operation Keys
Function
Press these keys for quick access to the display screens for the associated sensor input, or Input
Display mode. Press once for a temporary display that will time-out in 10 s, at which point the display returns to the assigned Display Mode setting. Press the same key again, or press
Escape
before the timeout period, to return the display to the previous Display Mode setting. Pressing and holding one of these keys for 3 s causes the associated Input Display to become the new permanent Display Mode setting, indicated by an audible beep.
When the Model 3062 4-channel scanner option is installed, pressing the D button cycles the display through the display screens for each of the 5 input D channels.
Press this key to enter the control setpoint for the currently displayed loop, if applicable.
Press this key to manually adjust the Proportional control parameter for the currently displayed loop, if applicable.
Press this key to manually adjust the Integral control parameter for the currently displayed loop, if applicable.
Press this key to manually adjust the Derivative control parameter for the currently displayed loop, if applicable.
For Outputs 1 and 2, this key allows selection of High, Med, or Low heater range. For Outputs 3 and
4, this key allows selection of Output On/Off (except when in Monitor Out mode).
Press this key to adjust the Manual Output setting of the currently displayed output, if applicable.
Press this key to set the range for all Outputs to Off (not applicable for Monitor Out mode).
TABLE 4-2
Direct operation keys
Refer to section:
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.2.2 Annunciators 45
Key
Input setup
Output setup
Display setup
Max/Min reset
Curve entry
Zone settings
Autotune
Remote/local
Interface
Relays
Alarm
Escape (exit menu)
Enter
0 – 9, +/-,.
4.2.1.2 Menu/Number Pad Keys
Function
Press this key to configure features related to the inputs.
Press this key to configure features related to the outputs, including configuration of control loops.
Press this key to configure the display.
Press this key to reset the maximum and minimum readings for all inputs.
Press this key to view, edit, copy, and erase temperature curves, and to generate SoftCal curves.
Press this key to enter user-specified control parameters for up to ten temperature zones.
Press this key to configure and execute the Autotune algorithm.
Press this key to toggle the IEEE-488 Remote mode.
Press this key to configure the USB, Ethernet, and IEEE-488 interfaces.
Press this key to configure the two rear-panel relays.
Press this key to configure the Alarm feature.
Press this key to navigate menus, and to select parameters.
Press this key to navigate menus, and to select parameters.
Press this key to cancel a number entry, or parameter selection. You can also use this key to navigate up one level in a setting menu, which exits the menu if at the top level. Press and hold for 3 s to reset instrument parameters to factory default values.
Press this key to accept a number entry, or a parameter selection. You can also use it to navigate deeper into a menu setting screen. Press and hold for 3 s to lock or unlock the keypad.
Press this key to enter numeric data. This includes a key to toggle plus (+) or minus (-), and a key for entry of a decimal point.
TABLE 4-3
Menu/number pad keys
Refer to section
Section 5.2 Front Panel Curve Entry
Operations.
4.6.1 for USB; 4.6.2 for Ethernet; 4.6.3
for IEEE-488
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4.2.2 Annunciators
LED
Remote
Ethernet
Alarm
Control outputs
LED annunciators:
three blue four red LED annunciators are included to provide visual feedback of the following operation.
Refer to section Function
On steady when the instrument is in Remote mode (may be controlled via the IEEE-488 Interface).
If the LED is not illuminated, the instrument is in Local mode.
On steady when Ethernet is connected and properly configured. Blinks at a slow pace when attempting to acquire an IP address. Blinks rapidly when in an error state.
On steady when the alarm feature for any sensor input is turned on and the input’s Visual parameter is set to On. Blinks when any input sensor alarms are in the alarming state and the alarming input's Visual parameter is set to On.
On steady when the corresponding output is in the On state (does not apply to Monitor Out mode).
Off when corresponding output is in the Off state, or when it is set to Monitor Out mode.
TABLE 4-4
LED annunciators
| www.lakeshore.com
46
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.2.3 General Keypad
Operation
Display annunciators
: include symbols for sensor inputs and their respective temperatures and units.
Annunciator
D1
D2
D3
D4
C
D
A
B
C
V
D5
K
)
k
)
mV
Function
Sensor input A
Sensor input B
Sensor input C
Sensor input D
Sensor input D, channel 1
Sensor input D, channel 2
Sensor input D, channel 3
Sensor input D, channel 4
Sensor input D, channel 5
Temperature in kelvin
Temperature in degrees Celsius
Sensor units of volts
Sensor units of ohms
Sensor units of kilohms
Sensor units of millivolts
TABLE 4-5
Display annunciators
There are five basic keypad operations: direct operation, menu navigation, number entry, alpha-numeric entry and setting selection.
D
Direct Operation:
the key function occurs as soon as you press the key; these include the
Setpoint
,
P
,
I
,
D
,
Manual Out
, and
All Off
keys.
D
Menu Navigation:
each menu has a list of configurable parameters. Menus that apply to multiple entities (for example, Input Setup could apply to Input A, B, C, or
D) have a first level selection to determine which entity to configure (for instance,
Input C). Once the first level selection is made, the list of menu parameters is displayed. The parameter labels are displayed on the left, and the current value of each parameter is displayed on the right. In this screen, use the
and
keys to move the highlight up or down, respectively. Press
Enter
to enter the setting mode for the highlighted parameter. The type of setting mode depends on the type of parameter highlighted. The possible setting modes are: Number Entry,
Alpha-Numeric Entry, and Setting Selection. Refer to the respective entry mode descriptions below. During menu navigation, press
Escape
(Exit Menu) to perform the Exit Menu function; this will not cancel any setting changes.
D
Number Entry:
allows you to enter number data using the number pad keys. Number pad keys include the numbers
0–9
,
+/-
, and the decimal point. The proportional control parameter is an example of a parameter that requires number entry. During a number entry sequence use the number entry keys to enter the number value, press
Enter
to accept the new data. Press
Escape
once to clear the entry, and twice to return to the Menu Navigation mode.
D
Alpha-Numeric Entry:
allows you to enter character data using the number pad keys, and the
and
keys. The input sensor name is an example of a parameter that requires Alpha-Numeric Entry. Press
or
to cycle through the upper and lower case English alphabet, numerals 0 through 9, and a small selection of common symbols. Press
Enter
to advance the cursor to the next position, or to save the string and return from Alpha-Numeric Entry mode if in the last position. Press
Escape
to move the cursor back one position, or to cancel all changes and return from Alpha-Numeric Entry mode if at the first position. Press any of the number pad keys, except for
+/-
, to enter that character into the string and advance the cursor to the next position automatically, or to save the string and return to
Menu Navigation mode if in the last position. Use the
+/-
key to enter the whitespace character.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.3 Display Setup 47
D
Setting Selection:
allows you to select from a list of values. During a selection sequence, use the
or
keys to select a parameter value. To select the highlighted parameter as the new setting, press
Ente;
. the setting is saved and the mode returns to Menu Navigation. Press
Escape
at any time while the parameter list is displayed to cancel any changes and return to Menu Navigation mode.
4.3 Display Setup
The intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic, bright, graphic display, and LED indicators enhance the user-friendly front panel interface of the Model 336. The
Model 336 offers a bright, graphic, liquid, crystal display, with an LED backlight that simultaneously displays up to eight readings.
4.3.1 Display Modes The Model 336 provides several display modes designed to accommodate different instrument configurations and user preferences. The Four Loop display mode offers large format sensor readings of each of the four sensor inputs, as well as setpoint and heater output information for associated outputs, all on one screen. The Input display modes provide detailed information about the relevant sensor input, and the associated output. The Custom display mode provides a means for you to assign different types of information to specific sections of the display.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Mode
Q
(Four Loop, Custom, Input A, Input B, Input C, Input D)
Default: Custom
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
4.3.1.1 Four Loop Mode
Four Loop mode provides a limited amount of information about each of the four sensor inputs, and the associated control loops. Each quadrant of the display is dedicated to one sensor input and the associated loop, if applicable. The top line of each quadrant contains the input letter (A, B, C, or D) followed by the user-assignable sensor name. The sensor readings are presented just below the sensor name in the large character format for easier viewing from a distance. The sensor reading is displayed in the units assigned to the respective sensor input's Preferred Units setting, which can
be found under the Input Setup menu (section 4.4). If the input is assigned as the Con-
trol Input of a control loop, then the control Setpoint and Heater Output parameters are displayed under the sensor reading. If the output is in Open Loop mode, then the
Setpoint parameter is not shown.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Mode
Q
Four Loop Mode
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
FIGURE 4-3
Four loop mode
| www.lakeshore.com
48
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.3.1.2 All Inputs Mode
All Inputs mode provides a limited amount of information about each of the sensor inputs. Similar to the Four Loop mode, each quadrant of the display is dedicated to one sensor input with the input letter being displayed, followed by the user-assignable input name. The sensor reading is displayed in large character format, using the units assigned to the respective input’s Input Units parameter. When a Model 3062 option is installed, all eight sensor inputs and channels are displayed, and the display mode can be configured as large or small. When it is configured as large, the input name is not shown and the sensor reading is displayed in large character format.
When it is configured as small, the input name is shown and the sensor reading is displayed in the normal smaller character format.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Mode
Q
All Inputs Mode
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
4.3.1.3 Input Display Modes
An Input Display mode exists for each of the four sensor inputs on the Model 336.
These modes are referenced as Input A, Input B, Input C, and Input D in the Display
Mode parameter list. Each of these modes provides detailed information relevant to the respective sensor input.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 4-4
Input display mode
The top half of the display provides information related to the sensor input. The input letter is displayed, followed by the user-assignable input name. The sensor reading is displayed in large character format, using the units assigned to the respective input’s
Input Units parameter. The top half of the display also shows the maximum and the minimum sensor reading since the last Max/Min reset.
The bottom half of the display contains information related to the control loop that is using the sensor input (provided in the top half of the display) as its Control Input parameter. Only the items applicable to the control loop will be displayed. Specifically, the number of the control loop output, followed by the Output Mode setting is displayed. The P, I, D, Manual Output, Setpoint, and Heater Output information of the control loop are also displayed. If no control loop uses the sensor input, then no information is applicable.
The input display modes are unique in that they can be set temporarily by pressing the
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
front panel keys. After the key is pressed, the respective input display mode becomes active for approximately 10 s before returning to the configured display mode. This provides quick access to each input and each associated control loop for gathering information, or changing control loop parameters. Press any active keys while the temporary display mode is active to reset the timeout period of the temporary display. Press
Escape
, or the same temporary display key again, to manually return the display to the configured display mode. Press and hold a temporary display key until an audible beep is heard (about 3 s) to cause the configured display mode to change to the input display mode associated with that key.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Mode
Q
Input (A, B, C, D)
(Each input can also be accessed by pressing and holding A, B, C, or D.)
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
4.3.1 Display Modes 49
4.3.1.4 Custom Display Mode
The custom display mode provides the ability to customize the displayed front panel information to your preference. As with the input display modes, the custom display mode shows sensor input information in the top half of the screen, and control loop information in the bottom half. The sensor input information can be customized to display two large character sensor readings with names, four large character sensor readings without names, or eight small character format sensor readings without names. Each displayed reading can use any sensor as the input, and can be displayed in units of kelvin, Celsius, sensor, min, or max.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Mode
Q
Custom
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
D
Locations
: depending on the Number of Displays parameter, there can be anywhere from two to eight display locations for displaying sensor readings. The placement of a given display location on the front panel LCD depends on the
Number of Displays setting (FIGURE 4-5).
FIGURE 4-5
Top to bottom: Model 336 screen images showing 2, 4 and 8 display locations
D
Number of Custom display locations:
the Number of Displays parameter determines how many sensor readings are displayed, as well as the character size of the displayed readings. If “2 (Large)” is selected, then two large character readings are displayed, along with sensor names. If “4 (Large)” is selected, then four large character readings are displayed, without sensor names. If “8 (Small)” is selected, then eight small character readings are displayed, without sensor names.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Number of Locations
Q
(2 Large, 4 Large, 8 Small)
| www.lakeshore.com
50
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
D
Input and Units:
each available display location has an associated Input and Units setting. The Input parameter determines which sensor will be used as the input of the displayed data. The Input can be any of the four sensor inputs, or None. If
None is selected, then the display location will be blank. The Units parameter determines which units to display the reading in.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Location
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
Input
Q
(None, Input A, Input B,
Input C, Input D)
Display Setup
Q
Location
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
Units
Q
(Kelvin, Celsius, Sensor,
Min, Max, Sensor Name)
Interface Command:
DISPFLD
Location
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Input
Input A
Input B
Input C
Input D
Input A
Input B
Input C
Input D
TABLE 4-6
Defaults
Units
Kelvin
Sensor
D
Displayed Output:
in the Custom Display mode the bottom half of the display is dedicated for output and control loop information for one of the four outputs.
The source of this information depends on the output selected for the Displayed
Output parameter. If the selected output is configured as a control loop output, then all associated control loop parameters will be displayed.
When viewing the Custom Display screen, the configured Displayed Output is signified by L1, L2, L3 or L4, followed by the control loop input, if applicable. The L character stands for Loop, but will be displayed even for outputs that are not configured as control loop outputs.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Displayed Output
Q
Output (1, 2, 3, 4)
D
Default: Output 1
Interface Command:
DISPLAY
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.3.2 Display Contrast 51
4.3.2 Display Contrast The front panel LCD display contrast can be adjusted for optimal viewing. The default value should work well in most standard room temperature environments, but deviations from room temperature, and extreme viewing angles can cause the display contrast to require adjustment for optimal viewing.
Menu Navigation:
Display Setup
Q
Display Contrast
Q
(1 to 32)
Default: 28
Interface Command:
BRIGT
4.4 Input Setup
The Model 336 supports a variety of temperature sensors manufactured by
Lake Shore and other manufacturers. An appropriate sensor type must be selected for each input. If the exact sensor model is not shown, use the sensor input performance
chart in TABLE 4-7 to choose an input type with similar range and excitation. For
additional details on sensors, refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and
Control Catalog or visit our website at www.lakeshore.com.
Any unused input should be set to disabled.
Sensor Type
Display
Message
Input Range Excitation Coefficient
Curve
Format
Lake Shore Sensors*
Silicon Diode
Diode 0 V–2.5 V 10 µA, 1 mA Negative V/K
DT-400 Series, DT-500,
DT-670 Series
Gallium Aluminum
Arsenide Diode
Diode 0 V– 10 V 10 µA, 1 mA Negative V/K TG-120 Series
Platinum RTD,
Rhodium-Iron RTD
PTC RTD
(Platinum)
0
)
to 10 k
)
(7 ranges)
1 mA Positive
)
/K
PT-100 Series Platinum,
RF-800 Rhodium-Iron,
RF-100 Rhodium-Iron
Negative Temperature
Coefficient (NTC) RTD
NTC RTD
(Cernox™)
0
)
to 100 k
)
(9 Ranges)
100 nA to 1 mA
(decade steps in power, autorange maintains <10 mV)
Negative log
)
/K
Cernox™, Carbon Glass,
Germanium, Rox™, and Thermox™
Thermocouple
(Option 3060 only)
Thermocouple ±50 mV NA Positive mV/K
Chromel-AuFe (0.07%),
Type E (Chromel-Constantan),
Type K (Chromel-Alumel),
Type T (Copper-Constantan)
Refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog for details on Lake Shore temperature sensors.
TABLE 4-7
Sensor input types
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
(Disabled, Diode, PTC RTD [Platinum],
NTC RTD [Cernox], Thermocouple)
Default: Diode
Interface Command:
INTYPE
| www.lakeshore.com
52
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.4.1 Diode Sensor
Input Setup
4.4.2 Positive
Temperature
Coefficient (PTC)
Resistor Sensor Input
Setup
4.4.3 Negative
Temperature
Coefficient (NTC)
Resistor Sensor Input
Setup
4.4.4 Range Selection
Diode sensors include the silicon and the gallium aluminum arsenide sensors
detailed in TABLE 4-7. Input ranges are selectable to 0–2.5 V or 0–10 V, and standard
excitation current is 10 µA.
As an alternative to the standard diode excitation current of 10 µA, you may select a 1 mA excitation. The 1 mA excitation current is not calibrated, and will not work properly with standard Lake Shore diode sensors. For protection against accidentally setting the 1 mA excitation current, the Diode Current setting is automatically set to 10
µA every time the Sensor Type is set to Diode.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
Diode
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Diode Current
Q
(10 µA or 1 mA)
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Range
Q
(2.5 V [Silicon] or 10 V [GaAlAs])
Default:
Sensor Type
Q
Diode
Diode Current
Q
10 µA
Range
Q
2.5 V (Silicon)
Interface Command:
INTYPE, DIOCUR
PTC resistor sensors include the platinum and rhodium-iron sensors detailed in
TABLE 4-7. More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1-2. The Model 336
supplies a 1 mA excitation current for the PTC resistor sensor type. A resistance range selection is available in order to achieve better reading resolution. Autorange is enabled by default in order to provide the best possible reading resolution, but does
not affect the sensor current excitation. Refer to section 4.4.4 for details on manually
selecting the range. Current Reversal is also enabled by default in order to compen-
sate for thermal EMF voltages. Refer to section 4.4.5 for details on the Thermal EMF
Compensation (Current Reversal) feature.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(
A, B, C,
or
D
)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
PTC RTD (Platinum)
Interface Command:
INTYPE
NTC resistor sensors include Cernox™, Rox, Thermox and others detailed in TABLE 4-7.
More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1-2. The excitation current for the
NTC RTD sensor type can vary between 100 nA and 1 mA, depending on resistance range. When autoranging is enabled, the range will be automatically selected so that the excitation voltage is below 10 mV. This keeps the power dissipated in the sensor at a minimum, yet still enough to provide accurate measurements. Current Reversal is also enabled by default in order to compensate for thermal EMF voltages. Refer to
section 4.4.5 for details on the Thermal EMF Compensation (Current Reversal) fea-
ture.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
NTC RTD (Cernox)
Interface Command:
INTYPE
The Model 336 is equipped with an autoranging feature that will automatically select the appropriate resistance range for the connected resistive temperature device. In some cases it may be desirable to manually select the resistance range. To manually select a resistance range, set the Autorange parameter to Off, then use the
Range parameter to select the desired range. Autorange will be On by default whenever the Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC RTD or NTC RTD. Autorange is not available for the Diode sensor type.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.4.5 Thermal
Electromotive Force
(EMF) Compensation
4.4.5 Thermal Electromotive Force (EMF) Compensation 53
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Autorange
Q
(Off or On)
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Range
Q
(See table below)
Default: On
Interface Command:
INTYPE
Sensor Type
Diode
PTC RTD (Platinum)
NTC RTD (Cernox)
Available Range Settings Maximum Sensor Power Sensor Excitation
2.5 V (Silicon)
10 V (GaAlAs)
10
)
10 µW
30
)
30
100
)
300
)
25 µW (at 10 µA exictation)
100 µW (at 10 µA excitation)
100 µW
300 µW
10 µA, 1 mA
10 µA, 1 mA
1 mA
1 k
)
1
3 k
)
3 mW
10 k
)
10
10
)
30
)
10 µW
2.7 µW
100
)
300
)
1 k
)
3 k
)
10 k
)
30 k
)
1 µW
270 nW
100 nW
27 nW
10 nW
2.7 nW
100 k
)
1
1 mA
300 µA
100 µA
30 µA
10 µA
3 µA
1 µA
300 nA
TABLE 4-8
Range and sensor power
To keep power low and avoid sensor self heating, the sensor excitation is kept low.
There are two major problems that occur when measuring the resulting small DC voltages. The first is external noise entering the measurement through the sensor leads, which is discussed with sensor setup. The second is the presence of thermal
EMF voltages, or thermocouple voltages, in the lead wiring. Thermal EMF voltages appear when there is a temperature gradient across a piece of voltage lead. Thermal
EMF voltages must exist because the sensor is almost never the same temperature as the instrument. To minimize them, use careful wiring, make sure the voltage leads are symmetrical in the type of metal used and how they are joined, and keep unnecessary heat sources away from the leads. Even in a well-designed system thermal EMF voltages can be an appreciable part of a low voltage sensor measurement.
The Model 336 can help with a thermal compensation algorithm. The instrument will automatically reverse the polarity of the current source every other reading. The average of the positive and negative sensor readings will cancel the thermal EMF voltage that is present in the same polarity, regardless of current direction. This correction algorithm is enabled by default for RTD sensor types, but can be turned off using the Current Reversal parameter.
The Current Reversal parameter defaults to On anytime the Sensor Type parameter is changed to PTC RTD or NTC RTD.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C, or D)
Q
Current Reversal
Q
(Off or On)
Default: On
Interface Command:
INTYPE
| www.lakeshore.com
54
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.4.6 Thermocouple
Sensor Input Setup
(Model 3060 Only)
When a Model 3060 Thermocouple option is installed in the Model 336, a setting of
Thermocouple becomes available under the Sensor Type parameter in the Input
Setup menu. The standard diode/RTD sensor inputs can still be used when the Thermocouple option is installed, but the Thermocouple and standard inputs cannot be
used simultaneously. Refer to section 7.6.1 to install the Model 3060.
Thermocouples include a variety of commercial (such as E, K, T) and specialty types such as cryogenic (Chromel–AuFe). Standard curves are included in the Model 336 for
the types listed in TABLE 4-7. Other types can be used as long as an appropriate tem-
perature response curve is loaded as a user curve. Representative thermocouple spec-
ifications are given in TABLE 1-2. The Model 336 provides one thermocouple range
and no excitation because thermocouples do not require it. Internal room tempera-
ture compensation is included for convenience (section 4.4.6.2) and should be cali-
brated before use. Room temperature compensation is enabled by default, but can be turned off if external compensation is being used.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(C or D)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
Thermocouple
Interface Command:
INTYPE
4.4.6.1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation
Room-temperature compensation is required to give accurate temperature measurements with thermocouple sensors. It corrects for the temperature difference between the instrument thermal block and the curve normalization temperature of
0 °C. An external ice bath is the most accurate form of compensation, but is often inconvenient. The Model 336 has internal room-temperature compensation that is adequate for most applications. You can turn internal compensation on or off. It operates with any thermocouple type that has an appropriate temperature response curve loaded. Room-temperature compensation is not meaningful for sensor units measurements.
Room temperature compensation should be calibrated as part of every installation
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(C or D)
Q
Room Compensation
Q
(Off or On)
Default: On
Interface Command:
INTYPE
4.4.6.2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure
Factory calibration of the instrument is accurate to within approximately ±1 K. Differences in thermocouple wire and installation technique create errors greater than the instrument errors. To achieve the best accuracy, calibrate with the thermocouple actually being used, because it eliminates most sources of error. If that is not possible, use a thermocouple made from the same wire.
It is best practice to use the same material for thermocouple wires; if it is at all possible, it is also best to avoid splices. When splices are necessary, continue the splice with the same type of material.
For less demanding applications, a short across the input terminals will suffice. Both thermocouple inputs should be calibrated, even if they use the same type of thermocouple. An appropriate curve must be selected and room temperature compensation must be turned on before calibration can be started.
Follow this procedure to calibrate room temperature compensation:
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.4.7 Capacitance
Sensor Input Setup
(Model 3061 Only)
4.4.7 Capacitance Sensor Input Setup (Model 3061 Only) 55
For best results, the calibration temperature should be close to the measurement temperature that requires best accuracy.
1. Attach a thermocouple sensor or direct short across the input terminals of the
thermocouple input. See FIGURE 3-8 for polarity.
2. Place the instrument away from drafts. If calibrating using a short, place an accurate room-temperature thermometer near the terminal block.
3. Allow the instrument to warm up for at least ½ hr without moving or handling the sensor.
4. If calibrating with a short, skip to step 6, otherwise insert the thermocouple into the ice-bath, liquid nitrogen, helium Dewar, or other known, fixed temperature.
5. Read the displayed temperature. If the temperature display is not as expected, check to be sure that the thermocouple is making good thermal contact. If possible, add a thermal mass to the end of the thermocouple.
6. Press
Input Setup
and select the corresponding sensor input. Scroll down to the
Room Calibration parameter and press
Enter
.
7. The current temperature reading is displayed in kelvin. Press
Enter
to enter Number Entry mode. Enter the true temperature that the thermocouple should read.
If input is shorted, then enter the actual room temperature measured by the thermometer. Press
Enter
to save the value.
8. To verify calibration, check that the temperature reading for the calibrated input matches the room temperature calibration setting value.
Any previous calibration can be cleared using the Clear Calibration submenu.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Room Calibration
Q
Clear Calibration
Default: Room calibration cleared
When a Model 3061 capacitance option is installed in the Model 336, a setting of
Capacitance becomes available under the Sensor Type parameter in the Input Setup menu. The standard sensor inputs can still be used when the capacitance option is installed, but the capacitance and standard inputs cannot be used simultaneously.
Refer to section 7.6.1 to install the Model 3061.
Capacitive sensors in the Model 336 do not support temperature conversion; therefore temperature response curves cannot be selected. Any feature of the Model 336 that requires temperature to operate is not supported with the option card. Refer to
section 3.6 for more information on using the Model 3061.
4.4.7.1 Range Selection
The capacitance option input has two input voltage ranges, 15 nF and 150 nF. The lower range is specified to 15 nF, but can read up to 25 nF, and is recommended for
CS-401 series sensors. The higher range is specified to 150 nF, but can read up to
250 nF, and is recommended for CS-510 series sensors.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(D)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
Capacitance
Interface Command:
INTYPE
| www.lakeshore.com
56
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.4.8 4-Channel
Scanner Input Setup
(Model 3062 Only)
4.4.7.2 Temperature Coefficient Selection
Capacitance sensors can have both a positive and negative temperature coefficient
(slope). They have a positive temperature coefficient at very low temperatures and a negative temperature coefficient at warmer temperature. Sensor data sheets detail where the coefficient changes. There is often a temperature range where the sensor is not usable. Temperature control is impossible if the Model 336 does not know which slope the sensor is on. System overheating can result if the wrong coefficient is chosen. The user must select a temperature coefficient before control is switched to the capacitance input.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(D)
Q
Temp Coefficient
Q
(Negative or Positive)
Interface Command:
INTYPE
4.4.7.3 Control Channel Changes
The capacitance input continues control at a stable temperature established with another sensor. Allow the temperature to stabilize for one hour after large temperature changes to allow capacitance sensor recovery.
When the control channel is changed to the capacitance input, the Model 336 automatically changes the control setpoint to the present capacitance reading. It is not necessary for the user to write down the capacitance value and enter a new setpoint.
Control parameters, P and I, may need to be changed for stable control.
When a Model 3062 4-Channel Scanner option is installed in the Model 336, 4 additional channels, D2, D3, D4, and D5, become available for use. The channels are scanned with the Model 336’s Input D at a reduced update rate. The scanner option channels can be configured for diode, negative temperature coefficient resistor, or positive temperature coefficient resistor sensors. Specifications for the 4-channel scanner option are given in TABLE 4-9.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(D2, D3, D4, or D5)
Q
Sensor Type
Q
(Disabled, Diode, PTC RTD
(Platinum), NTC RTD (Cernox)
Default: Diode
Interface Command:
INTYPE
4.4.8.1 Type and Range Selection
The 4-channel scanner option can be configured as either diode, PTC RTD, or NTC RTD.
Autorange will be on by default whenever the Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC RTD or NTC RTD. To manually select the resistance range, set the Autorange parameter to
Off
, then use the Range parameter to select the desired range.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(D2, D3, D4, or D5)
Q
Autorange
Q
(Off or On)
Input Setup
Q
Input
(D2, D3, D4, or D5)
Q
Range
Q
(See TABLE 4-9)
Default: On
Interface Command:
INTYPE
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.4.9 Curve Selection
4.4.9 Curve Selection 57
Sensor Type
Available
Range
Settings
Maximum Sensor Power
Sensor
Excitation
Diode
PTC RTD
(Platinum)
NTC RTD
(Cernox)
2.5 V (Silicon)
10 V (GaAlAs)
25 µW (at 10 µA excitation)
100 µW (at 10 µ excitation)
10
)
10 µW
30
)
30
100
)
300
)
100 µW
300 µW
10 µA, 1mA
10 µA, 1mA
1 mA
1 k
)
1
3 k
)
3 mW
10 k
)
10
10
)
30
)
10 µW
2.7 µW
100
)
300
)
1 k
)
3 k
)
10 k
)
30 k
)
1 µW
270 nW
100 nW
27 nW
10 nW
2.7 nW
100 k
)
1
1 mA
300 µA
100 µA
30 µA
10 µA
3 µA
1 µA
300 nA
TABLE 4-9
Model 3062 4-channel scanner option range and sensor power
4.4.8.2 Update Rate
The update rate for the scanned input channels is dependent on the number of channels enabled and how many enabled channels are configured for 100 k
)
NTC RTD. The scanned input channels are scanned at a rate of 10 rdg/s (100 ms/rdg), with the exception of any channel that is configured for 100 k
)
NTC RTD. Channels configured for 100 k
)
NTC RTD are scanned at a rate of 5 rdg/s (200 ms/rdg) when other channels are enabled, or if it is reversing. See TABLE 4-10.
Number of scanner channels enabled
Update rate
1
2
3
4
5
10 rdg/s (100 ms/rdg)
5 rdg/s (200 ms/rdg)
3
1/d
rdg/s (300 ms/rdg)
2 q
rdg/s (400 ms/rdg)
2 rdg/s (500 ms/rdg)
TABLE 4-10
Model 3062 4-channel scanner option reading update rate
System control performance may be affected by a decreased update rate. Filtering is
affected by a decreased update rate. Refer to section 4.4.10 for more information
The Model 336 supports a variety of temperature sensors manufactured by
Lake Shore and other manufacturers. After the appropriate sensor type is selected
(section 2.2), an appropriate curve may be selected. The Model 336 can use curves
from several sources. Standard curves are preloaded with every instrument and numbered 1 to 20. User curves, numbered 21 to 59, can be used when a sensor does not match a standard curve. SoftCal™ calibrations are stored as user curves, or you can
| www.lakeshore.com
58
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
During normal operation, only the curves that share the input type you have selected are displayed. If the curve you wish to select does not appear in the selection sequence make sure the curve format matches the recommended format for the
input type selected. Refer to TABLE 4-7.
The sensor reading of the instrument can always be displayed in sensor units. If a temperature response curve is selected for an input, its readings may also be displayed in temperature.
Curve
Number
Curve Name Sensor Type Model Number Temperature Range** For Data Points, Refer To:
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
DT-470
DT-670
DT-500-D*
DT-500-E1*
Reserved
PT-100
PT-1000*
RX-102A-AA
RX-202A-AA
Reserved
Reserved
Type K
Type E
Type T
AuFe 0.03%*
AuFe 0.07%
17
18
19
20
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
—
—
—
—
21 - 59 User Curves —
*No longer offered by Lake Shore
**Instrument may not support the sensor over its entire range
Diode
Diode
Diode
Diode
—
PTC RTD
PTC RTD
NTC RTD
NTC RTD
—
—
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
TABLE 4-11
Sensor curves
DT-470
DT-670
DT-500-D
DT-500-E1
—
PT-100
PT-1000
Rox RX-102A
Rox RX-202A
—
—
Type K
Type E
Type T
AuFe 0.03%*
AuFe 0.07%
—
—
—
—
—
1.4 - 475 K
1.4 - 500 K
1.4 - 365 K
1.1 - 330 K
—
30 - 800 K
30 - 800 K
0.05 - 40 K
0.05 - 40 K
—
—
3 - 1645 K
3 - 1274 K
3 - 670 K
3.5 - 500 K
3.15 - 610 K
—
—
—
—
—
Once the input is configured (section 4.4), you may choose a temperature curve. Any
standard or user curve that matches the format of the sensor type configured for a given input will be available under the Curve parameter in the Input Setup menu for that input. You are also given the choice of None. When set to None, front panel readings configured for kelvin or Celsius will display the NOCURV message and the interface will report 0 K and –273.15 °C for KRDG and CRDG queries, respectively. Data points for standard curves are detailed in Appendix C.
Table D-1
Table D-2
Table D-3
Table D-3
—
Table D-4
Table D-4
Table D-5
Table D-6
—
—
Table D-7
Table D-8
Table D-9
Table D-10
Table D-11
—
—
—
—
—
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Curve
Q
(Any curve of matching type)
4.4.10 Filter The reading filter applies exponential smoothing to the sensor input readings. If the filter is turned on for a sensor input, all reading values for that input are filtered. The filter is a running average so it does not change the update rate of an input. Filtered readings are not used for control functions but they are used for all input features including Max/Min.
The number of filter points determines filter bandwidth. One filter point corresponds to one new reading on that input. A larger number of points does more smoothing, but also slows the instruments response to real changes in temperature. The default number of filter points is 8, which settles to within six time constants of a step change value in 45 readings, or 4.5 s.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.4.10 Filter 59
The time constant (time it takes to settle to within 36.8% of the step value after a step change) for a given number of filter points can be derived using the following formula:
TC = 0.1 / (ln (N / (N - 1)), where TC is one time constant, and N is the number of filter
points. A reading is usually considered settled after six time constants. TABLE 4-12
shows a sampling of filter settings and the resulting time constant, settle time, and equivalent noise bandwidth.
Filter points
8
16
2
4
32
64
Time constant
0.14 s
0.35 s
0.75 s
1.55 s
3.15 s
6.35 s
Settle time
(6 time constants)
0.9 s
2.1 s
4.5 s
9.3 s
18.9 s
38.1 s
TABLE 4-12
Filter settle time and bandwidth
Equivalent noise bandwidth (
p
TC)
1.733 Hz
0.719 Hz
0.334 Hz
0.161 Hz
0.079 Hz
0.039 Hz
The filter window is a limit for restarting the filter. If a single reading is different from the filter value by more than the limit, the instrument will assume the change was intentional and restart the filter. Filter window is set in percent of full scale range.
When the Model 3062 4-channel scanner option card is installed, the time it takes to get a new reading is increased if more than one scanner channel is enabled
or
a channel is configured for a range that requires a reduced update rate. This reduction in update rate modifies the time constant of the filter. The time constant of the filter can be derived using the formula TC = T/(In(N/(N-1)), where TC is one time constant, T is the update rate of the channel in seconds per reading, and N is the number of filter
points. Refer to section 4.4.8.2 for information on update rates of the Model 3062.
TABLE 4-13 shows a sampling of enabled scanner channels with the number of filter
points set to 8 and resulting time constant, settle time, and equivalent noise bandwidth.
Scanner channels enabled
3
4
1
2
5
Time constant with 8 filter points
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s
3.74 s
Settle time (6 time constants)
4.5 s
9 s
13.5 s
18.0 s
22.5 s
TABLE 4-13
Example of a filter settle time and bandwidth for a
Model 3062 4-channel scanner option card
Equivalent noise bandwidth (
p
TC)
0.334 Hz
0.167 Hz
0.111 Hz
0.083 Hz
0.067 Hz
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Filter
Q
(Off or On)
Input Setu
p
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Filter Points
Q
(2 to 64)
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Filter Window
Q
(1% to 10%)
Default:
Filter
Q
(Off)
Filter Points
Q
8
Filter Window
Q
10%
| www.lakeshore.com
60
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.4.11 Input Name
4.4.12 Temperature
Limit
4.4.13 Preferred Units
4.4.14 Max/Min
4.5 Output and
Control Setup
To increase usability and reduce confusion, the Model 336 provides a means of assigning a name to each of the four sensor inputs. The designated input name is used on the front panel display whenever possible to indicate which sensor reading is being displayed. It is also used in the output section of the custom display mode to denote which sensor input is associated with the displayed output to form a control
loop. Refer to section 4.2.3 for Alpha-Numeric entry.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Input Name
Q
(15 Character String)
Default:
Input
(A, B, C, D)
Interface Command:
INNAME
The Temperature Limit parameter provides a means of protecting your equipment from damage by shutting down all control outputs when the assigned temperature limit is exceeded on any sensor input. The parameter is available for each of the four sensor inputs. A temperature limit of 0 K (default value) turns this feature off.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Temperature Limit
Q
(0K to 2999K)
Default: 0.0000 K
Interface Command:
TLIMIT
The Preferred Units parameter setting determines which units are used to display setpoint and max/min parameters whenever these parameters are displayed in any display mode. The sensor reading is also displayed in Preferred Units in all display modes except for the Custom display mode, where each sensor location can be assigned specific display units.
Menu Navigation:
Input Setup
Q
Input
(A, B, C or D)
Q
Preferred Units
Q
(K, C, or Sensor)
The Max/Min feature captures and stores the highest (Max) and lowest (Min) reading taken since the last reset. The Preferred Units parameter, under the Input Setup menu, determines the units used for capturing Max and Min.
Max and Min are always being captured, so there is no need to turn the feature on or off. The readings are reset when the instrument is turned off, sensor input parameters are changed, or the Max/Min Reset key is pressed.
Menu Navigation:
Max/Min Reset
Once the sensor inputs have been configured (section 4.4), the outputs can be config-
ured. The Output Setup menu is used to create control loops for controlling temperature, whether using feedback (closed loop) or manually setting the output (open loop). This section describes how to operate the output and control features, and how to set control parameters. Each control parameter should be considered before turning on a control loop output or the instrument may not be able to perform the most simple control functions. A good starting point is deciding which control loop to use, whether to operate in open or closed control mode and which tuning mode is best for the application. Other parameters fall into place once these have been chosen.
Section 2.7 of this manual describes the principals of closed loop proportional, inte-
gral, and derivative (PID) control.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.5.1 Heater Outputs
4.5.1 Heater Outputs 61
Heater Outputs 1 and 2 are traditional control loop heater outputs for a cryogenic temperature controller. The two outputs are identical except in the amount of power available. Output 1 can provide up to 100 W, and Output 2 can provide up to 50 W.
They each include a large set of hardware and software features making them very flexible and easy to use. The heater outputs are well-regulated DC outputs. This provides quiet, stable control for a broad range of temperature control systems in a fully integrated package. The power ranges for each output provide decade steps in power.
4.5.1.1 Max Current and Heater Resistance
The Model 335 heater outputs are designed to work optimally into a 25
)
or 50
) heater. The Heater Resistance and Max Current parameters work together to limit the maximum available power into the heater. This is useful for preventing heater damage or limiting the maximum heater power into the system. When using a 25
)
or
50
)
heater, set the Heater Resistance parameter accordingly. The Max Current setting will then provide multiple discrete current limit values that correspond to common heater power ratings. The available current limits keep the output operating within the voltage compliance limit to ensure the best possible resolution. These
parameters work with the Heater Range parameter (section 4.5.1.5.8) to provide
safety and flexibility.
If you are not using a standard heater resistance, set the Heater Resistance setting to
25
)
for any resistance less than 50
)
, or to 50
)
for any higher heater resistance. The user max current setting is useful when using a non-standard heater resistance value.
Refer to section 4.5.1.1.1 for more information on User Max Current. TABLE 4-14 pro-
vides examples of different heater resistances and max current settings, and the resulting maximum heater power. The maximum heater powers in bold represent the discrete current limits available under the Max Current setting for 25
)
and 50
) heaters.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Heater Resistance
Q
(25
)
or 50
)
)
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Max Current
Q
(User, 0.707 A, 1 A, 1.414 A, or 2 A)
Default:
Heater Resistance
Q
25
)
Output 1
Q
Max Current
Q
2 A
Output 2
Q
Max Current
Q
1.414 A
Interface Command: HTRSET
4.5.1.1.1 User Max Current
When using a heater that is not 25
)
, 100 W or 50
)
, 50 W the provided discrete current limits may not be appropriate. The User Max Current setting is available for this case. The optimal maximum current value should be calculated based on the heater’s power rating, or the maximum desired heater output power, whichever is lower. The heater output compliance voltage (50 V for both heater outputs) should also be taken into account in order to maximize heater setting resolution. This calculated current limit can then be entered using the User Max Current setting.
To calculate the Max Current setting based on a heater or load power limit, calculate current, I, using both of the following equations: I = Sqrt(P/R) and I = 50 V/ R where P is the maximum allowable power, R is the heater resistance. The load power limit and voltage compliance limit of the heater output (50 V) are in place at the same time, so the lower calculated current is the correct Max Current setting.
| www.lakeshore.com
62
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
Example 1: A 50
)
, 30 W heater is connected to Output 1.
Power Limit
I = Squrt(P/R)
I = Squrt(30 W/50
)
)
I = 0.77 A
Voltage Compliance Limit
I = 50 V/R
I = 50 V/ 50
I = 1 A
)
User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0.77 A. In this example, the desired 30 W of power is available to the heater.
Example 2: A 75
)
, 50 W heater is connected to Output 1.
Power Limit
I = Squrt(P/R)
I = Squrt(50 W/75
)
)
I = 0.81 A
Voltage Compliance Limit
I = 50 V/R
I = 50 V/ 75
I = 0.66 A
)
)
User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0.66 A. In this example, only 33 W of the desired 50 W of power is available to the heater.
To enter a User Max Current, first set the Heater Resistance setting to 25
)
for any resistance less than 50
)
, or to 50
)
for any higher heater resistance. Set the Max Current setting to User. The User Max Current setting now becomes available in the Output Setup menu. Enter the calculated current limit value in the User Max Current parameter.
Heater Resistance
Max Current
10
)
25
)
30
)
2 A
1.667 A (User)
1.414 A
1.25 A (User)
1 A
0.707 A
0.5 A (User)
40 W
28 W
20 W
15 W
10 W
5 W
2.5 W
100 W
69.5 W
50 W
39 W
25 W
12.5 W
6 W x
83 W
60 W
46 W
30 W
15 W
7.5 W
Shaded black: Max current too high for these resistances due to voltage compliance limit
Lightly shaded: Maximum current/power only available on heater output 1
Bold: Discrete options available for 25
)
and 50
)
heaters under the Max Current setting
40
) x x x
62.5 W
40 W
20 W
10 W
TABLE 4-14
User Max Current
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
User Max Current
Q
(0.1 A to 2 A)
Default:
Output 1
Q
User Max Current
Q
2 A
Output 2
Q
User Max Current
Q
1.414 A
50
) x x x x
50 W
25 W
12.5 W
100
) x x
25 W x x x x
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.5.1 Heater Outputs 63
4.5.1.2 Power Up Enable
All configuration parameters of the Model 336 can be retained through a power cycle.
Some systems require that the Heater Range is turned off when power is restored. The power up enable feature allows you to choose whether or not the heater range is turned off each time the instrument power is cycled. Set the Power Up Enable parameter to Off to ensure that the heater range is turned off on power up. Set it to On to return the Heater Range to its previous setting when power is restored.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1, 2, 3, or 4)
Q
Power Up Enable
Q
(Off or On)
Default: Off
Interface Command:
OUTMODE
4.5.1.3 Heater Out Display
The heater output can be displayed in units of percent of full scale current or percent of full scale power. The heater output display on the front panel is displayed in these units, and the Manual Output parameter is set in these units. Available full scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance, max current setting, and heater range.
The heater output display is a calculated value intended to aid in system setup and tuning. It is not a measured value, and may not accurately represent actual power in the heater.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1, 2)
Q
Heater Out Display
Q
(Current or Power)
Default: Current
Interface Command:
HTRSET
4.5.1.4 Output Modes
The heater outputs can be configured in one of four output modes: Off, Closed Loop
PID, Zone, or Open Loop. The Off mode prevents current from being sourced to the given output. Closed Loop PID is the mode most often used for controlling temperature. Zone mode builds on the Closed Loop mode by providing automatic changing of control parameters at up to ten different temperature zones. Open Loop mode provides a means of applying a constant current to the output.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Output Mode
Q
(Off, Closed Loop PID, Zone,
Open Loop)
Default: Off
Interface Command:
OUTMODE
4.5.1.4.1 Closed Loop PID Mode
The Closed Loop PID mode is the most commonly used closed loop control mode for tightly controlling temperature using the heater outputs of the Model 336. In this mode the controller attempts to keep the load at exactly the user-entered setpoint temperature. To do this, it uses feedback from the control input sensor to calculate and actively adjust the control output setting. The Model 336 uses a control algo-
to section 2.7 and section 2.8 for a detailed discussion of PID control and
manual tuning.
| www.lakeshore.com
64
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
In Closed Loop PID mode, the controller will accept user-entered Proportional, Integral, and Derivative parameters to provide 3-term PID control. Manual output can be used during closed loop control to add to the calculated PID control output.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Output Mode
Q
Closed Loop PID
4.5.1.4.2 Zone Mode
Optimal control parameter values are often different at different temperatures within a system. Once control parameter values have been chosen for each temperature range (or zone), the instrument will update the control settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone.
If desired, the control parameters can be changed manually, just like Closed Loop PID mode, but they will be automatically updated once the setpoint crosses a zone boundary.
The control algorithm used for each zone is identical to that used in Closed Loop PID mode. The Zone feature is useful by itself, but it is even more powerful when used
with other features. We recommend using zone mode with setpoint ramping (section
4.5.1.5.7). Refer to section 5.3 for details on setting up zones. Refer to section 2.7 for a
detailed discussion of PID control.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Output Mode
Q
Zone
4.5.1.4.3 Open Loop Mode
Open Loop output mode allows you to directly set the output using only the
Manual Output and Range parameters. This guarantees constant current to the load, but it does not actively control temperature. Any change in the characteristics of the load will cause a change in temperature.
You can configure any output to Open Loop mode. When an output is configured in this mode, the Manual Output and Heater Range parameters become available in the
Output Setup menu for setting the output. For convenience, the Control Input parameter can be used to assign a sensor input, which then allows the output to be displayed on the front panel when using that sensor input’s display mode. When displayed on the front panel, the Manual Output and Heater Range direct operation
keys can be used for one touch access to these settings. Refer to section 4.3.1 for
details on configuring display modes.
Since there is no sensor feedback in open loop mode, there is nothing to prevent the system from being overheated. We recommend using the Temperature Limit feature to help
protect the system from overheating. Refer to section 4.4.12 for temperature limits.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1, 2, 3, or 4)
Q
Output Mode
Q
Open Loop
4.5.1.5 Control Parameters
Once the output mode is chosen, the control parameters can be used to begin controlling temperature. Control Input is used to create a control loop. The P, I, and D parameters provide fine tuning of the control algorithm. Manual Output provides a baseline output power about which to control. Setpoint is used to set the desired target temperature, and Heater Range is used to turn on the control output, as well as to
set the power range of the output. These parameters are described in detail in section
4.5.1.5.1 to section 4.5.1.5.8.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.5.1 Heater Outputs 65
4.5.1.5.1 Control Input
For closed loop control (Closed Loop PID, Zone, Warm Up Supply) a control loop must be created. A control loop consists of a control output for controlling the temperature, and an input for feedback into the control algorithm. Use the Control Input parameter to assign the control input sensor to the desired output.
In the Monitor Out mode the Control Input parameter is used to determine the source of the output voltage. In the Open Loop mode, the Control Input parameter can be set simply for convenience in order to easily access the associated output’s Manual Out-
put and Heater Range parameters using the Direct Operation keys. Refer to section
4.2.1.1 for details on Direct Operation keys.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1, 2, 3, or 4)
Q
Control Input
Q
(None, Input A, Input B,
Input C, Input D)
Default:
Output 1
Q
Control Input
Q
(Input A)
Output 2
Q
Control Input
Q
(Input B)
Output
(3, 4)
Q
Off
Interface Command:
HTRSET
4.5.1.5.2 Proportional (P)
The proportional parameter (also called gain) is the P part of the PID control equation.
It has a range of 0 to 1000 with a resolution of 0.1. The default value is 50. Enter a value greater than 0 for P when using closed loop control.
To set P, first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information, then use the
P
key on the front panel. A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed, is to press
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting
is entered. Refer to section 4.3 for details on configuring the front panel display.
Menu Navigation:
P
Q
(0 to 1000)
Default: 50
Interface Command:
PID
4.5.1.5.3 Integral (I)
The integral parameter (also called reset) is the I part of the PID control equation. It has a range of 0 to 1000 with a resolution of 0.1. The default value is 20. Setting I to 0 turns the reset function off. The I setting is related to seconds by:
I setting
=1000/I seconds
For example, a reset number setting of 20 corresponds to a time constant of 50 s. A system will normally take several time constants to settle into the setpoint. The 50 s time constant, if correct for the system being controlled, would result in a system that stabilizes at a new setpoint in between 5 min and 10 min.
To set I, first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information, then use the
I
key on the front panel. A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting
is entered. Refer to section 4.3 for details on configuring the front panel display.
Menu Navigation:
I
Q
(0 to 1000)
Default: 20
Interface Command:
PID
| www.lakeshore.com
66
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.5.1.5.4 Derivative (D)
The derivative parameter (sometimes called rate) is the D part of the PID control equation. The derivative time constant should normally be somewhere between p and
1/i
the integral time in seconds, if used at all. As a convenience to the operator, the Model 336 derivative time constant is expressed in percent of ¼ the integral time. The range is between 0% and 200%. Start with settings of 0%, 50%, or 100%, and determine which setting gives you the type of control you desire. Do not be surprised if the setting you prefer is 0%. Note that by using a percent of integral time, derivative scales automatically with changes in the integral value and does not have to be revisited frequently.
To set D, first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information, then use the
D
key on the front panel. A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting
is entered. Refer to the section 4.3 for details on configuring the front panel display.
Menu Navigation:
D
Q
(0% to 200%)
Default: 0%
Interface Command:
PID
4.5.1.5.5 Manual Output
Manual Output is a manual setting of the control output. It can function in two different ways depending on control mode. In open loop control mode, the Manual Output is the only output to the load. You can directly set the control output from the front panel or over the computer interface. In closed loop control mode, Manual Output is added directly to the output of the PID control equation. In effect, the control equation operates about the Manual Output setting.
The Manual Output setting is in percent of full scale. Percent of full scale is defined as percent of full-scale current or power on the selected heater range. Refer to
section 4.5.1.3 to set the Heater Out display. Available full scale current and power
are determined by the heater resistance, Max Current setting, and Heater Range.
Manual Output setting range is 0% to 100% with a resolution of 0.01%.
To set Manual Output, first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information, and then press
Manual Output
on the front panel. A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop infor-
mation while the new setting is entered. Refer to section 4.3 for details on configuring
the front panel display.
When an output is configured for Open Loop mode, the Manual Output setting is available in the Output Setup menu. This is because in the Open Loop mode no Control Input (feedback sensor) is required, and if none is set then there would be no way to use the
Manual Output
front panel key to set the output unless using the Custom
Display mode. The Control Input parameter can be assigned to a sensor input (that is not being used for control) as a means of quickly accessing the Manual Output setting using the
Manual Output
front panel key.
Menu Navigation:
Manual Output
Q
(0% to 100%)
Default: 0%
Interface Command:
MOUT
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.5.1 Heater Outputs 67
4.5.1.5.6 Setpoint
Use the Setpoint parameter to set the desired load temperature for a control loop.
Before entering a setpoint, a control loop must be created by configuring an input sensor and assigning it to a control output using the Control Input parameter. The
Setpoint can be entered in either temperature units or sensor units, based on the sensor input’s Preferred Units setting. The Setpoint Ramping feature is available when controlling in temperature units to provide smooth, continuous control from one
temperature to the next. Refer to section 4.4 for details on Input Setup. Refer to sec-
tion 4.5.1.5.1 for details on assigning a Control Input. Refer to section 4.5.1.5.7 for
details on the Setpoint Ramping feature.
Most applications require control in units of temperature. To control in units of temperature, set the Preferred Units parameter of the control input sensor to either kelvin or Celsius. When controlling in temperature, the available setting range of the setpoint is limited by the Setpoint Limit parameter of the assigned temperature
curve. Refer to section 4.4.13 for details on setting the Preferred Units parameter.
Refer to section 5.8.1 for details on setting a curve Setpoint Limit.
The Setpoint Limit feature only limits the Setpoint entry. For even greater protection, the
Temperature Limit feature can be used to turn off all heater outputs if a sensor reading
above the specified temperature is observed. Refer to section 4.4.12 for details on the
Temperature Limit feature.
There are some instances when temperature control in sensor units may be desired, for example when a temperature curve is not available. For these applications the
Model 336 can control temperature in sensor units. To control in sensor units, set the
Preferred Units parameter to Sensor. When controlling in sensor units, the Setpoint resolution matches the display resolution for the sensor input type given in the speci-
Temperature control in sensor units can be unpredictable since most sensors do not have a linear response to temperature, and therefore have can have different sensitivity in different temperature ranges.
If you change the Preferred Units from Sensor to temperature (Kelvin or Celsius), or from temperature to Sensor, the Model 336 uses the assigned temperature curve to convert the Setpoint to the new control units. This provides minimal disruption in the control output if you change the Preferred Units parameter while the control loop is active.
Menu Navigation:
Setpoint
Q
(See note below)
Default: 0.0000 K
Interface Command:
SETP
When controlling in temperature, setpoint is limited by the control input temperature curve’s Setpoint Limit. When controlling in sensor units, setpoint is limited by the limits of the configured control sensor.
| www.lakeshore.com
68
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.5.1.5.7 Setpoint Ramping
The Model 336 can generate a smooth setpoint ramp when the setpoint units are expressed in temperature. You can set a ramp rate in degrees per minute with a range of 0 to 100 and a resolution of 0.1. Once the ramping feature is turned on, its action is initiated by a setpoint change. When you enter a new setpoint the instrument changes the setpoint temperature from the old value to the new value at the ramp rate. A positive ramp rate is always entered; it is used by the instrument to ramp either up or down in temperature.
Always use the ramping feature to minimize temperature overshoot and undershoot.
When ramping is not used, a setpoint change can cause the error used by the PID equation to become very large, which causes the I contribution of the control output equation to become larger the longer the error exists. This will result in a large overshoot or undershoot once the setpoint temperature is reached, since the I contribution will only decrease when the error polarity is reversed. Use a ramp rate that keeps the control output from reaching the extremes of 100% or 0% while ramping for optimal results.
The ramping feature is useful by itself, but it is even more powerful when used with other features. Setpoint ramps are often used with zone control mode. As temperature is ramped through different temperature zones, control parameters are automatically selected for best control. Ramps can be initiated and status read back using a computer interface. During computer-controlled experiments, the instrument generates the setpoint ramp while the computer is busy taking necessary data.
When an incomplete ramp is shut off, the setpoint will remain on the most current setting
(the reading will not jump to the end of the ramp).
If the input type or input curve is changed while a ramp is in progress, both ramping and the heater are turned off.
If Ramp is on and the setpoint is set to sensor units, the ramping function will remain on but when another setpoint is entered, the setpoint goes directly to the new setpoint value.
To bypass ramping and load the setpoint with the current temperature, with the control loop displayed, press and hold the Setpoint button for 3 s.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(1 or 2)
Q
Setpoint Ramping
Q
(Off or On)
Default: Off
Interface Command:
RAMP
To stop a ramp, when the desired control loop is displayed, press
Setpoint
, then immediately press
Enter
. This stops the ramp at the current setpoint, but leaves the
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.5.1 Heater Outputs 69
4.5.1.5.8 Heater Range
The Heater Range setting is used for turning a control output on, as well as setting the output power range for the heater outputs. All four outputs provide an Off setting for turning the output off. The heater outputs, 1 and 2, provide Low, Medium (Med), and
High settings which provide decade steps in power, based on the maximum output power available to the connected heater. The High range provides the maximum power, the Med range provides (maximum power)/10 and the Low range provides
(maximum power)/100. Refer to section 2.5.1 for details on how to calculate the max-
imum output power. The unpowered analog outputs, 3 and 4, do not have multiple output ranges, and only provide an On setting for enabling the output.
While controlling temperature, the following will cause the heater range to automatically turn off:
D
Exceeding the Temperature Limit setting
D
Setup changes to the control input
D
Power loss with Power Up Enable feature turned off
D
Input errors such as T. Over, T. Under, S. Over, and S. Under
Available full scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance, Max Current setting, and Heater Range.
Specifications of the heater outputs are provided in section 1.3. Heater theory of
operation is provided in section 2.5. Various heater installation considerations are
To set Heater Range, first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information, then use the
Heater Range
key on the front panel. A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press
A
,
B
,
C
, or
D
on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop informa-
tion while the new setting is entered. Refer to section 4.2 for details on configuring
the front panel display.
Menu Navigation:
Heater Range
Q
(Off, On, Low, Med, High)
Default: Off
Interface Command:
RANGE
| www.lakeshore.com
70
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
4.5.2 Unpowered
Analog Outputs
4.6 Interface
4.6.1 USB
4.5.1.5.9 ALL OFF
The
ALL OFF
key is provided as a means of shutting down all control outputs with one key. It is equivalent to setting the Heater Range parameter of all outputs to Off.
This function is always active even if the keypad is locked or when it is in remote mode.
The unpowered analog outputs, 3 and 4, are variable DC voltage sources that can have a range from –10 V to +10 V. The voltage is generated by a 16-bit D/A converter with resolution of 0.3 mV or 0.003% of full scale. These outputs can be configured to
Open Loop, Warm Up Supply, or Monitor Out modes. The Open Loop mode can be used
to set the output to a specific, constant value. Refer to section 4.5.1.4.3 for details on
the Open Loop Mode. The Warm Up Supply mode uses the output to drive the programming input for an external power supply for the purpose of rapidly warming a system to a user-specified temperature. The Monitor Out mode uses the output to provide a voltage proportional to an input sensor reading to be used by an external device such as a data logger.
The unpowered analog outputs are not designed to provide heater power, and although they are short-protected, should not be used to drive a resistance lower than 1 k
)
.
4.5.2.1 Warm Up Supply
Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system, for example, to bring a
system to room temperature in order to change samples. Refer to section 5.5 for more
information on warm up supply operation. Refer to section 3.8.5 for the procedure to
install an external power supply for warm up supply mode.
4.5.2.2 Monitor Out
Refer to section 5.6 for more information on Monitor Out mode.
The Model 336 has three computer interfaces: IEEE-488, USB, and Ethernet. Only one of these interfaces can be actived at one time. Use the Interface menu to configure which interface is active, and to configure the parameters related to the selected interface.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
(USB, Ethernet, IEEE-488)
Default: USB
The USB interface is provided as a convenient way to connect to most modern computers, as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as of the writing of this manual. The Model 336 USB driver, which must be installed before using the inter-
face (section 6.3.3), creates a virtual serial com port, which can be used in the same
way as a traditional serial com port. Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer interface operation.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
USB
Model 336 Temperature Controller
4.6.2 Ethernet
4.6.3 IEEE-488
4.7 Locking and
Unlocking the
Keypad
4.6.2 Ethernet 71
The Ethernet interface is provided to allow the Model 336 to connect to a computer network. A direct connection to a PC can also be achieved using a cross-over Ethernet cable. The advantages of using the Ethernet interface include the ability to communicate directly with the Model 336 from any PC on the same local network, and even
from around the world via the internet. Refer to section 6.4.1 for details on Ethernet
configuration.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
Ethernet
An IEEE 488 (GPIB) interface is provided for compatibility with legacy systems. Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer interface operation.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
IEEE-488
4.6.3.1 Remote/Local
Local refers to operating the Model 336 from the front panel. Remote refers to operating the controller via the IEEE 488 Interface. The keypad is disabled during remote operation, except for the
Remote/Local
key and the
All Off
key. When in remote mode, the Remote front panel LED will be illuminated. When in local mode, the Remote LED will not be illuminated.
Menu Navigation:
Remote/Local
(LED On = Remote mode, LED Off = Local mode)
The keypad lock feature prevents accidental changes to parameter values. When the keypad is locked, some parameter values may be viewed, but most cannot be changed from the front panel. All Off is the only keypad function that remains active when the keypad is locked.
A three-digit keypad lock code locks and unlocks the keypad. The factory default code is 123. The code can be changed only through the computer interface. If instrument parameters are reset to default values, the lock code resets also. The instrument cannot reset from the front panel with the keypad locked.
To lock the keypad, press and hold
Enter
for 5 s. Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit lock code. If the lock code is accepted, *** Keypad Locked *** will be displayed for 3 s, and the display will return to normal. Changes attempted to any parameters result in a brief display of the *** Keypad Locked *** message.
To unlock the keypad, press and hold
Enter
for 5 s. Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit lock code. If the lock code is accepted, *** Keypad Unlocked *** will be displayed for 3 s and the display will return to normal. All Model 336 parameters are now accessible.
| www.lakeshore.com
72
c
HAPTER
4:
Operation
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.1 General 73
Chapter 5: Advanced Operation
5.1 General
5.2 Autotune
This chapter provides information on the advanced operation of the Model 336 temperature controller.
The Model 336 can automate the tuning process of typical cryogenic systems with the Autotune feature. For additional information about the algorithm refer
Before initiating the Autotune process, properly configure the cooling system with control input sensor and heater output to make it capable of closed-loop control.
Assign the control sensor with a valid temperature response curve. Also determine an
appropriate heater range as described in section 2.8.1. The system must be coarsely
maintaining temperature within 5 K of the setpoint where new tuning parameters are desired in order for the Autotuning process to initiate. Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not set the manual output or heater range. For autotuning to work properly on a control loop with a scanner input assigned (Model
3062 4-channel scanner option), only that scanner input channel can be enabled; all other scanner input channels must be disabled.
To initiate the Autotune process, press
Autotune
, then select an Autotune mode.
There are three Autotune modes available. They result in slightly different system characteristics. Autotune PI is recommended for most applications.
D
Autotune P
: sets only the P parameter value. I and D are set to 0 no matter what the initial values are. This mode is recommended for systems that have very long lag times or nonlinearity that prevents stable PI control. Expect some overshoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable temperature control below the setpoint value.
D
Autotune PI
: sets values for both P and I parameters. D is set to 0. This mode is recommended for stable control at a constant temperature. It may take slightly longer to stabilize after setpoint change than Auto PID. Expect some overshoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable temperature control at the setpoint value.
D
Autotune PID
: sets values for P, I and D parameters. D is always set to 100%. This mode is recommended when setpoint changes are frequent, but temperature is allowed to stabilize between changes. Stability at setpoint may be worse than
Autotune PI in noisy systems. Expect slightly less overshoot or undershoot than the other modes and control at the setpoint value.
When the Autotune process is initiated, the P, I, D, and Manual Output parameters are removed from the display and the “Autotuning” message appears in the lower right corner. Below the Autotuning message, the current status of the process is displayed.
The status message blinks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing. If an error occurs, the status message stops blinking and displays an error message containing
the stage in which Autotune failed. See TABLE 5-1 for a description of the Autotune
stages, reasons for failure, and possible solutions. When the process completes successfully, the previous P, I, and D parameters are replaced by the newly acquired values. To cancel the Autotune process, press
Autotune
, and choos Yes to the “cancel
Autotune” prompt.
| www.lakeshore.com
74
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
Stage
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description Purpose for Stage Reason for Failure Possible Solution
Testing initial conditions
Waiting for temperature to settle
Testing for temperature stability
Determine if Autotuning can be initiated
Ensures that temperature is not still settling toward the setpoint, or drifting away from the setpoint
Ensures that there is no temperature oscillation, or excessive noise in the temperature reading
Curve not assigned to Input, heater not on, or temperature not within
5 K of setpoint
Temperature was moving too much to properly Autotune
May indicate that the initial P value is too high
Ensure curve is assigned to input, heater is on, and temperature is within
5 K of setpoint
Allow the temperature to settle more before initiating
Autotune
Use a smaller initial P value
Observing system response to setpoint change
Control parameters are changed based on observation
Waiting for temperature to settle after returning setpoint to original value
Provides a baseline for subsequent stages
Testing for temperature stability
Ensures that there is no temperature oscillation or excessive noise in the temperature reading after control parameter adjustment
Observing system response to setpoint change using new control parameters
Control parameters are changed again based on observation. This is the final stage of P only Autotuning
System response is too slow, or the heater is too underpowered for the system to
Autotune
If not already using High range, increase initial heater range
System response is too slow to Autotune, or the new control parameters are causing instability in the control
System response is too slow to Autotune, or the new control parameters are causing instability in the control
Use a smaller initial P value
Use a smaller initial P value
Waiting for temperature to settle after returning setpoint to original value
Provides a baseline for subsequent stages
System response is too slow to Autotune, or the new control parameters are causing instability in the control
Testing for temperature stability
Ensures that there is no temperature oscillation, or excessive noise in the temperature reading after control parameter adjustment
System response is too slow to Autotune, or the new control parameters are causing instability in the control
First of 2 stages of observing system response to setpoint change using new control parameters
Second of 2 stages of observing system response to setpoint change using new control parameters
Compiles data for characterizing the system
Control parameters are changed again based on observation. This is the final stage of PI and PID Autotuning
System response is too slow to Autotune, or the heater is too underpowered for the system to Autotune
If not already using High range, increase initial heater range
Will not fail in this stage
System response is too slow, or the heater is too underpowered for the system to
Autotune
Use a smaller initial P value
Use a smaller initial P value
Not applicable
If not already using High range, increase initial heater range
TABLE 5-1
Autotune stages
Menu Navigation:
Autotune
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
(Autotune P, Autotune PI, Autotune PID)
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.3 Zone Settings 75
Zone
4
3
6
5
10
9
8
7
2
1
5.3 Zone Settings
The Model 336 allows you to establish up to ten custom contiguous temperature zones where the controller will automatically use pre-programmed values for PID, heater range, manual output, ramp rate, and control input. Zone control can be active for both control loops at the same time. Configure the zones using 1 as the lowest to
10 as the highest zone. Zone boundaries are always specified in kelvin (K). The bottom of the first zone is always 0 K; therefore, only the upper limit is required for all subsequent zones. Make a copy of FIGURE 5-1 to plan your zones.
To use the programmed zones, the output mode must be set to Zone (refer to section
4.5.1.4.2 to set up Zone mode). In Zone mode, the instrument will update the control
settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone. If you change the settings manually, the controller will use the new setting while it is in the same zone, and will update to the programmed zone table settings when the setpoint crosses into a new zone.
The zone settings include a Control Input parameter for each temperature zone. This allows a different feedback sensor to be used for each temperature zone. For example, a diode sensor can be used while cooling down from room temperature to 10 K, at which point the Control Input could be switched to a Cernox™ sensor for temperatures under 10 K.
Lower Boundary
(Implied)
n/a n/a
100.001 K
50.001 K
25.001 K
15.001 K
10.001 K
7.001K
4.001 K
0 K
To illustrate how the control parameters are updated in Zone mode, consider the zone settings from the table below. Starting from room temperature (about 300 K), and setting a setpoint of 2 K (with Setpoint Ramping turned On), the setpoint will begin ramping at the current setpoint Ramp Rate, then once the setpoint crosses
100 K, the control parameters from Zone 8 will be used. The setpoint ramp will then continue toward 2 K at a rate of 20 K/min until crossing 50 K, when the control parameters from Zone 7 are loaded. This pattern will continue until the final setpoint value of 2 K is reached, or another setpoint is entered. Note that Input B will be used in all zones greater than 10 K (zones 4 to 8), and Input A will be used in all zones below
10 K (zones 1-3).
Upper
Boundary
0 K
0 K
500 K
100 K
50 K
25 K
15 K
10 K
7 K
4 K
P I D
Manual
Output
150
100
85
85
50
50
200
185
70.0
50.0
30
30
35
35
20
20
20
25
40.0
50.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TABLE 5-2
Zone settings example
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0 %
Range
Off
Off
High
Med
Med
Med
Med
Med
Low
Low
Ramp Rate
0.1 K/Min
0.1 K/Min
30 K/Min
20 K/Min
10 K/Min
5 K/Min
2 K/Min
0.9 K/Min
0.7 K/Min
0.5 K/Min
Control Input
Default
Default
Input B
Input B
Input B
Input B
Input B
Input A
Input A
Input A
Sensor accuracy and placement will affect how smoothly the transition from one feedback sensor to another is performed. A large difference between the temperature readings of each sensor at the time of transition could cause a temporary instability in the temperature control due to the sudden large error introduced into the control equation.
It is highly recommended to use the Setpoint Ramping feature when using the Control
Input zone parameter to change sensor inputs. Otherwise a setpoint change may cause a control input sensor to be used outside of its usable range, which will cause an overload condition to shut down the control loop.
| www.lakeshore.com
76
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
Zone 10
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 09
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 08
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 07
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 06
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 05
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 04
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 03
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 02
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Zone 01
Proportional
(0.1–1000)
Integral
(0.1–1000)
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Derivative
(0–200)
MHP Output
(0–100%)
Heater Range
A
Off
A
Low
A
Med
A
High
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
Upper boundary:
Ramp Rate
(0.1–100 K/min)
Control Input
A
Default
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
K
0 K
FIGURE 5-1
Record of Zone settings
Menu Navigation:
Zones
Q
Output
(
1
or
2
)
Q
Zones
Q
(1 to 10)
Interface Command:
ZONE
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.4 Bipolar Control 77
5.4 Bipolar Control
The most common type of temperature control output device is a resistive heater, which requires only unipolar output, since they will add heat regardless of the polarity of the excitation voltage. There are, however, temperature control devices that are bipolar. These devices, such as thermoelectric devices, can work in both polarities, moving heat from one side of the device to the other when a current is applied. Therefore, a surface can be heated or cooled using a bipolar temperature control device. For these types of bipolar devices, the Model 336 features a bipolar control mode. In this mode, the Model 336 is configured to drive these devices to control temperature
using Output 3 and 4. Refer to section 2.11 for more information about thermoelec-
tric devices.
To use Output 3 and 4 for bipolar control, first set the Heater Output Type parameter to Voltage, then set the polarity to Bipolar. The Closed Loop PID control mode can then be used to control a thermoelectric device, providing a control output of
-10 V to +10 V. Refer to section 2.11 for information on thermoelectric devices. Refer
to section 3.8.5.4 for information on scaling the output for voltages less than 10 V.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output (3 or 4)
Q
Polarity
(Bipolar)
Interface Command:
ANALOG
5.5 Warm Up
Supply
5.5.1 Warm Up
Percentage
Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system, for example, to bring a
system to room temperature in order to change samples. Refer to section 3.8.5 for
information on using an external power supply for warm up supply mode.
The Control Input parameter determines which sensor is used for feedback in the
Warm Up Supply mode. Refer to section 4.5.1.5 for details on the
Control Input parameter.
Once Warm Up Supply Mode is configured, press
Setpoint
and set the desired temperature, then press
Heater Range
and set the range to On to activate the output. The front panel display must be configured to show the Warm Up control loop for the
Setpoint
and
Heater Range
keys to be used. Refer to section 4.2 and section 4.3 for
details on front panel keypad operation and display setup.
The Power Up Enable feature determines if the output will remain on after power is
cycled. Refer to section 4.5.1.2 for details on the Power Up Enable feature.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Output Mode
Q
Warm Up Supply
Interface Command:
OUTMODE
The Warm Up Percentage parameter is used to determine the amount of voltage to apply to the unpowered output (3 or 4) when using Warm Up mode to control an external power supply. The voltage applied will be the full scale output (+10 V) times the Warm Up Percentage. For example, if the Warm Up Percentage is set to 50%, the control output voltage for the given unpowered output will be 50% of 10 V, or 5 V, when the output is on.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3,
or
4
)
Q
Warm Up Percentage
Q
(0% to 100%)
Default: 100%
Interface Command:
WARMUP
| www.lakeshore.com
78
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.5.2 Warm Up Control The Warm Up Control parameter determines what happens when the control setpoint is reached. The options are:
D
Auto-Off
: once the Heater Range is set to on, the Warm Up Percentage voltage is
applied to the output (section 5.5.1) and the output stays on until the control
input temperature reaches the control setpoint. The output will then be turned off (0 V), and the Heater Range setting will automatically be set to Off, effectively turning off all temperature control for the control loop. If the Heater Range is again manually set to On, the cycle will begin again, and the output will turn on and stay on until the control input temperature reaches the setpoint again.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Warmup Mode
Q
Auto-Off
D
Continuous
: this mode implements what is often referred to as On/Off control.
Once the Heater Range is set to on, the Warm Up Percentage voltage is applied to the output until the control input temperature reaches the setpoint. Then the output will turn off (0 V) until the temperature falls 1 K below the setpoint, at which point the the Warm Up Percentage voltage is again applied to the output.
The Heater Range will never be automatically set to Off in this mode.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Warm Up Control
Q
(Auto-Off, Continuous)
Default: Continuous
Interface Command:
WARMUP
5.6 Monitor Out
5.6.1 Monitor Units
In Monitor Out mode, the unpowered analog output (3 or 4) will track the assigned control input according to the scaling parameters you enter. A common use for this function would be to send a voltage proportional to temperature to a data acquisition system.
The Control Input parameter setting determines which sensor input is tracked by the output. The remaining parameters detailed in this section dictate how the output value is determined.
An output configured to Monitor Out mode is not affected by the ALL OFF key, as it does not have a Heater Range setting, and by design is always enabled.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Output Mode
Q
Monitor Out
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Control Input
Q
(None, Input A, Input B,
Input C, Input D)
Default: Control Input
Q
None
Interface Command:
OUTMODE
The Monitor Units parameter determines the units of the Control Input sensor to use for creating the proportional voltage output. The Monitor Out scaling parameter settings are entered using the units chosen for this parameter.
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Monitor Units
Q
(K, C, or Sensor)
Default: K
Interface Command:
ANALOG
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.6.1 Monitor Units 79
5.6.1.1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters
In the Monitor Out and Open Loop modes, the unpowered analog outputs can be configured as either unipolar (0 V to +10 V) or bipolar (–10 V to +10 V) outputs. In bipolar mode, the Monitor Out –10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be –10 V. In unipolar mode, the Monitor Out 0 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be 0 V. The
Monitor Out +10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be +10 V in either unipolar or bipolar modes.
Input
Bipolar
Lowest
–10 V
Output
Middle
0 V
Highest
+10 V
Input mode
Input
Lowest Middle Highest
Unipolar
0 V +5 V
Output
+10 V
FIGURE 5-2
Unipolar and bipolar mode
For example, if Polarity is set to Bipolar, then setting the Monitor Out –10 V parameter to 0 K and the Monitor Out +10 V parameter to 100 K will cause the analog output to
correspond to the input temperature as shown in FIGURE 5-3. In this case if the actual
reading was 50 K, then the output would be at 0 V (middle of the scale).
Input
0 K 50 K 100 K
Bipolar
–10 V
Output
0 V +10 V
FIGURE 5-3
Analog output with polarity set to bipolar
If we set the Polarity parameter to Unipolar, the output would be as shown in
FIGURE 5-4. In this case if the actual reading was 50 K, the analog output would be
+5 V (middle of the scale).
Input
0 K 50 K
Unipolar
0 V +5 V
Output
FIGURE 5-4
Output with polarity parameter set to unipolar
Menu Navigation:
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3 or 4
)
Q
Polarity
Q
(Unipolar or Bipolar)
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Monitor Out
–10 V
Q
(See note below)
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Monitor Out
0 V
Q
(See note below)
Output Setup
Q
Output
(
3
or
4
)
Q
Monitor Out
+10 V
Q
(See note below)
100 K
+10 V
Monitor Out -10 V, 0 V, and +10 V settings depend on the Monitor Units selected, and are limited to the acceptable values of the selected units.
Default:
Polarity
Q
Unipolar
Monitor Out -10 V
Q
0.0000 K
Monitor Out 0 V
Q
0.0000 K
Monitor Out +10 V
Q
1000 K
Interface Command:
ANALOG
| www.lakeshore.com
80
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.7 Alarms and
Relays
5.7.1 Alarms Each input of the Model 336 has high and low alarm capability. Input reading data from any source can be compared to the alarm setpoint values. A reading higher than the high alarm setpoint triggers the high alarm for that input. A reading lower than the low alarm setpoint triggers the low alarm for that input.
Menu Navigation:
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Alarm
Q
(Off, On)
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Low Setpoint
Q
(see note below)
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
High Setpoint
Q
(see note below)
Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units of the associated sensor input.
Defaults:
Alarm
Q
Off
Low Setpoint
Q
0.0000 K
High Setpoint
Q
1000 K
Interface Command:
ALARM
5.7.1.1 Alarm Annunciators
The Alarm LED annunciator steadily displays when any alarm that is enabled also has the Visible parameter enabled. The annunciator flashes when any alarm that has the
Visible parameter enabled activates. An input need not be displayed for the system
Alarm annunciator to indicate input alarm status, but if the input is displayed on the front panel, then the reading will alternate between the alarm status message and the actual reading. If the Audible parameter is set to On for an enabled alarm, then the beeper inside the instrument will sound when the alarm activates. The two relays
on the Model 336 can also be tied to alarm functions as described in section 5.7.2.
You may want to set the Visible parameter to Off if there is no need for showing the alarm state on the front panel, for instance, if you are using the alarm function to trigger a relay. The Audible parameter can be set to Off as well to keep the audible alarm from sounding when an alarm is triggered.
Menu Navigation:
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Visible
Q
(Off, On)
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Audible
Q
(Off, On)
Default:
Visible
Q
On
Audible
Q
On
Interface Command:
ALARM
5.7.1.2 Alarm Latching
D
Latching Alarms
: often used to detect faults in a system or experiment that requires operator intervention. The alarm state remains visible to the operator for diagnostics even if the alarm condition is removed. Relays often signal remote monitors, or for added safety take critical equipment off line. You can clear a latched alarm by pressing
Alarm
and selecting Yes to the Reset Alarm prompt.
Select No to the Reset Alarm prompt to enter the Alarm Setup menu.
D
Non-Latching Alarms
: often tied to relay operation to control part of a system or experiment. The alarm state follows the reading value. The dead band parameter can prevent relays from turning on and off repeatedly when the sensor input reading is near an alarm setpoint.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.7.1 Alarms 81
FIGURE 5-5 illustrates the interaction between alarm setpoint and dead band in non-latching operation. With the high alarm setpoint at 100 K and the dead band at 5 K, the high alarm triggers when sensor input temperature increases to 100 K, and it will not deactivate until temperature drops to 95 K. In addition, the same
5 K dead band is applied to the low alarm setpoint as well.
High alarm activated
High alarm setpoint
High alarm deactivated
100 K
95 K
Temperature reading
Alarm latching off
Deadband = 5 K
Low alarm setpoint
Low alarm activated
55 K
50 K
Low alarm deactivated
FIGURE 5-5
Dead band example
To setup an alarm, enter the Alarm Setup menu by pressing the
Alarm
key. If a latching alarm has been activated, you will be prompted with a Reset Alarm? message. Select
No to enter the Alarm Setup menu.
Menu Navigation:
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Latching
Q
(Off, On)
Alarm
Q
Input
(
A, B, C, D
)
Q
Deadband
Q
(see note below)
Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units of the associated sensor input.
Default:
Latching
Q
Off
Deadband
Q
1.0000 K
Interface Command:
ALARM
| www.lakeshore.com
82
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.7.2 Relays There are two relays on the Model 336 numbered 1 and 2. They are most commonly thought of as alarm relays, butthey may be manually controlled also. Relay assign-
ments are configurable as shown in FIGURE 5-6. Two relays can be used with one sen-
sor input for independent high and low operation, or each can be assigned to a different input.
Relay 1 Relay 2
Off
Manual off relay remains in normal state
On
Manual on relay remains in active state
A Alarm
Follows
Input A
B Alarm
Follows
Input B
C Alarm
Follows
Input C
D Alarm
Follows
Input D
Off
Manual off relay remains in normal state
On
Manual on relay remains in active state
A Alarm
Follows
Input A
B Alarm
Follows
Input B
C Alarm
Follows
Input C
D Alarm
Follows
Input D
Both
Alarms
Low
Alarm
High
Alarm
Both
Alarms
Low
Alarm
High
Alarm
Off
On
Manual off—relay remains in the normal state
Manual on—relay remains in the active state
A Alarm
Relay will follow Input A alarms
B Alarm
C Alarm
Relay will follow Input B alarms
Relay will follow Input C alarms
Both Alarms
Relay active when either the High or Low Alarm is active
Low Alarms
Relay active only when the Low Alarm is active
High Alarms
Relay active only when the High Alarm is active
D Alarm
Relay will follow Input D alarms
FIGURE 5-6
Relay settings
When using relays with alarm operation, set up alarms first. The relays are rated for
30 VDC and 3 A. Their terminals are in the detachable terminal block on the
Model 336 rear panel.
In the Off mode, the relay is un-energized, leaving the normally open (NO) contacts open and the normally closed (NC) contacts closed. In the On mode, the relay is energized, so the NO contacts will be closed and the NC contacts will be open. In the Alarm mode the relay will activate based on the state of the configured Alarm Input sensor.
When the Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Low, the relay will energize if the configured Alarm Input sensor goes into a low alarm state. If it is set to High, the relay will energize if the configured Alarm Input sensor goes into a high alarm state. If the
Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Both, the relay will energize if the configured
Alarm Input sensor goes into either a low alarm or a high alarm state.
Menu Navigation:
Relays
Q
(
Relay 1, Relay 2
)
Q
Mode
Q
(Off, On, Alarm)
Relays
Q
(
Relay 1, Relay 2
)
Q
Alarm Input
Q
Input (A, B, C, D)
Relays
Q
(
Relay 1, Relay 2
)
Q
Alarm to Follow
Q
(Low, High, Both)
Default:
Mode
Q
Off
Alarm Input
Q
Input A
Alarm to Follow
Q
Both
Interface Command:
RELAY
5.8 Curve
Numbers and
Storage
The Model 336 has 20 standard curve locations, numbered 1 through 20. At present, not all locations are occupied by curves; the others are reserved for future updates. If a standard curve location is in use, the curve can be viewed using the view operation.
Standard curves cannot be changed by the user, and reserved locations are not available for user curves.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.8.1 Curve Header
Parameters
5.8.2 Curve
Breakpoints
5.8.1 Curve Header Parameters 83
The Model 336 has 39 user curve locations, numbered 21 through 59. Each location can hold from 2 to 200 data pairs (breakpoints), including a value in sensor units and a corresponding value in kelvin. Using fewer than 200 breakpoints will not increase the number of available curve locations. SoftCal™-generated curves are stored in user curve locations.
Each curve has parameters that are used for identification and to allow the instrument to use the curve effectively. The parameters must be set correctly before a curve can be used for temperature conversion or temperature control.
D
Curve Number:
1 to 59.
D
Name:
defaults to the name User Curve for front panel entry. A curve name of up to fifteen characters can be entered from either the front panel or from the com-
puter interface. Refer to section 4.2.3 for Alpha-Numeric entry.
D
Serial Number:
a sensor serial number of up to ten characters (letters or numbers) can be entered from either the front panel or from the computer interface. Refer
to section 4.2.3 for Alpha-Numeric entry. The default is blank.
D
Format:
the format parameter tells the instrument what breakpoint data format to expect. Different sensor types require different formats. Formats for
Lake Shore sensors are described in TABLE 5-3.
Format
V/K
)
/K
Log
)
/K mV/K
Description
Sensor Units
Full Scale Range
Volts vs. kelvin
Resistance vs. kelvin for platinum RTD sensors
Log resistance vs. kelvin for
NTC resistive sensors
Millivolts vs. kelvin for thermocouple sensors
10 V
10 K
)
4 log
)
±100 mV
TABLE 5-3
Curve header parameter
Sensor Units
Maximum Resolution
0.00001 V
0.001
)
0.00001 log
)
0.0001 mV
D
Setpoint Limit:
limits the control setpoint to values less than or equal to this setting. A setpoint limit can be included with every curve. Default is 375 K. Enter a setting of 9999 K if no limit is needed.
D
Temperature Coefficient:
the temperature coefficient is derived by the Model 336 from the first two breakpoints. The user does not enter this setting. If it is not correct, check for proper entry of the first two breakpoints. A positive coefficient indicates that the sensor signal increases with increasing temperature. A negative coefficient indicates that the sensor signal decreases with increasing temperature.
Temperature response data of a calibrated sensor must be reduced to a table of breakpoints before entering it into the instrument. A curve consists of 2 to 200 breakpoints and each breakpoint consists of one value in sensor units and one temperature value in kelvin. The Model 336 uses linear interpolation to calculate temperature between breakpoints. The instrument will show T.OVER or T.UNDER on the display if the sensor reading is outside the range of the breakpoints. Sensor units are defined by
the format setting in TABLE 5-3.
Breakpoint setting resolution is six digits in temperature. Most temperature values are entered with 0.001 resolution. Temperature values of 1000 K and greater can be entered to 0.01 resolution. Temperature values below 10 K can be entered with
0.0001 resolution. Temperature range for curve entry is 0K to 9999.99 K.
| www.lakeshore.com
84
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.9 Front Panel
Curve Entry
Operations
5.9.1 Edit Curve
Sensor Type
Typical Lake Shore
Model
Format Limit (K)
Temperature
Coefficient
Typical Sensor
Resolution
Silicon Diode
GaAlAs Diode
Platinum 100
Platinum 1000
Rhodium-Iron
Carbon-Glass
Cernox™
Germanium
Rox™
Type K
Type E
Type T
Au-Fe 0.03%
Au-Fe 0.07%
*Not offered by Lake Shore
DT-670
TG-120
PT-100
–*
RF-800
CGR-1-1000
CX-1050
GR-200A-100
RX-102A
9006-005
9006-003
9006-007
–*
9006-001
V/K
V/K
)
/K
)
/K
)
/K log
)
/K log
)
/K log
)
/K log
)
/K mV/K mV/K mV/K mV/K mV/K
40
1500
930
673
500
610
325
325
325
325
475
325
800
800
Negative
Negative
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
0.00001 V
0.00001 V
0.001
)
0.01
)
0.001
)
0.00001 log
)
0.00001 log
)
0.00001 log
)
0.00001 log
)
0.0001 mV
0.0001 mV
0.0001 mV
0.0001 mV
0.0001 (mV)
TABLE 5-4
Typical curve parameters
Setting resolution is also six digits in sensor units. The curve format parameter
defines the range and resolution in sensor units as shown in TABLE 5-3. The sensor
type determines the practical setting resolution. TABLE 5-4 lists recommended sensor units resolutions.
Enter the breakpoints with the sensor units value increasing as point number increases. There should not be any breakpoint locations left blank in the middle of a curve. The search routine in the Model 336 interprets a blank breakpoint as the end of the curve.
There are five operations associated with front panel curve entry: Edit curve, View
Curve, Erase Curve, Copy Curve, and SoftCal; as detailed below.
Refer to section: Operation
Edit Curve
View Curve
Erase Curve
Copy Curve
SoftCal
Description
Edit Curve allows you to edit curves at any user curve location. Standard curves cannot be changed.
View Curve allows you to view any curve at any curve location. No curves can be changed.
Erase Curve allows you to delete a curve from any user curve location.
Standard curves cannot be erased.
Copy Curve allows you to copy a curve from any location to any user curve location. Curves cannot be copied into standard curve locations.
SoftCal allows you to create a new temperature curve from a standard curve and known data points entered by the user.
TABLE 5-5
Front panel curve entry operations
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
(
Edit Curve, View Curve, Erase Curve, Copy Curve, SoftCal
)
Use the Edit Curve operation to enter a new curve or edit an existing user curve. Only user curves (21 to 59) can be edited. Entering the identification parameters associated with the curve is as important as entering the breakpoints. Curve header param-
eters are listed in TABLE 5-3. Typical curve parameters for common sensors are listed
in TABLE 5-4. Read this section completely and gather all necessary data before beginning the process.
If the curve you wish to enter has similar parameters as an existing curve, first copy the similar curve (as described in Section 5.2.4) to a new location, then edit the curve to the desired parameters.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.9.1 Edit Curve 85
To perform the Edit Curve operation, follow this procedure.
1. Press
Curve Entry.
2. Scroll to Edit Curve, and press
Enter
.
3. Scroll to the desired curve and press
Enter
again.
4. Edit the curve header parameters using the standard keypad operation methods
described in section 4.2.3. The curve breakpoints are entered in a slightly differ-
ent way than other menu parameters.
5. To access the breakpoint data, highlight Curve Points in the Curve Edit menu screen and press
Enter
to enter the Curve Point entry screen.
The Curve Point entry screen contains a scrollable list of all curve breakpoint pairs in the selected curve. There are three columns in the list. From left to right the columns are: breakpoint number, breakpoint sensor value, breakpoint temperature value. Initially the highlight is on the first breakpoint number.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Edit Curve
Interface Command:
CRVHDR
5.9.1.1 Edit a Breakpoint Pair
To edit a breakpoint pair, follow this procedure.
1. Select a breakpoint pair to edit. Do this by scrolling to the desired breakpoint number and press
Enter
. The highlight moves to the sensor value of the selected pair.
2. Use the Number Entry method to edit the value. Refer to section 4.2.1.1 for
details on the Number Entry method.
3. Once the new sensor value is entered, press
Enter
to highlight the temperature value.
4. Use the Number Entry method to enter the new temperature value.
5. Press
Enter
at this point to store the new breakpoint pair.
6. Press
Escape
at any time when a sensor or temperature value is highlighted to cancel any changes to either of the values and return the highlight to the breakpoint number.
If the sensor value entered is not between the previous breakpoint sensor value and the following breakpoint sensor value, then the new breakpoint pair will be moved to the position in the curve that bounds the sensor value of the new breakpoint pair. If the pair is moved, a message will be displayed to indicate to the location to which the breakpoint pair was moved.
FIGURE 5-7
Left: Scroll to highlight a breakpoint number; Middle: Press the enter key to highlight the sensor value of the selected pair ;
Right: Press the enter key again, and the temperature value is highlighted
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Edit Curve
Q
(
21–59
)
Q
Curve Points
Q
(
1–200
)
Interface Command:
CRVPT
| www.lakeshore.com
86
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.9.1.2 Add a New Breakpoint Pair
The last breakpoint of a curve is signified by the first pair that contains a 0 value for both the temperature and sensor portions. Curves are limited to 200 breakpoint pairs, so if 200 pairs already exist, then the 200th pair will be the last pair in the list.
To add a new breakpoint pair to a curve that has less than 200 pairs, scroll to the end of the list and edit the 0 value pair by following the procedure for editing a breakpoint
pair in section 5.9.1.1. If the curve still contains less than 200 pairs, a new 0 value
breakpoint will be added to the end of the list for entering another new breakpoint pair.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Edit Curve
Q
(
21–59
)
Q
Curve Points
Q
(1–200)
Interface Command: CRVPT
5.9.1.3 Delete a Breakpoint Pair
To delete a breakpoint pair, scroll to the desired breakpoint number, then enter a 0 value for both the sensor and temperature values by following the procedure for edit-
ing a breakpoint pair in section 5.9.1.1.
If you are not entering 0 for both sensor and temperature values, then entering new values over an existing breakpoint pair will replace that pair with the new value when you press Enter.
After editing, adding, or deleting all desired breakpoint pairs, press
Escape
(Exit
Menu) while the highlight is on a breakpoint number. All breakpoint pair changes, additions, and deletions will be saved when exiting the menu.
When curve entry is complete, you must assign the new curve to an input. The
Model 336 does not automatically assign the new curve to any input. Refer to section
4.4.11 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Edit Curve
Q
(
21–59
)
Q
Curve Points
Q
(
1– 200
)
Interface Command:
CRVPT
5.9.1.4 Thermocouple Curve Considerations
The following are things to consider when generating thermocouple curves.
D
You may enter temperature response curves for all types of thermocouples. Enter curve data in mV/K format with thermocouple voltage in millivolts and temperature in kelvin.
D
The curve must be normalized to 0 mV at 273.15 K (0 °C). Thermocouple voltages in millivolts are positive when temperature is above 273.15 K, and negative when temperature is below that point.
D
To convert curves published in Celsius to kelvin, add 273.15 to the temperature in
Celsius.
D
The input voltage of the Model 336 is limited to ±50 mV, so any part of the curve that extends beyond ±50 mV is not usable by the instrument.
D
A message of S.OVER or S.UNDER on the display indicates that the measured thermocouple input is over or under the ±50 mV range.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.9.2 View Curve
5.9.3 Erase Curve
5.9.4 Copy Curve
5.9.2 View Curve 87
The View Curve operation provides read-only access to all standard and user curves.
To perform the View Curve operation follow this procedure.
1. Press
Curve Entry
, scroll to View Curve, then press
Enter
.
2. Scroll to the desired curve and press
Enter
again to view the curve header information.
3. To view the curve breakpoints, highlight the Curve Points parameter and press
Enter
. The list of breakpoint pairs is scrollable, but data cannot be edited.
4. Press
Escape
(Exit Menu) to return to the curve header parameter list.
5. Press
Escape
(Exit Menu) again to exit the Curve Entry menu and return to normal operation.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
View Curve
Interface Command:
CRVHDR, CRVPT
You can erase user curves that are no longer needed. Erase Curve sets all identification parameters to default and blanks all breakpoint values.
To perform the Erase Curve operation follow this procedure.
1. Press
Curve Entry
, scroll to Erase Curve, then press
Enter
.
2. Scroll to the desired curve and press
Enter
.
3. Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation.
4. To cancel the operation, either choose No to the confirmation message, or press
Escape
.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Erase Curve
Q
(
21–59
)
Interface Command:
CRDEL
Temperature curves can be copied from one location inside the Model 336 to another.
This is a good way to make small changes to an existing curve. Curve copy may also be necessary if you need the same curve with two different temperature limits or if you need to extend the range of a standard curve. The curve that is copied from is always preserved.
The copy routine allows you to overwrite an existing user curve. Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before proceeding with the copy curve operation.
1. To perform the Copy Curve operation press
Curve Entry
, scroll to Copy Curve, then press
Enter
.
2. Scroll to the desired curve to copy, and press
Enter
. A list of user curves is displayed.
3. Scroll to the desired user curve location to copy to, and press
Enter
.
4. Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation.
5. To cancel the operation, either choose No to the confirmation message, or press
Escape
.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Copy Curve
Q
(
1–59
)
Q
(
21–59
)
Interface Command: (No interface command directly corresponds to the copy curve operation. You can use the CRVHDR and CRVPT commands to read curve information from one curve location and write that information to another curve location.)
| www.lakeshore.com
88
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.10 SoftCal™
5.10.1 SoftCal™ With
Silicon Diode Sensors
The Model 336 allows you to perform inexpensive sensor calibrations with a set of algorithms called SoftCal™. The two SoftCal™ algorithms in the Model 336 work with
DT-400 Series silicon diode sensors and platinum sensors. They create a new temperature response curve from the standard curve and known data points that you entered. The new curve loads into one of the user curve locations (21 to 59) in the instrument. The following sections describe the data points you need to supply and the expected accuracy of the resulting curves.
A feature similar to SoftCal™ is available for compensating thermocouples using the
Curve Handler® program.
Both DT-400 Series and platinum SoftCal™ algorithms require a standard curve that is already present in the Model 336. When you enter the type of sensor being calibrated, the correct standard curve must be selected. When calibration is complete, you must assign the new curve to an input. The Model 336 does not automatically assign the newly generated curve to either input.
Calibration data points must be entered into the Model 336. These calibration points are normally measured at easily obtained temperatures like the boiling point of cryogens. Each algorithm operates with 1, 2, or 3 calibration points. The range of improved accuracy increases with more points.
There are two ways to get SoftCal™ calibration data points: you can record the response of an unknown sensor at well controlled temperatures, or you can purchase a SoftCal™ calibrated sensor from Lake Shore. There are advantages to both methods.
D
User:
when you can provide stable calibration temperatures with the sensor installed, SoftCal™ calibration eliminates errors in the sensor measurement as well as the sensor. Thermal gradients, instrument accuracy, and other measurement errors can be significant to some users. Calibration can be no better than user-supplied data.
D
Purchased:
Lake Shore sensors with SoftCal™ calibration include a set of calibration points in the calibration report. The SoftCal™ calibration points are generated in a controlled calibration facility at Lake Shore for best accuracy. The calibration points can be entered into the Model 336 so it can generate a curve. If the CalCurve™ service is purchased with the calibrated sensor, the curve is also generated at the factory and can be entered like any other curve.
Lake Shore silicon diode sensors incorporate remarkably uniform sensing elements that exhibit precise, monotonic, and repeatable temperature response. For example, the Lake Shore DT-400 Series of silicon diode sensors have a repeatable temperature response from 2 K to 475 K. These sensors closely follow a standard curve . SoftCal™ is an inexpensive way to improve the accuracy of an already predictable sensor.
A unique characteristic of DT-400 Series diodes is that their temperature responses pass through 28 K at almost exactly the same voltage. This improves SoftCal™ algorithm operation by providing an extra calibration data point. It also explains why
SoftCal™ calibration specifications are divided into two temperature ranges, above
and below 28 K. See FIGURE 5-8.
D
Point 1:
calibration data point at or near the boiling point of helium, 4.2 K. Acceptable temperature entries are 2 K to 10 K. This data point improves between the calibration data point and 28 K. Points 2 and 3 improve temperatures above 28 K.
D
Point 2:
calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen (77.35 K).
Temperatures outside 50 K to 100 K are not allowed. This data point improves accuracy between 28 K and 100 K. Points 2 and 3 together improve accuracy to room temperature and above.
D
Point 3:
calibration data point near room temperature (305 K). Temperatures outside the range of 200 K to 350 K are not allowed.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.10.2 SoftCal™ Accuracy With DT-400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 89
SoftCal Point One
Liquid helium boiling point
4.2 K
SoftCal Point Two
Liquid nitrogen boiling point
77.35 K
SoftCal Point Three
Room temperature point
305 K
5.10.2 SoftCal™
Accuracy With DT-400
Series Silicon Diode
Sensors
0
2 – 10 K
25 50 75
50 – 100 K
100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275
200 – 325 K
300 325
FIGURE 5-8
Acceptable temperature range for DT-400 series silicon diode SoftCal™ sensors
350
A SoftCal™ calibration is only as good as the accuracy of the calibration points. The accuracies listed for SoftCal™ assume ±0.01 K for 4.2 K (liquid helium), ±0.05 K for
77.35 K (liquid nitrogen), and 305 K (room temperature) points. Users performing the
SoftCal™ with Lake Shore instruments should note that the boiling point of liquid cryogen, though accurate, is affected by atmospheric pressure. Use calibrated standard sensors if possible.
One-point SoftCal™ calibrations for applications under 30 K are performed at liquid helium (4.2 K) temperature. Accuracy for the DT-470-SD-13 diode is ±0.5 K from 2 K to <30 K with no accuracy change above 30 K.
Two-point SoftCal™ calibrations for applications above 30 K are performed at liquid nitrogen (77.35 K) and room temperature (305 K). Accuracy for the DT-470-SD-13 diode sensor is as follows:
±1.0 K
±0.25 K
±0.15 K
±0.25 K
±1.0 K
2 K to <30 K (no change below 30 K)
30 K to <60 K
60 K to <345 K
345 K to <375 K
375 to 475 K
TABLE 5-6
2-point SoftCal™ calibration accuracy for DT-470-SD-13 diode sensors
Three-point SoftCal™ calibrations are performed at liquid helium (4.2 K), liquid nitrogen (77.35 K), and room temperature (305 K). Accuracy for the DT-470-SD-13 diode sensor is as follows:
±0.5 K
±0.25 K
±0.15 K
±0.25 K
±1.0 K
2 K to <30 K
30 K to <60 K
60 K to <345 K
345 K to <375 K
375 to 475 K
TABLE 5-7
3-point SoftCal™ calibration accuracy for DT-470-SD-13 diode sensors
| www.lakeshore.com
90
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
5.10.3 SoftCal™ With
Platinum Sensors
The platinum sensor is a well-accepted temperature standard because of its consistent and repeatable temperature response above 30 K. SoftCal™ gives platinum sensors better accuracy than their nominal matching to the DIN 43760 curve.
SoftCal Point One
Liquid nitrogen boiling point
77.35 K
SoftCal Point Two
Room temperature point
305 K
SoftCal Point Three
High temperature point
480 K
5.10.4 SoftCal™
Accuracy With
Platinum Sensors
0 50 100
50 – 100 K
150 200 250 300
200 – 325 K
350 400 450 500
400 – 600 K
550 600 650
FIGURE 5-9
Acceptable temperature range for platinum SoftCal™ sensors
One, two, or three calibration data points can be used. If you are using one point, the algorithm shifts the entire curve up or down to meet the single point. If you are using two points, the algorithm has enough information to tilt the curve, achieving good accuracy between the data points. The third point extends the improved accuracy to span all three points.
D
Point 1:
calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen (77.35 K).
Acceptable temperature entries are 50 K to 100 K.
D
Point 2:
calibration data point near room temperature (305 K). Acceptable temperature entries are 200 K to 300 K.
D
Point 3:
calibration data point at a higher temperature (480 K). Acceptable temperature entries are 400 K to 600 K.
A SoftCal™ calibration is only as good as the accuracy of the calibration points. The accuracies listed for SoftCal™ assume ±0.05 K for 77.35 K (liquid nitrogen) and 305 K
(room temperature) points. If you are performing the SoftCal™ with Lake Shore instruments, note that the boiling point of liquid cryogen, though accurate, is affected by atmospheric pressure. Use calibrated standard sensors if possible.
One-point SoftCal™ calibrations with platinum sensors have no specified accuracy.
Two-point SoftCal™ calibrations for applications above 70 K are performed at liquid nitrogen (77.35 K) and room temperature (305 K). Accuracy for the PT-102, PT-103, or
PT-111 platinum sensor is as follows:
±250 mK
±500 mK
70 K to 325 K
325K to ±1400 mK at 480 K
(DIN class A or class B tolerance
TABLE 5-8
Three-point SoftCal™ calibration accuracy for DT-470-SD-13 diode sensors
Three-point SoftCal™ calibrations are performed at liquid nitrogen (77.35 K), room temperature (305 K), and high temperature (480 K). Accuracy for the PT-102, PT-103, or PT-111 platinum sensor is ±250 mK from 70 K to 325 K, and ±250 mK from
325 K to 480 K.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
5.10.5 SoftCal™
CalibrationCurve
Creation
5.10.5 SoftCal™ CalibrationCurve Creation 91
Once the calibration data points have been obtained, you may create a SoftCal™ calibration. Press
Curve Entry
, then scroll to Softcal and press
Enter
. A list of sensor types is displayed containing DT-470, PT-100, and PT 1000. Scroll to the desired sensor type and press
Enter
. A list of SoftCal™ parameters is displayed.
Use the Store Location parameter to choose the user curve location in which to store the newly generated curve. If desired, use the Serial Number parameter to enter a serial number for the newly generated curve. Use the Point X Temp and Point X Sensor parameters to enter calibration data point X, where X can be point 1, 2, or 3. If only 1 or 2 data points were acquired, only enter those data points and leave the others at their default values. Note the acceptable temperature ranges for each calibration
data point in FIGURE 5-8 and FIGURE 5-9. If a temperature value outside of the
acceptable range is entered, the value will be limited to the closest acceptable value.
Once the data points are entered, highlight Generate Softcal and press
Enter
. Choose
Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation. To cancel the operation, either choose No to the confirmation message, or press
Escape
. When the Softcal™ curve has been generated, the following message will appear on the display:
*** SoftCal curve has been generated ***.
The Generate Softcal operation will overwrite an existing user curve. Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before generating the calibrated curve.
You can check the new curve using the View Curve instructions in section 5.9.2. The
curve is not automatically assigned to any input, so you will need to assign it to an
input. Refer to section 4.4.11 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input.
Menu Navigation:
Curve Entry
Q
Softcal
Q
(
DT-470, Platinum 100, Platinum 1000
)
Q
Data Entry (see note below)
Q
(
Generate Softcal)
Q
(Yes)
Interface Command:
SCAL
Data entry includes new curve serial number and calibration points.
| www.lakeshore.com
92
c
HAPTER
5:
Advanced Operation
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.1 General 93
Chapter 6: Computer Interface
Operation
6.1 General
6.2 IEEE-488
Interface
This chapter provides operational instructions for the computer interface for the
Lake Shore Model 336 temperature controller. Each of the three computer interfaces provided with the Model 336 permit remote operation. The first is the IEEE–488
interface described in section 6.2. The second is the USB interface described in
section 6.3. The third is the Ethernet interface described in section 6.4. The three
interfaces share a common set of commands detailed in section 6.6. Only one of the
interfaces can be used at a time.
The IEEE–488 interface is an instrumentation bus with hardware and programming standards that simplify instrument interfacing. The Model 336 IEEE–488 interface complies with the IEEE-488.2 standard and incorporates its functional, electrical, and mechanical specifications unless otherwise specified in this manual.
All instruments on the interface bus perform one or more of the interface functions of
Talker, Listener, or Bus Controller. A Talker transmits data onto the bus to other devices. A Listener receives data from other devices through the bus. The Bus Controller designates to the devices on the bus which function to perform. The Model 336 performs the functions of Talker and Listener, but it cannot be a Bus Controller. The
Bus Controller is the digital computer that tells the Model 336 which functions to perform.
TABLE 6-1 defines the IEEE–488 capabilities and subsets for the Model 336:
Subset
SH1:
RL1:
DC1:
DT0:
C0:
T5:
L4:
SR1:
AH1:
PP0:
E1:
Capabilities
Source handshake capability
Complete remote/local capability
Full device clear capability
No device trigger capability
No system controller capability
Basic Talker, serial poll capability, talk only, unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen
Basic Listener, unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk
Service request capability
Acceptor handshake capability
No parallel poll capability
Open collector electronics
TABLE 6-1
Model 336 IEEE-488 interface capabilities and their subsets
Instruments are connected to the IEEE–488 bus by a 24-conductor connector cable
as specified by the standard (section 8.10.1). Cables can be ordered from Lake Shore
as IEEE-488 Cable Kit 4005, or they can be purchased from other electronic suppliers.
Cable lengths are limited to 2 m (6.6 ft) for each device and 20 m (65.6 ft) for the entire bus. The Model 336 can drive a bus with up to ten loads. If more instruments or cable length is required, a bus expander must be used.
| www.lakeshore.com
94
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.2.1 Changing
IEEE-488 Interface
Parameters
6.2.2 Remote/Local
Operation
6.2.3 IEEE-488.2
Command Structure
The IEEE-488 address must be set from the front panel before communication with the instrument can be established.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
IEEE-488
Interface
Q
IEEE-488 Address
Q
(1 to 31)
Default: IEEE-488
Normal operations from the keypad are referred to as local operations. The
Model 336 can also be configured for remote operations via the IEEE-488 interface or the
Remote/Local
key. The
Remote/Local
key will toggle between remote and local operation. During remote operations, the remote annunciator LED will be illuminated, and operations from the keypad will be disabled.
The Model 336 supports several command types. These commands are divided into four groups.
1. Bus Control (section 6.2.3.1).
a. Universal
D
Uniline
D
Multiline b. Addressed bus control
3. Device Specific (section 6.2.3.3).
4. Message Strings (section 6.2.3.4).
6.2.3.1 Bus Control Commands
A bus control command can either be a universal or an addressed bus control. A universal command addresses all devices on the bus. Universal commands include uniline and multiline commands. A uniline command (message) asserts only a single signal line. The Model 336 recognizes two of these messages from the Bus Controller:
Remote (REN) and Interface Clear (IFC). The Model 336 sends one uniline command:
Service Request (SRQ).
D
REN (Remote): puts the Model 336 into remote mode
D
IFC (Interface Clear): stops current operation on the bus
D
SRQ (Service Request): tells the bus controller that the Model 336 needs interface service
A multiline command asserts a group of signal lines. All devices equipped to implement such commands do so simultaneously upon command transmission. These commands transmit with the Attention (ATN) line asserted low. The Model 336 recognizes two multiline commands:
D
LLO (Local Lockout): prevents the use of instrument front panel controls
D
DCL (Device Clear): clears Model 336 interface activity and puts it into a bus idle state
Finally, addressed bus control commands are multiline commands that must include the Model 336 listen address before the instrument responds. Only the addressed device responds to these commands. The Model 336 recognizes three of the addressed bus control commands:
D
SDC (Selective Device Clear): the SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command, except that only the addressed device responds
D
GTL (Go To Local): the GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode. With some instruments, GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.2.3 IEEE-488.2 Command Structure 95
D
SPE (Serial Poll Enable) and SPD (Serial Poll Disable): serial polling accesses the
Service Request Status Byte Register. This status register contains important operational information from the unit requesting service. The SPD command ends the polling sequence.
6.2.3.2 Common Commands
Common commands are addressed commands that create commonality between instruments on the bus. All instruments that comply with the IEEE-488 standard share these commands and their format. Common commands all begin with an asterisk. They generally relate to bus and instrument status and identification. Common query commands end with a question mark (?). Model 336 common commands are
detailed in section 6.6.1 and summarized in TABLE 6-6.
6.2.3.3 Device Specific Commands
Device specific commands are addressed commands. The Model 336 supports a variety of device specific commands to program instruments remotely from a digital computer and to transfer measurements to the computer. Most device specific commands also work if performed from the front panel. Model 336 device specific com-
mands are detailed in section 6.6.1 and summarized in TABLE 6-6.
6.2.3.4 Message Strings
A message string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function.
There are three types of message strings: commands, queries and responses. The computer issues command and query strings through user programs, and the instrument issues responses. Two or more command strings or queries can be chained together in one communication, but they must be separated by a semi-colon (;). The total communication string must not exceed 255 characters in length.
A command string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting. When a command is issued, the computer is acting as talker and the instrument as listener. The format is:
<command mnemonic><space><parameter data><terminator>.
Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each one is described in
section 6.6.1. A terminator must be sent with every message string.
A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument which response to send. Queries are issued similar to commands with the computer acting as talker and the instrument as listener. The query format is:
<query mnemonic><?><space><parameter data><terminator>.
Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark. Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries. Query mnemonics
and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6.6.1. A terminator must be
sent with every message string. Issuing a query does not initiate a response from the instrument.
A response string is sent by the instrument only when it is addressed as a talker and the computer becomes the listener. The instrument will respond only to the last query it receives. The response can be a reading value, status report or the present value of a parameter. Response data formats are listed along with the associated queries
| www.lakeshore.com
96
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.2.4 Status System
Overview
The Model 336 implements a status system compliant with the IEEE-488.2 standard.
The status system provides a method of recording and reporting instrument information and is typically used to control the Service Request (SRQ) interrupt line. A dia-
gram of the status system is shown in FIGURE 6-1. The status system is made up of
status register sets, the Status Byte register, and the Service Request Enable register.
Each register set consists of three types of registers: condition, event, and enable.
6.2.4.1 Condition Registers
Each register set (except the Standard Event Register set) includes a condition regis-
ter as shown in FIGURE 6-1. The condition register constantly monitors the instru-
ment status. The data bits are real-time and are not latched or buffered. The register is read-only.
6.2.4.2 Event Registers
Each register set includes an event register as shown in FIGURE 6-1. Bits in the event
register correspond to various system events and latch when the event occurs. When an event bit is set, subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored. Set bits remain latched until the register is cleared by a query command (such as *ESR?) or a
*CLS command. The register is read-only.
6.2.4.3 Enable Registers
Each register set includes an enable register as shown in FIGURE 6-1. An enable regis-
ter determines which bits in the corresponding event register will set the summary bit for the register set in the Status Byte. You may write to or read from an enable register. Each event register bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the enable register. When you set an enable register bit, and the corresponding bit is set in the event register, the output (summary) of the register will be set, which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte register.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.2.4 Status System Overview 97
Standard event
Status register
*ESR?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON
Not used
CME EXE
Not used
QYE
Not used
OPC
– Bit
– Name
Output buffer
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
Standard event
Status enable register
*ESE, *ESE?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON
Not used
CME EXE
Not used
QYE
Not used
OPC
PON = Power on
CME = Command error
EXE = Execution error
QYE = Query error
OPC = Operation complete
– Bit
– Name
Status byte register
*STB?
7
OSB RQS
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSS ESB MAV
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
RQS Generate service request—reset by serial poll
AND
– Bit
– Name
AND OR
MSS
Read by
*STB?
AND
Operation condition register
OPST?
Service request enable register
*SRE, *SRE?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
– Bit
– Name
7
OSB
Operation event register
OPSTR?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
– Bit
– Name
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
Operation event enable register
OPSTE, OPSTE?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
COM = Processor communication error
CAL = Calibration error
ATUNE = Autotune process completed
NRDG = New sensor reading
RAMP1 = Loop 1 ramp done
RAMP2 = Loop 2 ramp done
OVLD = Sensor overload
ALARM = Sensor alarming
– Bit
– Name
OR
6
Not used
5 4 3 2 1 0
ESB MAV
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
OSB = Operation summary bit
RQS = Service request
MSS = Master summary status bit
ESB = Event status summary bit
MAV = Message available summary bit
– Bit
– Name
FIGURE 6-1
Model 336 status system
| www.lakeshore.com
98
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.2.4.4 Status Byte Register
The Status Byte register, typically referred to as the Status Byte, is a non-latching, read-only register that contains all of the summary bits from the register sets. The
(RQS)/Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. This bit is used to control the Service
Request hardware line on the bus and to report if any of the summary bits are set via the *STB? command. The status of the RQS/MSS bit is controlled by the summary bits and the Service Request Enable Register.
6.2.4.5 Service Request Enable Register
The Service Request Enable Register determines which summary bits in the Status
Byte will set the RQS/MSS bit of the Status Byte. You may write to or read from the Service Request Enable Register. Each Status Byte summary bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the Service Request Enable Register. When you set a Service Request Enable Register bit, and the corresponding summary bit is set in the Status Byte, the RQS/MSS bit of the Status Byte will be set, which in turn sets the Service
Request hardware line on the bus.
6.2.4.6 Reading Registers
You can read any register in the status system using the appropriate query command.
Some registers clear when read, others do not (section 6.2.4.8). The response to a
query will be a decimal value that corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits
in the register (TABLE 6-2). The actual query commands are described later through-
Position
Decimal
B7
128
B6
64
B5
32
B4
16
B3
8
B2
4
B1
2
Weighting
2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2
Example: If bits 0, 2, and 4 are set, a query of the register will return a decimal value of 21 (1+4+16)
.
2 1
TABLE 6-2
Binary weighting of an 8-bit register
B0
1
2 0
6.2.4.7 Programming Registers
The only registers that may be programmed by the user are the enable registers. All other registers in the status system are read-only registers. To program an enable register, send a decimal value that corresponds to the desired binary-weighted sum
of all bits in the register (TABLE 6-2). The actual commands are described throughout
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.2.5 Status System Detail: Status Register Sets 99
Register
Condition registers
Event registers:
Standard event status register
Operation event register
Enable registers
Standard Event Status Enable Register
Operation Event Enable Register
Service Request Enable Register
Status byte
6.2.4.8 Clearing Registers
The methods to clear each register are detailed in TABLE 6-3.
Method
None. Registers are not latched
Query the event register
Send *CLS
Power on instrument
Write 0 to the enable register
Power on instrument
There are no commands that directly clear the status byte as the bits are non-latching; to clear individual summary bits clear the event register that corresponds to the summary bit—sending *CLS will clear all event registers which in turn clears the status byte
Power on instrument
TABLE 6-3
Register clear methods
Example
—
*ESR? (clears Standard Event
Status Register
*CLS (clears both registers)
—
*ESE 0 (clears Standard Event
Status Enable register)
—
If bit 5 (ESB) of the status byte is set, send *ESR? to read the standard event status register and bit 5 will clear
—
6.2.5 Status System
Detail: Status Register
Sets
As shown in FIGURE 6-1, there are two register sets in the status system of the
Model 336: Standard Event Status Register and Operation Event Register.
6.2.5.1 Standard Event Status Register Set
The Standard Event Status Register reports the following interface related instrument events: power on detected, command syntax errors, command execution errors, query errors, operation complete. Any or all of these events may be reported in the
standard event summary bit through the enable register (FIGURE 6-2). The Standard
Event Status Enable command (*ESE) programs the enable register and the query command (*ESE?) reads it. *ESR? reads and clears the Standard Event Status Register.
The used bits of the Standard Event Register are described as follows:
D
Power On (PON), Bit (7): this bit is set to indicate an instrument off-on transition.
D
Command Error (CME), Bit (5): this bit is set if a command error has been detected since the last reading. This means that the instrument could not interpret the command due to a syntax error, an unrecognized header, unrecognized terminators, or an unsupported command.
D
Execution Error (EXE), Bit (4): this bit is set if an execution error has been detected. This occurs when the instrument is instructed to do something not within its capabilities.
D
Query Error (QYE), Bit (2): this bit indicates a query error. It occurs rarely and involves loss of data because the output queue is full.
D
Operation Complete (OPC), Bit (0): when *OPC is sent, this bit will be set when the instrument has completed all pending operations. The operation of this bit is not related to the *OPC? command, which is a separate interface feature
| www.lakeshore.com
100
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
Standard event
Status register
*ESR?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128
PON
64
Not used
32 16
CME EXE
8
Not used
4
QYE
2
Not used
1
OPC
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
(
*ESR?
reads and clears the register)
AND
AND
AND
AND
Standard event
Status enable register
*ESE, *ESE?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128
PON
64
Not used
32 16
CME EXE
8
Not used
4
QYE
2
Not used
1
OPC
AND
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
OR
To event summary bit (ESB) of status byte register
(see FIGURE 6-1)
FIGURE 6-2
Standard event status register
6.2.5.2 Operation Event Register Set
The Operation Event Register reports the interface related instrument events listed below. Any or all of these events may be reported in the operation event summary bit
through the enable register (FIGURE 6-3). The Operation Event Enable command
(OPSTE) programs the enable register and the query command (OPSTE?) reads it.
OPSTR? reads and clears the Operation Event Register. OPST? reads the Operation
Condition register. The used bits of the Operation Event Register are described as follows:
D
Processor Communication Error (COM), Bit (7): this bit is set when the main processor cannot communicate with the sensor input processor
D
Calibration Error (CAL), Bit (6): this bit is set if the instrument is not calibrated or the calibration data has been corrupted
D
Autotune Done (ATUNE), Bit (5): this bit is set when the Autotuning algorithm is
NOT active
D
New Sensor Reading (NRDG), Bit (4): this bit is set when there is a new sensor reading
D
Loop 1 Ramp Done (RAMP1), Bit (3): this bit is set when a loop 1 setpoint ramp is completed
D
Loop 2 Ramp Done (RAMP2), Bit (2)—: this bit is set when a loop 2 setpoint ramp is completed
D
Sensor Overload (OVLD), Bit (1): this bit is set when a sensor reading is in the overload condition
D
Alarming (ALARM), Bit (0): this bit is set when an input is in an alarming state, and the Alarm Visible parameter is on
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.2.6 Status System Detail: Status Byte Register and Service Request 101
6.2.6 Status System
Detail: Status Byte
Register and Service
Request
Operation condition register
OPST?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
Operation event register
OPSTR?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
AND
(
OPSTR?
reads and clears the register)
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
Operation event enable register
OPSTE, OPSTE?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
COM CAL ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
To operation event summary bit (OSB) of status byte register
(see FIGURE 6-1)
FIGURE 6-3
Operation event register
As shown in FIGURE 6-1, the Status Byte Register receives the summary bits from the
two status register sets and the message available summary bit from the output buffer. The status byte is used to generate a service request (SRQ). The selection of summary bits that generates an SRQ is controlled by Service Request Enable Register.
6.2.6.1 Status Byte Register
The summary messages from the event registers and output buffer set or clear the
summary bits of the Status Byte Register (FIGURE 6-4). These summary bits are not
latched. Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding summary bit in the
Status Byte Register. Reading all messages in the output buffer, including any pending queries, will clear the message available bit. The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows:
D
Operation Summary (OSB), Bit (7): this bit is set when an enabled operation event has occurred
D
Request Service (RQS)/Master Summary Status (MSS), Bit (6): this bit is set when a summary bit and the summary bit’s corresponding enable bit in the Service
Request Enable Register are set. Once set, the user may read and clear the bit in two different ways, which is why it is referred to as both the RQS and the MSS bit.
When this bit goes from low to high, the Service Request hardware line on the bus
is set; this is the RQS function of the bit (section 6.2.6.3). In addition, the status of
the bit may be read with the *STB? query, which returns the binary weighted sum of all bits in the Status Byte; this is the MSS function of the bit.
Performing a serial poll will automatically clear the RQS function, but it will not clear the MSS function. A *STB? will read the status of the MSS bit (along with all of the summary bits), but also will not clear it. To clear the MSS bit, either clear the event register that set the summary bit or disable the summary bit in the
Service Request Enable Register.
D
Event Summary (ESB), Bit (5): this bit is set when an enabled standard event has occurred
D
Message Available (MAV), Bit (4): this bit is set when a message is available in the output buffer
| www.lakeshore.com
102
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.2.6.2 Service Request Enable Register
The Service Request Enable Register is programmed by the user and determines which summary bits of the Status Byte may set bit 6 (RQS/MSS) to generate a Service
Request. Enable bits are logically ANDed with the corresponding summary bits
(FIGURE 6-4). Whenever a summary bit is set by an event register and its correspond-
ing enable bit is set by the user, bit 6 will set to generate a service request. The Service
Request Enable command (*SRE) programs the Service Request Enable Register and the query command (*SRE?) reads it.
From operation event register
From standard event status register
From operation event register
RQS
MSS
Status byte register
*STB?
7
128
OSB RQS
6
64
5 4 3 2 1 0
32
MSS ESB
16
MAV
8
Not used
4
Not used
2
Not used
1
Not used
– Bit
– Decimal
– Name
Generate service request—reset by serial poll
AND
AND
OR
Read by
*STB?
AND
Service request enable register
*SRE, *SRE?
7
128
OSB
6
64
Not used
5 4 3 2 1 0
32
ESB
16
MAV
8
Not used
4
Not used
2
Not used
1
Not used
– Bit
– Name
FIGURE 6-4
Status byte register and service request enable register
6.2.6.3 Using Service Request (SRQ) and Serial Poll
When a Status Byte summary bit (or MAV bit) is enabled by the Service Request
Enable Register and goes from 0 to 1, bit 6 (RQS/MSS) of the status byte will be set.
This will send a service request (SRQ) interrupt message to the bus controller. The user program may then direct the bus controller to serial poll the instruments on the bus to identify which one requested service (the one with bit 6 set in its status byte).
Serial polling will automatically clear RQS of the Status Byte Register. This allows subsequent serial polls to monitor bit 6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types. After a serial poll, the same event or any event that uses the same Status Byte summary bit, will not cause another SRQ unless the event register that caused the first SRQ has been cleared, typically by a query of the event register.
The serial poll does not clear MSS. The MSS bit stays set until all enabled Status Byte summary bits are cleared, typically by a query of the associated event register
The programming example in TABLE 6-4 initiates an SRQ when a command error is
detected by the instrument.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.2.6 Status System Detail: Status Byte Register and Service Request 103
Command or Operation
*ESR?
*ESE 32
*SRE 32
*ABC
Monitor bus
Initiate serial poll
*ESR?
Description
Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register
Enable the Command Error (CME) bit in the Standard Event Status Register
Enable the Event Summary Bit (ESB) to set the RQS
Send improper command to instrument to generate a command error
Monitor the bus until the Service Request interrupt (SRQ) is sent.
Serial poll the bus to determine which instrument sent the interrupt and clear the RQS bit in the Status Byte.
Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register allowing an SRQ to be generated on another command error.
TABLE 6-4
Programming example to generate an SRQ
6.2.6.4 Using Status Byte Query (*STB?)
The Status Byte Query (*STB?) command is similar to a serial poll except it is processed like any other instrument command. The *STB? command returns the same result as a serial poll except that the Status Byte bit 6 (RQS/MSS) is not cleared. In this case, bit 6 is considered the MSS bit. Using the *STB? command does not clear any bits in the Status Byte Register.
6.2.6.5 Using the Message Available (MAV) Bit
Status Byte summary bit 4 (MAV) indicates that data is available to read into the bus controller. This message may be used to synchronize information exchange with the bus controller. The bus controller can, for example, send a query command to the
Model 336 and then wait for MAV to set. If the MAV bit has been enabled to initiate an
SRQ, the user’s program can direct the bus controller to look for the SRQ leaving the bus available for other use. The MAV bit will be clear whenever the output buffer is empty.
6.2.6.6 Using Operation Complete (*OPC) and Operation Complete Query (*OPC?)
The Operation Complete (*OPC) and Operation Complete Query (*OPC?) are both used to indicate when pending device operations complete. However, the commands operate with two distinct methods.
The *OPC command is used in conjunction with bit 0 (OPC) of the Standard Event Status Register. If *OPC is sent as the last command in a command sequence, bit 0 will be set when the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the command sequence. Additional commands may be sent between the instrument and the bus controller while waiting for the initial pending operation to complete. A typical use of this function would be to enable the OPC bit to generate an SRQ and include the *OPC command when programming the instrument. The bus controller could then be instructed to look for an SRQ allowing additional communication with the instrument while the initial process executes.
The *OPC? query has no interaction with bit 0 (OPC) of the Standard Event Status Register. If the *OPC? query is sent at the end of a command sequence, the bus will be held until the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the command sequence. Additional commands (except *RST) should not be sent until the operation is complete, as erratic operation will occur. Once the sequence is complete a 1 will be placed in the output buffer. This function is typically used to signal a completed operation without monitoring the SRQ. It is also used when it is important to prevent any additional communication on the bus during a pending operation.
| www.lakeshore.com
104
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.3 USB Interface
The Model 336 USB interface provides a convenient way to connect to most modern computers, as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as of the writing of this manual. The USB interface is implemented as a virtual serial com port connection. This implementation provides a simple migration path for modifying existing
RS-232 based remote interface software. It also provides a simpler means of communicating than a standard USB implementation.
6.3.1 Physical
Connection
6.3.2 Hardware
Support
6.3.3 Installing the USB
Driver
The Model 336 has a B-type USB connector on the rear panel. This is the standard connector used on USB peripheral devices, and it allows the common USB A-type to
B-type cable to be used to connect the Model 336 to a host PC. The pin assignments
for A-type and B-type connectors are shown in section 8.10. The maximum length of a
USB cable, as defined by the USB 2.0 standard, is 5 m (16.4 ft). This length can be extended using USB hubs every 5 m (16.4 ft) up to five times, for a maximum total length of 30 m (98.4 ft).
The USB interface emulates an RS-232 serial port at a fixed 57,600 baud rate, but with the physical connections of a USB. This programming interface requires a certain configuration to communicate properly with the Model 336. The proper configu-
ration parameters are listed in TABLE 6-5.
Baud rate
Data bits
Start bits
Stop bits
Parity
Flow control
Handshaking
57,600
7
1
1
Odd
None
None
TABLE 6-5
Host com port configuration
The USB hardware connection uses the full speed (12,000,000 bits/sec) profile of the
USB 2.0 standard; however, since the interface uses a virtual serial com port at a fixed data rate, the data throughput is still limited to a baud rate of 57,600 bits/s.
The Model 336 USB driver has been made available through Windows® Update. This is the recommended method for installing the driver, as it will ensure that you always have the latest version of the driver installed. If you are unable to install the driver from Windows® Update, refer to section 6.3.3.3 to install the driver from the web or from the disc provided with the Model 336.
These procedures assume that you are logged into a user account that has administrator privileges.
6.3.3.1 Installing the Driver From Windows® Update in Windows 7 and Vista®
1. Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer.
2. Turn on the Model 336.
3. When the Found New Hardware wizard appears, select
Locate and install driver software (recommended)
.
4. If User Account Control(UAC) is enabled, a UAC dialog box may appear asking if you want to continue. Click
Continue
.
5. The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows®
Update and install the drivers.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.3.3 Installing the USB Driver 105
If the Found New Hardware wizard is unable to connect to Windows® Update or find the drivers, a message to “Insert the disc that came with your Lake Shore Model 336” will be
displayed. Click Cancel and refer to section 6.3.3.3 to install the driver from the web.
6. When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver, a confirmation message stating “the software for this device has been successfully installed” will appear. Click
Close
to complete the installation.
6.3.3.2 Installing the Driver From Windows® Update in Windows® XP
1. Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer.
2. Turn on the Model 336.
3. When the Found New Hardware wizard appears, select
Yes, this time only
and click
Next
.
4. Select
Install the software automatically (Recommended)
and click
Next
.
5. The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows®
Update and install the drivers.
If the Found New Hardware wizard is unable to connect to Windows® Update or find the drivers, a message saying Cannot Install this Hardware will be displayed. Click the Cancel
button and refer to section 6.3.3.3 to install the driver from the web.
6. When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver a confirmation message stating “the wizard has finished installing the software for
Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller” will appear. Click
Finish
to complete the installation.
6.3.3.3 Installing the Driver From the Web
The Model 336 USB driver is available on the Lake Shore website. To install the driver
it must be downloaded from the website and extracted. Use the procedure in section
6.3.3.1 through section 6.3.3.4 to download, extract, and install the driver using
Windows 7, Vista® and XP.
6.3.3.3.1 Download the driver:
1. Locate the Model 336 USB driver on the downloads page on the Lake Shore website.
2. Right-click on the USB driver download link, and select
save target/link as
.
3. Save the driver to a convenient place, and take note as to where the driver was downloaded.
6.3.3.3.2 Extract the driver:
The downloaded driver is in a ZIP compressed archive. The driver must be extracted from this file. Windows® provides built-in support for ZIP archives. If this support is disabled, a third-party application, such as WinZip™ or 7-Zip, must be used.
For Windows 7 and Vista®:
1. Right click on the file and click
extract all.
2. An Extract Compressed (Zipped) Folders dialog box will appear. It is recommended the default folder is not changed. Take note of this folder location.
3. Click to clear the
Show extracted files when complete
checkbox, and click
Extract
.
For Windows® XP
1. Right-click on the file and click
extract all
.
2. The Extraction wizard will appear. Click
Next
.
| www.lakeshore.com
106
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
3. It is recommended to keep the same default folder. Take note of this folder location and click
Next
.
4. An “Extraction complete” message will be displayed. Click to clear the
Show extracted files
checkbox, and click
Finish
.
6.3.3.3.3 Manually install the driver
Manually installing drivers differ between versions of Windows®. The following sections describe how to manually install the driver using Windows 7, Vista® and
XP.To install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges.
For Windows 7 and Vista®
1. Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer.
2. Turn on the Model 336.
3. If the Found New Hardware wizard appears, click
Ask me again later
.
4. Open Device Manager. Use this procedure to open Device Manager.
a. Click the Windows®
Start
button and type Device Manager in the
Start Search
box.
b. Click on the Device Manager link in the Search Results Under Programs dialog box.
c. If User Account Control is enabled click
Continue
on the User Account
Control prompt.
5. Click
View
and ensure the
Devices by Type
check box is selected.
6. In the main window of Device Manager, locate
Other Devices
in the list of device types. In many instances this will be between Network adapters and Ports (COM
& LPT). If the
Other Devices
item is not already expanded, click the + icon.
Lake Shore Model 336 should appear indented underneath
Other Devices
. If it is not displayed as Lake Shore Model 336, it might be displayed as USB Device. If neither are displayed, click
Action
and then
Scan for hardware changes
, which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically. If the Found New
Hardware wizard opens, click
Cancel
.
7. Right-click on Lake Shore Model 336 and click
Update Driver Software
.
8. Click
Browse my computer for driver software
.
9. Click
Browse
and select the location of the extracted driver.
10. Ensure the
Include subfolders
check box is selected and click
Next
.
11. When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” should appear. Click
Close
to complete the installation.
For Windows® XP
1. Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer.
2. Turn on the Model 336.
3. The Found New Hardware wizard should appear. If the Found New Hardware wizard does not appear, the following procedure can be used to open the Hardware Update wizard which can be used instead:
a. Open Device Manager. Use this procedure to open the Device Manager:
D
Right-click on
My Computer
and then click
Properties
. This will open the System Properties dialog.
D
Click the
Hardware
tab and then click
Device Manager
.
b. Click
View
and ensure the
Devices by Type
check box is selected.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.3.4 Communication
6.3.4 Communication 107
c. In the main window of Device Manager, locate the
Ports
(COM & LPT) device type. In many instances this will be between the Network adapters and Processors items. If the
Ports
(COM & LPT) item is not already expanded, click the + icon. Lake Shore Model 336 should appear indented underneath
Ports
(COM & LPT). If it is not displayed as
Lake Shore Model 336, it might be displayed as USB Device. If neither are displayed, click
Action
and then select
Scan for hardware changes
, which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically. If the
Found New Hardware wizard opens, continue to step 4.
d. Right-click on Lake Shore Model 336 and click
Update Driver
.
4. Select
No, not at this time
and click
Next
.
5. Select
Search for the best driver in these locations
, click to clear the
Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM…)
check box, and click the
Include this location in the search
check box.
6. Click
Browse
and open the location of the extracted driver.
7. Click
Next
.
8. When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating “The wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller” should appear. Click
Finish
to complete the installation.
6.3.3.4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD
The Model 336 USB driver is available on the included CD. The following section describes the process of installing the driver from the CD. To install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges.
For Windows 7 and Vista®
1. Insert the CD into the computer.
2. Follow steps 1–9 of the Windows 7 and Vista® procedure in section 6.3.3.3.3.
3. Click
Browse
and select the drive containing the included CD.
4. Ensure the
Include subfolders
check box is selected and click
Next
.
5. When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” should appear. Click
Close
to complete the installation.
For Windows® XP
1. Insert the CD into the computer.
2. Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer.
3. Turn on the Model 336.
4. When the Found New Hardware wizard appears select
No, not at this time
and click
Next
.
5. Select
Install the software automatically (recommended)
and click
Next
.
6. The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically search the CD and install the drivers.
7. When the Found New Hardware Wizard finishes installing the drivers a message stating “the wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 336
Temperature Controller” should appear. Click
Finish
to complete the installation.
Communicating via the USB interface is done using message strings. The message strings should be carefully formulated by the user program according to some simple rules to establish effective message flow control.
| www.lakeshore.com
108
6.3.5 Message Flow
Control c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.3.4.1 Character Format
A character is the smallest piece of information that can be transmitted by the interface. Each character is ten bits long and contains data bits, bits for character timing, and an error detection bit. The instrument uses seven bits for data in the American
Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) format. One start bit and one stop bit are necessary to synchronize consecutive characters. Parity is a method of error detection. One parity bit configured for odd parity is included in each character.
ASCII letter and number characters are used most often as character data. Punctuation characters are used as delimiters to separate different commands or pieces of data. A special ASCII character, line feed (LF 0AH), is used to indicate the end of a message string. This is called the message terminator. The Model 336 will accept either the line feed character alone, or a carriage return (CR 0DH) followed by a line feed as the message terminator. The instrument query response terminator will include both carriage return and line feed.
6.3.4.2 Message Strings
A message string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function.
There are three types of message strings: commands, queries, and responses. The computer issues command and query strings through user programs, the instrument issues responses. Two or more command or query strings can be chained together in one communication, but they must be separated by a semi-colon (;). The total communication string must not exceed 255 characters in length.
A command string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting. The format is:
<command mnemonic><space><parameter data><terminators>.
Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each one is described in
section 6.6. Terminators must be sent with every message string.
A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to send a response. The query format is:
<query mnemonic><?><space><parameter data><terminators>.
Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark. Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries. Query mnemonics
and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6.6. Terminators must be sent
with every message string. The computer should expect a response very soon after a query is sent.
A response string is the instrument’s response or answer to a query string. The response can be a reading value, status report or the present value of a parameter.
Response data formats are listed along with the associated queries in section 6.6. The
response is sent as soon as possible after the instrument receives the query.
It is important to remember that the user program is in charge of the USB communication at all times. The instrument cannot initiate communication, determine which device should be transmitting at a given time, or guarantee timing between messages. All of this is the responsibility of the user program.
When issuing commands the user program alone should:
D
Properly format and transmit the command including the terminator as 1 string
D
Guarantee that no other communication is started for 50 ms after the last character is transmitted
D
Not initiate communication more than 20 times per second
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.4 Ethernet
Interface
6.4.1 Ethernet
Configuration
6.4 Ethernet Interface 109
When issuing queries or queries and commands together, the user program should:
D
Properly format and transmit the query including the terminator as 1 string
D
Prepare to receive a response immediately
D
Receive the entire response from the instrument including the terminator
D
Guarantee that no other communication is started during the response or for
50 ms after it completes
D
Not initiate communication more than 20 times per second
Failure to follow these simple rules will result in inability to establish communication with the instrument or intermittent failures in communication.
The Ethernet interface provides a means of connecting the Model 336 to an Ethernet based computer network. Ethernet networks provide the ability to communicate across large distances, often using existing equipment (the internet, pre-existing local networks). The Ethernet interface of the Model 336 provides the ability to use
TCP socket connections (section 6.4.3) to send commands and queries to the instru-
ment using the common command set detailed in section 6.6. The Model 336 has an
embedded web interface that provides status information and
additional utilities (section 6.5).
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Enabled
Q
Ethernet
There are several parameters for configuring the Model 336 Ethernet interface and three methods for configuring these parameters. This section contains a brief explanation of each of these. A comprehensive discussion of computer networking is beyond the scope of this manual. These settings may depend on your network configuration; contact your network administrator for assistance.
6.4.1.1 Network Address Parameters
Network address parameters include the IP address, the subnet mask, and the gateway address. The network address parameters of the Model 336 can be configured
using one of three methods: DHCP, Auto-IP, or Static-IP. See section 6.4.1.2 for details
on each of these configuration methods.
D
IP Address:
an IP address is required for a device to communicate using TCP/IP, which is the protocol generally used for Ethernet devices and the Model 336. The
IP version used by the Model 336 is IPv4. The IPv6 standard is not supported. All references to the IP protocol from this point forward will be referring to IPv4.
An IP address is a 32-bit logical address used to differentiate devices on a network. It is most often given in dotted decimal notation, such as nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a decimal number from 0 to 255.
D
Subnet Mask:
a sub network, or subnet, is a group of devices within a network that have a common, designated IP address routing prefix. A subnet mask is a 32-bit
“bit mask” that signifies which part of the IP address represents the subnet routing prefix, and which part represents the device’s address on the subnet. A subnet mask is most often given in dotted decimal notation, such as nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a decimal number from 0 to 255. When converted to a binary notation, the 32-bit subnet mask should consist of a contiguous group of ones, followed by a contiguous group of zeros. The ones represent which bits in the IP address refer to the subnet, and the zeros represent which bits refer to the device address. For example, the default Static-IP Address of the Model 336 is
192.168.0.12, and the default Static Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0. Converting this subnet mask to binary shows that the first 24 bits are ones, and the last 8 bits
| www.lakeshore.com
110
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
are zeros. This means that the first 24 bits of the Static-IP Address (192.168.0) represent the subnet, and the last 8 bits (12) represent the device.
D
Gateway Address:
a gateway is a network traffic routing device that is used to route communication between networks. If a gateway is not used, then devices on a network can only communicate with other devices on that same network. A
Gateway Address is the IP address of the gateway on a network. Contact the network administrator for the gateway address for your network.
6.4.1.2 Network Addresss Configuration Methods
The network address parameters of the Model 336 can be configured using one of three methods: DHCP, Auto-IP, or Static-IP. DHCP and Auto-IP are automatic configuration methods, and Static-IP requires manual configuration. If supported by the server, DHCP can also be used to automatically configure DNS server addresses, as well as IP address parameters.
An order of precedence is followed when the Model 336 attempts to acquire IP address parameters. If enabled, the DHCP method will be used first. If DHCP is disabled, or if the attempt to acquire parameters from the DHCP server fails, the
Model 336 then checks if Auto-IP is enabled. If Auto-IP is enabled, this method will be used. If disabled, or if this attempt fails, the Static-IP method will be used. If the
Static-IP method fails, the IP address parameters will not be configured and the
Ethernet status will enter an error state. Refer to section 6.4.2.1 if you receive an error
message.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP):
DHCP is a method of automatically configuring the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of Ethernet devices on a network. This method provides simple automatic configuration for users connecting to a network that provides a DHCP server. The network DHCP server will provide an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. Depending on the DHCP server configuration, it may also provide primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses as well. DHCP is the simplest method of IP configuration. DHCP does have the disadvantage of not necessarily preserving the IP address through a device reconfiguration, as well as the possibility of being automatically reconfigured when the DHCP “lease” expires. Contact your network administrator to find out the DHCP lease policy on your network.
To use DHCP to automatically configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of the Model 336, simply connect the Model 336 to a network that provides a DHCP server, and set the DHCP parameter to On. By default, the DHCP feature of the
Model 336 is On.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
DHCP
Q
(Off or On)
Auto-IP:
Auto-IP is a method of automatically configuring the IP address and subnet mask parameters of Ethernet devices on a link-local network. This configuration is performed by the Model 336 and does not require any external device. Auto-IP is defined in RFC 3927 “Dynamic Configuration of IPv4 Link-Local Addresses” and can be found at The Internet Engineering Task Force website at www.ietf.org. The automatically configured address will be in the link-local address group of 169.254.1.0 to
169.254.254.255. This group is reserved for independent, local networks that do not connect to other networks. This method chooses an IP address that is not already active on the network, which eliminates IP address conflicts. A gateway address is not applicable when using Auto-IP, since the purpose of a gateway address is to commu-
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.4.1 Ethernet Configuration 111
nicate with outside networks, and by definition Auto-IP only works on link-local networks. A disadvantage of Auto-IP is the limitation of only working with a link-local network, which cannot connect to other networks, including the internet. Another disadvantage lies in the fact that an Auto-IP assigned address will not be preserved through a device reconfiguration, such as a power cycle.
To use Auto-IP to automatically configure a link-local IP address and subnet mask, set the DHCP parameter to Off, then set the Auto-IP parameter to On. By default, the
Auto-IP feature of the Model 336 is Off.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Auto-IP
Q
(Off or On)
Static-IP:
Static-IP is a method of manually configuring the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of Ethernet enabled devices. When using the Static-IP method, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway must be configured appropriately for the connected network, or for the connected PC, in order to establish connection to the network. A major advantage to the Static-IP method is that the IP address will not change during device reconfiguration (power cycle). Disadvantages of using the
Static-IP method include the requirement of knowing how your network is configured in order to choose the correct configuration parameters.
The Static-IP method is always enabled, and therefore will default to this method when both automatic configuration methods (DHCP and Auto-IP) are disabled, or if all enabled automatic configuration methods fail. To use Static-IP to manually configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of the Model 336, set the DHCP and the
Auto-IP parameters to Off. Refer to the paragraphs above for details on turning off
DHCP and Auto-IP. The Model 336 will now use the Static-IP Address, Static Subnet
Mask, Static Gateway, Static Primary DNS, and Static Secondary DNS parameters to
attempt to configure the Ethernet interface connection. Refer to section 6.4.1.3 for
details on DNS parameters. Contact your network administrator for the appropriate
Static-IP parameters for your network.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Static-IP
Q
(Valid IP Address)
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Static Subnet Mask
Q
(Valid Subnet Mask)
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Static Gateway
Q
(Valid IP Address)
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Static Pri DNS
Q
(Valid IP Address)
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Static Sec DNS
Q
(Valid IP Address)
6.4.1.3 DNS Parameters
The parameters discussed in this section exist to facilitate the use of the Domain
Name System (DNS) to connect to the Model 336 using assignable names rather than cryptic IP addresses. This functionality is provided for convenience only, and is not critical to the connectivity of the Ethernet interface.
DNS Address:
A Domain Name System (DNS) is a service that translates names into IP addresses. This service allows for using human readable names for devices on a network. As an example, when a web browser attempts to retrieve the web page at www.lakeshore.com, the browser first performs a forward-lookup on the assigned
DNS server to attempt to retrieve the IP address that is represented by the name www.lakeshore.com. If successful, the web browser then uses the retrieved IP address to communicate with the web server that hosts the website at www.lakeshore.com.
| www.lakeshore.com
112
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
The Model 336 can be configured to communicate with a primary and a secondary
DNS server using the Primary DNS Address and the Secondary DNS Address parameters. Multiple DNS servers are sometimes used for redundancy, but multiple servers are not required, and not all networks provide a DNS server. DNS addresses can be configured automatically using the DHCP method if the network DHCP server is configured to do so.
Your DHCP server must be configured appropriately to provide DNS server addresses. Not all DHCP servers provide this functionality on your network.
Hostname:
A hostname is a name that is assigned to a device on a network. On a
Domain Name System (DNS) enabled network, a hostname can be used alone when connecting from another device on the same domain, or it can be combined with a domain name to connect to devices outside of the local domain. For example, www.lakeshore.com refers to the Lake Shore web server on the Internet, which is a
DNS enabled network. The web server hostname is “www”, and it resides on the domain “lakeshore.com”. To connect to the web server from another device on the lakeshore.com domain, only the hostname “www” must be used. To connect from any other domain on the Internet, the entire fully-qualified name, consisting of the hostname and the domain name (www.lakeshore.com) must be used. Hostnames can only contain alpha-numeric characters and hyphens, but cannot begin or end with a hyphen.
A hostname can be assigned by a network administrator, or if the Model 336 is connected to a network with Dynamic DNS (DDNS) capability, a DNS entry is automatically created for it using the Preferred Hostname and Preferred Domain Name parameters and the assigned IP address.
Menu Navigation:
Interface
Q
Modify IP Config
Q
Preferred Hostname
Q
(Valid Hostname String)
If DNS reverse-lookup is enabled on the network DNS server, and the DNS address parameters are correctly configured, the Model 336 will perform a reverse-lookup to determine if a hostname is assigned for the Model 336’s configured IP address. This will occur regardless of whether the hostname was configured dynamically using
DDNS, or manually by the network administrator. The returned hostname will appear in the Actual Hostname parameter, in the View IP Config submenu of the Interface
Setup menu.
Menu Navigation (Read Only):
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Actual Hostname
When using naming systems other than DNS, the Model 336 cannot assign the Preferred
Hostname or retrieve the Actual Hostname.
Domain Name:
A domain is a collection of network devices that are managed according to some common characteristic of its members. Domains can contain subdomains which are subsets within the domain. The hierarchy can contain several dot separated levels which flow from right to left. For example, lakeshore.com contains the top-level-domain “com” and the subdomain “lakeshore”. When using the Domain
Name System (DNS) to connect to a specific host device on a network, the device's hostname is tacked onto the left of the domain name. For example, the “www” in www.lakeshore.com refers to the Lake Shore web server, located within the internet domain “lakeshore.com.”
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.4.2 Viewing Ethernet
Configuration
6.4.2 Viewing Ethernet Configuration 113
If the Model 336 is connected to a network with Dynamic DNS (DDNS) capability, a
DNS entry is automatically created using the Preferred Hostname and Preferred
Domain Name parameters and the assigned IP address. The Preferred Domain Name
parameter can only be accessed using the NET interface command (section 6.6.1), or
by using the Ethernet configuration page (section 6.4.2) of the embedded website on
the Model 336.
If DNS reverse-lookup is enabled on the network DNS server, and the DNS address parameters are correctly configured, the Model 336 will perform a reverse-lookup to determine if a domain name is assigned for the Model 336’s configured IP address.
This will occur regardless of whether the domain name was configured dynamically using DDNS, or manually by the network administrator. The returned domain name will appear in the Actual Hostname parameter, in the View IP Config submenu of the
Interface Setup menu.
When using naming systems other than DNS, the Model 336 cannot assign the Preferred
Domain Name or retrieve the Actual Domain Name.
Menu Navigation:
The Preferred Domain name can only be entered using a computer interface NET
command, and viewed using the NET? query. Refer to section 6.6.1 for details on the
NET command and query.
When the Ethernet interface is enabled, two submenus become available: Modify IP
Config, and View IP Config. All configurable settings are available under the Modify IP
Config submenu, and the current state of the Ethernet configuration is detailed in the
View IP Config submenu. This is designed to eliminate confusion as to which are the configurable Static-IP settings, and which are the currently configured settings that could have been configured using any of the three configuration methods (DHCP,
Auto-IP, or Static-IP). The method used for the currently established connection is
shown in the LAN Status parameter of the View IP Confi submenu (section 6.4.2.1).
6.4.2.1 LAN Status
The LAN Status parameter indicates the current status of the Ethernet configuration.
This read-only parameter can be accessed using the View IP Config menu.
The possible LAN Status states are:
D
Connected–Static: the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the Static-IP method
D
Connected–DHCP: the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the DHCP method
D
Connected–AutoIP: the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the AutoIP method
D
Addr Not Acquired: the IP address parameters were not successfully configured.
D
Duplicate Init IP: when initially attempting to connect to the network, the Static-
IP address was found to be in use by another device already configured on the network. The Model 336 interface will remain unconfigured until an available
Static-IP address is entered.
D
Duplicate Ong IP: an ongoing conflict occurred after being successfully connected to the network, because another device on the network was configured using the same IP address. The Model 336 will automatically unconfigure and remain unconfigured until an available IP address is entered.
D
Cable Unplugged: the Ethernet cable is either unplugged at one end, or has been damaged
| www.lakeshore.com
114
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.4.3 TCP Socket
Communication
D
Module Error: the Model 336 has lost contact with the Ethernet module; this may indicate a damaged Ethernet module
D
Acquiring Address: the Model 336 is attempting to configure the IP address parameters using the enabled methods
6.4.2.2 MAC Address
The Media Access Controller (MAC) Address is a physical hardware address assigned to all Ethernet devices. MAC addresses are 48-bits and are generally written as six groups of two hexidecimal digits separated by colons, for example
“01:23:45:67:89:AB”. Unlike IP addresses, MAC addresses are tied to the device hardware and cannot be changed.
Menu Navigation (Read-Only):
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
MAC Address
6.4.2.3 Viewing Network Configuration Parameters and DNS Parameters
The currently configured network parameters are displayed individually in the View
IP Config submenu. These parameters could have been configured using either DHCP,
Auto-IP, or Static-IP. The LAN Status parameter shows which method was used for the current configuration. When in an error state, or in the intermediate Acquiring
Address state, the network configuration parameters will all be displayed as 0.0.0.0.
Refer to section 6.4.1.1 through section 6.4.1.3 for details on network configuration
parameters and DNS parameters.
Menu Navigation (Read-Only):
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
IP
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Subnet Mask
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Gateway IP
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Primary DNS IP
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Secondary DNS IP
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
Actual Hostname
Interface
Q
View IP Config
Q
TCP Socket Port
A TCP socket connection interface is provided as the communication medium for the
Ethernet interface of the Model 336. A TCP socket connection, or simply “socket connection”, is a common connection protocol used by Ethernet devices. The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is commonly used for creating a communication channel between one program on one computer and one program on another computer, for example a web browser on a PC and a web server on the Internet. In the case of the
Model 336, the protocol is used to create a communication channel between one program on one computer and the command line interface of the Model 336. TCP uses error correction and collision avoidance schemes that make it a very reliable form of Ethernet communication, but has drawbacks of having nondeterministic timing, and can encounter relatively large delays depending on network conditions.
These delays can be on the order of seconds. Sockets use port numbers to identify sending and receiving endpoints on network devices. This allows for multiple separate communication links to exist on each device.
The port number used for TCP socket connections on the Model 336 is 7777.
A maximum of two simultaneous socket connections can be made to the Model 336. Any attempts to open a new socket while two socket connections are already open on a
Model 336 will fail.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.4.4 Embedded Web
Interface
6.4.4 Embedded Web Interface 115
The Model 336 provides a web interface via an embedded web server that runs on the instrument. Once the Model 336 is properly connected, and the IP parameters properly configured, the web interface can be opened using a web browser. The web interface should be accessible using any modern web browser, but has only been tested with Microsoft™ Internet Explorer version 6.0 and 7.0.
6.4.4.1 Connecting to the Web Interface
To connect to the web interface, type “http://” followed by the IP address assigned to the Model 336 that you are attempting to connect to. If connecting from a device on the same local network, and a hostname is properly assigned to the Model 336 via a
naming service on the network (section 6.4.1.3), then the IP address can be replaced
by the hostname. If connecting from a device not on the same local network, but on a network which is connected to the local network of the Model 336, and a hostname and a domain name are properly assigned, the IP address can be replaced by the hostname followed by the domain name, with a dot separator between them. For example if the hostname LSCI-3360001, and the domain name yourdomain.com were assigned via a naming service, then typing “http://LSCI-3360001.yourdomain.com” would open the home web page of the Model 336 embedded website.
6.4.4.2 Web Pages
Each web page contains detailed help information in the form of tool-tips. You can access these tool-tips by hovering the mouse pointer over the various help icons
(show help icon image here) located throughout the embedded website.
Home Page: provides a summary of information specific to the Model 336.
FIGURE 6-5
Model 336 home page
| www.lakeshore.com
116
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
Ethernet Configuration Page: provides a means of reconfiguring the Ethernet configuration parameters of the Model 336.
FIGURE 6-6
Ethernet configuration page
Ethernet Status Page: provides status and statistics related to the current Ethernet connection.
FIGURE 6-7
Ethernet status page
Utilities Page: provides links to launch the embedded curve handler application, the embedded Ethernet firmware updater, and the instrument configurator backup utilities
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 6-8
Utilities page
6.5 Utilities
6.5.1 Embedded
Curve Handler™
6.5 Utilities 117
Security Settings: provides a means of changing the website security settings by allowing the user to enter a new username and password for the website, or to remove password protection from the website. The username and password parameters are available for viewing and editing from the front panel under the Modify IP
Config submenu of the Interface menu.
Password protection only protects access to the embedded web pages and does not pro-
vide any kind of security for TCP Socket access (section 6.4.3).
The website username and password are available from the front panel menu, and therefore can easily be obtained by anyone with access to the Model 336 front panel.
Contact Us: provides information regarding how to contact representatives of
Lake Shore Cryotronics, Inc.
The utilities embedded on the Model 336 are written using the Java™ programming language. This theoretically allows the applications to run properly on many different platforms (Windows®, Mac®, Linux™, etc.), although the applications are only supported on Microsoft Windows® XP or Windows 7 and Vista®, and have been designed to work with the Java™ Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6. To download Java ™
JRE please visit www.java.com.
Please note that without the proper JRE installed the utilities will not run properly.
The applications are launched from the Utilities web page using Java™ Web Start technology. This allows the application to run outside of the web browser in a standalone window. The application can only be launched using the link in the embedded web page, and cannot be permanently installed. When launching the application, multiple security warning messages may appear. These messages are meant to protect youfrom malicious software that can cause harm to, or compromise the security of, your computer or your data. The applications have been thoroughly tested and are considered by Lake Shore to be safe.
All software is imperfect and any software may be used by a malicious user for malicious purposes.
The Embedded Curve Handler™ utility is provided for uploading temperature curve files to the Model 336. The utility is also capable of reading curves from the
Model 336 and writing them to a file for storage, or manipulation in a third party program. The Embedded Curve Handler™ supports standard Lake Shore temperature curve files in the “.340” file format, and the Microsoft Excel® ".XLS" (Excel® 97 - 2003) file format. Curve files are provided with calibrated sensors purchased from
Lake Shore in the “.340” file format.
To read a temperature curve from a file:
click
Read from File
. Select a properly formatted temperature curve (*.340 or *.XLS) file using the Open Browser dialog box. The curve will be loaded into the program and the curve points and graph will be displayed.
To read a temperature curve from the Model 336:
click
Read from Instrument
. The
Read Curve from Instrument dialog box appears. Select a curve from the drop-down box and click
OK
. The curve will be loaded into the program and the curve points and graph will be displayed.
Once a curve is loaded into the Embedded Curve Handler™ using either the Read from File or Read from Instrument buttons, the loaded curve can be stored either to a user curve location (21 to 59) in the Model 336, or to a file.
| www.lakeshore.com
118
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
To store the curve to a user curve location in the Model 336:
click
Write to Instrument.
The Write Curve to Instrument dialog box appears. Select a user curve location to write the loaded temperature curve to, and click
OK
.
To write the currently loaded curve to a file:
click
Write to File
. A Save Browser dialog box appears. First use the Files of Type drop-down box to select the file format in which to save the curve. Then choose a directory and a file name, and click
Save
.
The .340 file format is an ASCII text file which can be read and altered using a standard ASCII text editor. Care must be taken when altering the .340 text files to ensure that all of the values are stored in the same position in the file as the original values, using the same number of digits. To alter curve files, it is recommended to use the .XLS file format, which can be altered using Microsoft Excel®. If using formulas to alter curves, you must copy the results of the formulas and paste them back into the original cells of the breakpoint values. The Embedded Curve Handler™ cannot interpret formulas in cells. In most versions of Excel®, this can be done by copying the formula results, then pasting them in the appropriate cells using the
Paste Special
command, and selecting
Paste Values
. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft Excel® documentation for details on the Paste Special operation.
The Embedded Curve Handler™ cannot read files in the Microsoft Excel® ".XLSX" (Excel®
2007 or newer) format. When saving files from Excel®, be sure to save them in the ".XLS"
(Excel® 97 - 2003) format so that the file can be read using the
Embedded Curve Handler™ utility.
6.5.2 Ethernet
Firmware Updater
FIGURE 6-9
Screen shot of the Curve Handler
The Ethernet Firmware Updater utility provides a means of updating the firmware that controls the Ethernet functionality of the Model 336. It also updates the embedded website and the Java™ utilities found on the Utilities web page. Please visit www.lakeshore.com for the latest firmware updates.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 6-10
Screenshot of the Ethernet Firmware
Updater
This utility only updates the Ethernet firmware and not the instrument firmware.
Another utility is provided at the Lake Shore website (www.lakeshore .com) for updating the instrument firmware.
6.5.3 Instrument
Configuration Backup
Utility
6.5.3 Instrument Configuration Backup Utility 119
To use the Ethernet Firmware Updater utility:
first ensure that your Java™ Runtime
Environment is at version 1.6.0 or higher and then use this procedure to download the Ethernet firmware Updater utility.
1. Download the latest Model 336 Ethernet Firmware file from www.lakeshore.com.
2. Once the firmware files have been downloaded, connect to the embedded web-
site (section 6.4.4), and navigate to the
Utilities
page.
3. Click
Launch Ethernet Firmware Updater
.
4. Accept any security warning messages that are presented (refer to section 6.5 for
an explanation of these security warnings). The Ethernet Firmware Updater application window should now be open.
5. Click
Upload New Ethernet Firmware
, and a file browser window will open.
6. Navigate to the directory where the Model 336 Ethernet firmware is stored.
Select the file and click
Open
.
At this point the application should check to see if the firmware you are attempting to update to is newer than what is already installed on the Model 336. If it is, then the firmware should immediately begin uploading, and the progress of the firmware update operation should be displayed using the two progress bars in the application window.
The instrument configuration backup utility provides the means to export the current configuration of the Model 336 to a file, or to import a saved configuration from a file to the Model 336. The utility is useful in situations where the instrument is shared with users who require different configurations, or when the instrument is often moved between systems requiring different configurations. All instrument configuration settings are exported or imported by the utility except for the setpoint and heater range, network settings, and web login settings. These settings are ignored to prevent the outputs from unintentionally turning on and to prevent interrupting communication with the instrument.
To export the current configuration of the Model 336 to a file:
1. On the
Utilities
page in the Model 336 embedded website, click
Export config
(
.
2. In the Save File dialog box, select the location and file name to which you want to export the current instrument configuration. Click
Save
.
The utility will export the current configuration from the Model 336 and save it to the specified file.
To import a saved configuration from a file to the Model 336:
1. On the
Utilities
page in the Model 336 embedded website, click
Import config
(
.
2. In the Save File dialog box, select the file name from which you want to import the saved instrument configuration settings. Click
Open
.
3. Click
Yes, import settings
in the confirmation box that appears.
The utility will read the configuration from the specified file and import it to the
Model 336.
| www.lakeshore.com
120
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
6.5.4 Embedded Chart
Recorder
The embedded chart recorder utility is provided to allow users to easily acquire and chart data from the Model 336. The chart recorder utility can simultaneously chart and log any combination of sensor readings, control setpoints, and heater output data from the Model 336. A basic user interface is also provided for changing control parameters on the fly while acquiring data, allowing many basic experiments to be performed without ever having to write any custom software. Log files are stored in the Microsoft Excel® .xls format for easy data manipulation. Free utilities are available online for converting .xls files to comma separated plain text files (.csv) if Microsoft Excel is not available.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 6-11
Embedded chart recorder interface
6.5.4.1 Configuration Panel
The configuration panel is located to the right of the chart and consists of items 12 through 17 in the screenshot above. It is used to configure the charting and logging functionality for the next data acquisition task. When
Start
is pressed, the parameters in the configuration panel are used to determine:
D
Sample period (13)
: the rate at which to acquire readings from the instrument in milli-seconds.
D
Number of data points to log (14)
: the number of data points to log if logging to a file.
D
Log file (15):
the path of the file to use for logging data, if logging to a file.
D
Chart only (16)
: if selected, acquired data is only charted, and is not logged to a file.
D
Readings (17)
: the readings, and units (where applicable) to take during data acquisition.
The configuration panel can be collapsed to increase the size of the chart. To collapse the configuration panel, simply click on
Collapse configuration panel
(12). When collapsed, the same button becomes an
Expand Configuration Panel
button that can be used to restore the configuration panel on the form. When data acquisition is in progress, the configuration panel controls are disabled, but the current settings can still be seen.
6.5.4 Embedded Chart Recorder 121
6.5.4.2 Starting Data Acquisition
Once the parameters in the configuration panel are set as desired, simply click
Start
to begin data acquisition. If you are logging data to a file, the Number of Data Points to Log parameter is used to determine how many data points to take before terminating data acquisition. However, once data acquisition has begun, the
Start
button becomes a
Stop
button, and data acquisition can be terminated by pressing
Stop
button. If you are not logging to a file, data acquisition will continue until you press
Stop
.
6.5.4.3 Chart Functionality
By default, the chart (6), will autoscale in both the x and y-axis. The time scale slider
(7) is provided to adjust the time scale window (x-axis scaling). When less than one hour of data has been logged, the slider will allow a time window between 1 and 60 min, in increments of 1 min. As the total elapsed time increases, the values on the time scale slider will also increase to allow time windows proportional to the elapsed time. A y-axis is added for each unique measurement unit of the selected readings.
Each y-axis will be autoscaled, so if more than one reading is being taken in the same unit, the scale for the associated axis will be set such that the largest values of all readings are at the extremes. Data that is charted on the same axis, but that is far apart in magnitude, will result in low resolution for each data series.
Manual zooming of the chart can be achieved either by using the mouse wheel, or by clicking and dragging a box around the area of the chart to zoom to. Manual panning can be achieved by holding the Ctrl key, then clicking and dragging the chart. After manually zooming or panning, autoscaling in both axes is turned off and
Reset Zoom/
Pan
becomes active. To return to autoscale mode, click
Reset Zoom/Pan
.
A screenshot of the currently displayed chart can be copied to the clipboard, saved in the PNG image format, or printed directly to a printer using the context menu that appears when right clicking on the chart. Other chart properties, such as colors and fonts can be customized through this context menu by clicking
Properties
. Note that changes to these chart properties are not saved when the application is closed, so the default values will be restored when reopening the chart recorder utility.
6.5.4.4 Utilities Panel
The utilities panel (11) provides added functionality to assist the user in various common tasks associated with user applications. Three tabs provide a means of selecting between the three utili-ties.
Command Line:
provides command line access for sending commands and queries to the instrument. To send a command or query, type the command or query into the
Command text box and click
Send
. Query responses are displayed in the Response box below. Click
Command Summary
to pull up the list of command line commands and queries supported by the instrument.
Notes:
provides a means of adding notes to the log file while logging data. The note will be added to the notes column of the log file at the row associated with the most recently acquired data point. To add a note, simply add text to the text box next to the
Save Note
button, then click
Save Note
. Notes will be appended to the note history text box, along with a time stamp. If a note is saved while not currently logging data to a file, the note will only appear in the note history text box, and will only be available while the application is running.
| www.lakeshore.com
122
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
Control:
provides easy access to the control functions of the instrument. The P, I, D,
Manual Output, Setpoint, and Heater Range settings can be configured here for each control loop on the instrument. The current configuration of the given control loop is displayed when the
Loop
radio button is selected. To update these parameters on the instrument, first select the loop to update by choosing a
Loop
radio button. Then update the values in the Control panel and click
Send
. Each control loop must be updated independently, so once the values in the Control panel are updated, click
Send
before clicking another
Loop
radio button.
The utilities panel can be collapsed to increase the size of the chart. To collapse the utilities panel, click
Collapse Utilities Panel
(10). When collapsed, the same button becomes an
Expand Utilities Panel
button that can be used to restore the utilities panel on the form.
6.5.4.5 Menu
The standard dropdown menu includes the following sections:
File (1):
D
Interface Configuration—can be used to configure the remote interface connection to the instrument.
D
Exit—closes the Chart Recorder application.
Log/Chart (2):
D
Configure Log/Chart—simply expands the configuration panel if collapsed.
D
Hide Legend—hides the legend in the chart to expand the data plot.
Help (3):
D
Getting Started—launches a web page with basic chart recorder instructions.
D
About—provides information about the application, including the software revision level.
6.5.4.6 Information
The information panel consists of the following two bits of information:
D
Datapoint (4)—the current datapoint number. If logging data, this also shows the total number of data points to be taken in the current data acquisition (i.e. 522 of
1000).
D
Log File (5)—the file path of the file that is currently being used to log data.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6 Command
Summary
6.6 Command Summary 123
This section provides a listing of the interface commands. A summary of all the com-
mands is provided in TABLE 6-6. All the commands are detailed in section 6.6.1, and
are presented in alphabetical order.
Command name
Form of the command input
Syntax of user parameter input
see key below
Definition of first parameter
Definition of second parameter
Brief description of command
INCRV
Input:
Input Curve Number Command
INCRV <input>, <curve number>[term]
Format:
a, nn
<input>
<curve number>
Specify input: A–D
Specify input curve:
0 = none, 1–20 = std curves,
21–59 = user curves
FIGURE 6-12
Sample command format
Query name
Form of the query input
Syntax of user parameter input*
see key below
Definition of returned parameter
Syntax of returned parameter
FIGURE 6-13
Sample query format
Brief description of query
INCRV?
Input:
Format:
Returned:
Format:
Input Curve Number Query
INCRV? <input>[term]
a
<input> Specify input: A–D
<curve number>[term] nn
| www.lakeshore.com
124
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
CRVDEL
CRVHDR
CRVHDR?
CRVPT
CRVPT?
DFLT
DIOCUR
DIOCUR?
DISPFLD
DISPFLD?
DISPLAY
DISPLAY?
FILTER
FILTER?
HTR?
HTRSET
HTRSET?
HTRST?
IEEE
IEEE?
INCRV
INCRV?
INNAME
Command
CLS
ESE
ESE?
ESR?
IDN?
OPC
OPC?
RST
SRE
SRE?
STB?
TST?
WAI
ALARM
ALARM?
ALARMST?
ALMRST
ANALOG
ANALOG?
AOUT?
ATUNE
BRIGT
BRIGT?
Function
Clear Interface Cmd
Event Status Enable Register Cmd
Event Status Enable Register Query
Standard Event Status Register Query
Identification Query
Operation Complete Cmd
Operation Complete Query
Reset Instrument Cmd
Service Request Enable Register Cmd
Service Request Enable Register Query
Status Byte Query
Self-Test Query
Wait-to-Continue Cmd
Input Alarm Parameter Cmd
Input Alarm Parameter Query
Input Alarm Status Query
Reset Alarm Status Cmd
Monitor Out Parameter Cmd
Monitor Out Parameter Query
Analog Output Data Query
Autotune Cmd
Display Contrast Cmd
Display Contrast Query
Curve Delete Cmd
Curve Header Cmd
Curve Header Query
Curve Data Point Cmd
Curve Data Point Query
Factory Defaults Cmd
Diode Excitation Current Parameter Cmd
Diode Excitation Current Parameter Query
Custom ModeDisplay Field Cmd
Custom Mode Display Field Query
Display Setup Cmd
Display Setup Query
Input Filter Parameter Cmd
Input Filter Parameter Query
Heater Output Query
Heater Setup Cmd
Heater Setup Query
Heater Status Query
IEEE-488 Parameter Cmd
IEEE-488 Interface Parameter Query
Input Curve Number Cmd
Input Curve Number Query
Sensor Input Name Cmd
Page
TABLE 6-6
Command summary
MOUT?
NET
NET?
NETID?
OUTMODE
OUTMODE?
PID
PID?
RAMP
RAMP?
RAMPST?
RANGE
RANGE?
RDGST?
RELAY
RELAY?
Command
INNAME?
INTSEL
INTSEL?
INTYPE
INTYPE?
KRDG?
LEDS
LEDS?
LOCK
LOCK?
MDAT?
MNMXRST
MODE
MODE?
MOUT
RELAYST?
SCAL
SETP
SETP?
SRDG?
TEMP?
TLIMIT
TLIMIT?
TUNEST?
WARMUP
WARMUP?
WEBLOG
WEBLOG?
ZONE
ZONE?
Function
Sensor Input Name Query
Interface Select Cmd
Interface Select Query
Input Type Parameter Cmd
Input Type Parameter Query
Kelvin Reading Query
Front Panel LEDS Cmd
Front Panel LEDS Query
Front Panel Keyboard Lock Cmd
Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query
Minimum/Maximum Data Query
Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Cmd
Remote Interface Mode Cmd
Remote Interface Mode Query
Manual Output Cmd
Output Manual Heater Power (MHP) Output Query
Network Settings Cmd
Network Settings Query
Network Configuration Query
Output Mode Command
Output Mode Query
Control Loop PID Values Cmd
Control Loop PID Values Query
Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Cmd
Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Query
Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query
Heater Range Cmd
Heater Range Query
Input Reading Status Query
Relay Control Parameter Cmd
Relay Control Parameter Query
Page
Relay Status Query
Generate SoftCal Curve Cmd
Control Setpoint Cmd
Control Setpoint Query
Sensor Units Input Reading Query
Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query
Temperature Limit Cmd
Temperature Limit Query
Control Tuning Status Query
Warmup Supply Parameter Cmd
Warmup Supply Parameter Query
Website Login Parameters
Website Login Parameter Query
Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Cmd
Output Zone Table Parameter Query
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 125
6.6.1 Interface
Commands
This section lists the interface commands in alphabetical order.
?
s[n]
Begins common interface command
Required to identify queries
String of alphanumeric characters with length “n.” Send these strings using surrounding quotes. Quotes enable characters such as commas and spaces to be used without the instrument interpreting them as delimiters.
nn… dd
String of number characters that may include a decimal point.
Dotted decimal format, common with IP addresses. Always contains 4 dot separated 3-digit decimal numbers, such as 192.168.000.012.
[term]
Terminator characters
<…>
Indicated a parameter field, many are command specific.
<state>
Parameter field with only On/Off or Enable/Disable states.
<value>
Floating point values have varying resolution depending on the type of command or query issued.
TABLE 6-7
Interface commands key
CLS Clear Interface Command
Input
CLS[term]
Remarks
Clears the bits in the Status Byte Register, Standard Event Status Register, and Operation Event Register, and terminates all pending operations. Clears the interface, but not the controller. The related controller command is *RST.
ESE
Event Status Enable Register Command
Input
ESE <bit weighting>[term]
Format
Remarks
Example
nnn
Each bit is assigned a bit weighting and represents the enable/disable mask of the corresponding event flag bit in the Standard Event Status Register. To enable an event flag bit, send the command
ESE with the sum of the bit weighting for each desired
bit. Refer to section 6.2.5 for a list of event flags.
To enable event flags 0, 4, and 7, send the command *ESE 145[term]. 145 is the sum of the bit weighting for each bit.
Bit Bit Weighting Event Name
4
5
0
2
7
Total:
1
4
16
32
128
181
OPC
QXE
EXE
CME
PON
ESE?
Event Status Enable Register Query
Input
ESE?[term]
Returned
Format
<bit weighting>[term]
nnn (Refer to section 6.2.5 for a list of event flags)
ESR?
Standard Event Status Register Query
Input
ESR?[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
<bit weighting> nnn
The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the event flag bits in
the Standard Event Status Register. Refer to section 6.2.5 for a list of event flags.
| www.lakeshore.com
126
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
IDN?
Identification Query
Input
IDN?[term]
Returned
Format
Example
<manufacturer>,<model>,<instrument serial>/<option serial>,
<firmware version>[term] s[4],s[8],s[7]/s[7],n.n
<manufacturer>
<model>
Manufacturer ID
Instrument model number
<instrument serial> Instrument serial number
<option card serial> Option card serial number
<firmware version> Instrument firmware version
LSCI,MODEL336,1234567/1234567,1.0
OPC Operation Complete Command
Input
OPC[term]
Remarks
Generates an Operation Complete event in the Event Status Register upon completion of all pending selected device operations. Send it as the last command in a command string.
OPC?
Operation Complete Query
OPC?[term]
Returned
Remarks
1[term]
Places a 1 in the controller output queue upon completion of all pending selected device operations. Send as the last command in a command string.
Not the same as
OPC.
RST Reset Instrument Command
Input
RST[term]
Remarks
Sets controller parameters to power-up settings.
SRE Service Request Enable Register Command
Input
SRE <bit weighting>[term]
Format
Remarks
Example
nnn
Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable/disable mask of the corresponding status flag bit in the Status Byte Register. To enable a status flag bit, send the command *SRE with the sum of the bit weighting for each desired bit. Refer to
section 6.2.6 for a list of status flags.
To enable status flags 4, 5, and 7, send the command *SRE 208[term]. 208 is the sum of the bit weighting for each bit.
Bit
4
5
7
Total:
Bit Weighting
16
64
128
208
Event Name
MAV
ESB
OSB
SRE?
Service Request Enable Register Query
Input
SRE?[term]
Returned
Format
<bit weighting>[term]
nnn (Refer to section 6.2.6 for a list of status flags)
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 127
STB?
Status Byte Query
Input
STB?[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
<bit weighting>[term] nnn
Acts like a serial poll, but does not reset the register to all zeros. The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the status flag bits that are set in the Status
Byte Register. Refer to section 6.2.6 for a list of status flags.
TST?
Self-Test Query
Input
TST?[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
<status>[term] n
<status> 0 = no errors found, 1 = errors found
The Model 336 reports status based on test done at power up.
WAI Wait-to-Continue Command
Input
WAI[term]
Remarks
Causes the IEEE-488 interface to hold off until all pending operations have been completed. This is the same function as the *OPC command, except that it does not set the
Operation Complete event bit in the Event Status Register.
ALARM Input Alarm Parameter Command
Input
ALARM <input>,<off/on>,<high value>,<low value>,
<deadband>,<latch enable>,
Format
Remarks
Example
<audible>,<visible> [term]
a,n, ±nnnnnn, ±nnnnnn, +nnnnnn,n,n,n
<input> Specifies which input to configure: A - D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<off/on> Determines whether the instrument checks the alarm for this input, where 0 = off and 1 = on.
<high setpoint> Sets the value the source is checked against to activate the high alarm.
<low setpoint> Sets the value the source is checked against to activate low alarm.
<deadband> Sets the value that the source must change outside of an alarm condition to deactivate an unlatched alarm.
<latch enable> Specifies a latched alarm (remains active after alarm condition correction) where 0 = off (no latch) and 1 = on.
<audible>
<visible>
Specifies if the internal speaker will beep when an alarm condition occurs. Valid entries: 0 = off, 1 = on.
Specifies if the Alarm LED on the instrument front panel will blink when an alarm condition occurs.
Valid entries: 0 = off, 1 = on
Configures the alarm parameters for an input.
ALARM A,0[term]—turns off alarm checking for Input A.
ALARM B,1,270.0,0,0,1,1,1[term]—turns on alarm checking for input B, activates high alarm if kelvin reading is over 270, and latches the alarm when kelvin reading falls below 270. Alarm condition will cause instrument to beep and the front panel
Alarm LED to blink.
| www.lakeshore.com
128
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
ALARM?
Input Alarm Parameter Query
Input
Format
ALARM? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> A–D
<off/on>,<high value>,<low value>,<deadband>,<latch enable>,<audible>,<visible>
[term] n,±nnnnnn,±nnnnnn,+nnnnnn,n,n,n (refer to command for description)
ALARMST?
Input Alarm Status Query
Input
Format
ALARMST? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> A - D (D1–D5 for 3062 option)
<high state>,<low state>[term] n,n
<high state> 0 = Off, 1 = On
<low state> 0 = Off, 1 = On
ALMRST Reset Alarm Status Command
Input
Remarks
ALMRST[term]
Clears both the high and low status of all alarms, including latching alarms.
ANALOG Monitor Out Parameter Command
Input
ANALOG <output>,<input>,<units>,
Format
Example
Remarks
<high value>,<low value>,<polarity>[term]
n,n,n,±nnnnn,±nnnnn,n
<output> Unpowered analog output to configure: 3 or 4
<input> Specifies which input to monitor. 0 = none, 1 = Input A, 2 =Input B,
3 = Input C, 4 = Input D (5 = Input D2, 6 = Input D3, 7 = Input D4, 8 = Input
D5 for 3062 option)
<units> Specifies the units on which to base the output voltage: 1 = kelvin, 2 =
Celsius, 3 = sensor units
<high value> If output mode is Monitor Out, this parameter represents the data at which the Monitor Out reaches +100% output.Entered in the units designated by the <units> parmeter. Refer to OUTMODE command.
<low value> If output mode is Monitor Out, this parameter represents the data at which the analog output reaches -100% output if bipolar, or 0% output if positive only. Entered in the units designated by the <units> parmeter.
<polarity> Specifies output voltage is 0 = unipolar (positive output only) or
1 = bipolar (positive or negative output)
ANALOG 4,1,1,100.0,0.0,0[term]
—sets output 4 to monitor Input A kelvin reading with 100.0 K at +100% output (+10.0 V) and 0.0 K at 0% output (0.0 V).
Use the OUTMODE command to set the output mode to Monitor Out. The <input> parameter in the ANALOG command is the same as the <input> parameter in the OUT-
MODE command. It is included in the ANALOG command for backward compatibility with previous Lake Shore temperature monitors and controllers. The ANALOG command name is also named as such for backward compatibility.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 129
ANALOG?
Monitor Out Parameter Query
Input
Format
ANALOG? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which unpowered analog output to query the Monitor Out parameters for: 3 or 4.
<input>,<units>,<high value>,<low value>,<polarity>[term] n,n,±nnnnn,±nnnnn,n (refer to command for definition)
AOUT?
Analog Output Data Query
Input
Format
AOUT? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
n
<output> Specifies which unpowered analog output to query: 3 or 4.
<output percentage>[term]
±nnn.n
Returns the output percentage of the unpowered analog output.
ATUNE Autotune Command
Input
Format
ATUNE <output>,<mode>,[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n
<output> Specifies the output associated with the loop to be Autotuned: 1 – 4.
<mode> Specifies the Autotune mode. Valid entries: 0 = P Only, 1 = P and I,
2 = P, I, and D.
ATUNE 2,1 [term]
—initiates Autotuning of control loop associated with output 2, in
P and I mode.
If initial conditions required to Autotune the specified loop are not met, an Autotune initialization error will occur and the Autotune process will not be performed. The
TUNEST? query can be used to check if an Autotune error occurred.
BRIGT Display Contrast Command
Input
Format
BRIGT <contrast value>[term]
Remarks
nn
<contrast value> 1–32
Sets the display contrast for the front panel LCD.
BRIGT?
Display Contrast Query
Input
Returned
Format
BRIGT?[term]
<contrast value>[term] nn (refer to command for description)
CRDG?
Celsius Reading Query
Input
Format
CRDG? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option)
<temp value>[term]
±nnnnnn
Also see the RDGST? command.
| www.lakeshore.com
130
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
CRVDEL Curve Delete Command
Input
Format
CRVDEL <curve>[term]
Example
nn
<curve> Specifies a user curve to delete. Valid entries: 21–59.
CRVDEL 21[term]
—deletes User Curve 21.
CRVHDR Curve Header Command
Input
CRVHDR <curve>,<name>,<SN>,<format>,<limit value>,<coeffi-
Format
Remarks
Example cient>[term]
nn,s[15],s[10],n,+nnn.nnn,n
<curve> Specifies which curve to configure. Valid entries: 21–59.
<name>
<SN>
Specifies curve name. Limited to 15 characters.
Specifies the curve serial number. Limited to 10 characters.
<format> Specifies the curve data format. Valid entries: 1 = mV/K, 2 = V/K,
3 =
)
/K, 4 = log
)
/K.
<limit value> Specifies the curve temperature limit in kelvin.
<coefficient> Specifies the curves temperature coefficient. Valid entries:
1 = negative, 2 = positive.
Configures the user curve header. The coefficient parameter will be calculated automatically based on the first 2 curve datapoints. It is included as a parameter for compatability with the CRVHDR? query.
CRVHDR 21,DT-470,00011134,2,325.0,1[term]
—configures User Curve 21 with a name of DT-470, serial number of 00011134, data format of volts versus kelvin, upper temperature limit of 325 K, and negative coefficient.
CRVHDR?
Curve Header Query
Input
Format
CRVHDR? <curve>[term]
Returned
Format
nn
<curve> Valid entries: 1–59.
<name>,<SN>,<format>,<limit value>,<coefficient>[term] s[15],s[10],n,+nnn.nnn,n (refer to command for description)
CRVPT Curve Data Point Command
Input
Format
CRVPT <curve>,<index>,<units value>,<temp value>[term]
Remarks
Example
nn,nnn,±nnnnnn,+nnnnnn
<curve> Specifies which curve to configure. Valid entries: 21–59.
<index> Specifies the points index in the curve. Valid entries: 1–200.
<units value>Specifies sensor units for this point to 6 digits.
<temp value>Specifies the corresponding temperature in kelvin for this point to 6 digits.
Configures a user curve data point.
CRVPT 21,2,0.10191,470.000,N[term]
—sets User Curve 21 second data point to
0.10191 sensor units and 470.000 K.
CRVPT?
Curve Data Point Query
Input
Format
CRVPT? <curve>,<index>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
nn,nnn
<curve>
<index>
Specifies which curve to query: 1–59.
Specifies the points index in the curve: 1–200.
<units value>,<temp value>[term]
±nnnnnn,+nnnnnn (refer to command for description)
Returns a standard or user curve data point.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 131
DFLT Factory Defaults Command
Input
Remarks
DFLT 99[term]
Sets all configuration values to factory defaults and resets the instrument. The “99” is included to prevent accidentally setting the unit to defaults.
DIOCUR Diode Excitation Current Parameter Command
Input
Format
DIOCUR <input>,<excitation>[term]
Remarks
a,n
<input> Specifies which input to configure: A–D.
<excitation > Specifies the Diode excitation current: 0 = 10 µA, 1 = 1 mA.
The 10 µA excitation current is the only calibrated excitation current, and is used in almost all applications. Therefore the Model 336 will default the 10 µA current setting any time the input sensor type is changed in order to prevent an accidental change. If using a current that is not 10 µA, the input sensor type must first be configured to Diode (INTYPE command). If the sensor type is not set to Diode when the
DIOCUR command is sent, the command will be ignored.
DIOCUR?
Diode Excitation Current Parameter Query
Input
Format
DIOCUR? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> A–D
<excitation> [term] n (refer to command for description)
DISPFLD Custom Mode Display Field Command
Input
Format
DISPFLD <field>,<input>,<units>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n,n
<field>
<input>
Specifies field (display location) to configure: 1–8.
Specifies item to display in the field: 0 = None, 1 = Input A,
2 = Input B, 3 = Input C, 4 = Input D (5 = Input D2, 6 = Input D3, 7 = Input
D4, 8 = Input D5 for 3062 option)
<units> Valid entries: 1 = kelvin, 2 = Celsius, 3 = sensor units,
4 = minimum data, and 5 = maximum data.
DISPFLD 2,1,1[term]
—displays kelvin reading for Input A in display field 2 when display mode is set to Custom.
This command only applies to the readings displayed in the Custom display mode. All other display modes have predefined readings in predefined locations, and will use the Preferred Units parameter to determine which units to display for each sensor
input. Refer to section 4.3 for details on display setup
DISPFLD?
Custom Mode Display Field Query
Input
Format
DISPFLD? <field>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<field> Specifies field (display location) to query: 1–8.
<input>,<units>[term] n,n (refer to command for description)
| www.lakeshore.com
132
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
DISPLAY Display Setup Command
Input
Format
DISPLAY <mode>,<num fields>,<output source>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n,n
<mode> Specifies display mode: 0 = Input A, 1 = Input B, 2 = Input C,
3 = Input D, 4 = Custom, 5 = Four Loop, 6 = All Inputs (7 = Input
D2, 8 = Input D3, 9 = Input D4, 10 = Input D5 for 3062 option)
<num fields> When mode is set to Custom, specifies number of fields (display locations) to display: 0 = 2 large, 1 = 4 large, 2 = 8 small.
When mode is set to All Inputs, specifies size of readings: 0 = small with input names, 1 = large without input names
<displayed output> Specifies which output, and associated loop information, to display in the bottom half of the custom display screen:
1 = Output 1, 2 = Output 2, 3 = Output 3, 4 = Output 4
DISPLAY 4,0,1[term]
—set display mode to Custom with 2 large display fields, and set custom output display source to Output 1.
The <num fields> and <displayed output> commands are ignored in all display modes except for Custom.
DISPLAY?
Display Setup Query
Input
Returned
Format
DISPLAY?[term]
<mode>,<num fields>,<output source>[term] n,n,n (refer to command for description)
FILTER Input Filter Parameter Command
Input
Format
FILTER <input>,<off/on>,<points>,<window>[term]
Example
a,n,nn,nn
<input>
<off/on>
<points>
Specifies input to configure: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
Specifies whether the filter function is 0 = Off or 1 = On.
Specifies how many data points the filtering function uses.
Valid range = 2 to 64.
<window> Specifies what percent of full scale reading limits the filtering function.
Reading changes greater than this percentage reset the filter. Valid range = 1 to 10%.
FILTER B,1,10,2[term]
—filter input B data through 10 readings with 2% of full scale window.
FILTER?
Input Filter Parameter Query
Input
Format
FILTER? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> Specifies input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<off/on >,<points>,<window>[term] n,nn,nn (refer to command for description)
HTR?
Heater Output Query
Input
Format
HTR? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
n
<output> Heater output to query: 1 = Output 1, 2 = Output 2
<heater value>[term]
+nnn.n
<heater value>Heater output in percent (%).
HTR? is for the Heater Outputs, 1 and 2, only. Use AOUT? for Outputs 3 and 4.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 133
HTRSET Heater Setup Command
Input
HTRSET <output>,<heater resistance>,<max current>,<max user
Format
Example
Remarks current>,<current/power>[term]
n,n,n,+n.nnn,n
<output>
<htr resistance>
<max current>
<max user current>
<current/power>
Specifies which heater output to configure: 1 or 2.
Heater Resistance Setting: 1 = 25
)
, 2 = 50
)
.
Specifies the maximum heater output current:
0 = User Specified, 1 = 0.707 A, 2 = 1 A, 3 = 1.141 A, 4 = 2 A
Specifies the maximum heater output current if max current is set to User Specified.
Specifies whether the heater output displays in current or power. Valid entries: 1 = current, 2 = power.
HTRSET 1,1,2,0,1[term]
—Heater output 1 will use the 25
)
heater setting, has a maximum current of 1 A, the maximum user current is set to 0 A because it is not going to be used since a discrete value has been chosen, and the heater output will be displayed in units of current.
Max current will be limited to 1.414 A on output 2 if the heater resistance is set to
25
)
, and will be limited to 1 A on both outputs 1 and 2 if the heater resistance is set to 50
)
.
HTRSET?
Heater Setup Query
Input
Format
HTRSET? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which heater output to query: 1 or 2.
<htr resistance>,<max current>,<max user current>,<current/power>[term] n,n,+n.nnn,n
HTRST?
Heater Status Query
Input
Format
HTRST? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
n
<output>
<error code>[term] n
Specifies which heater output to query: 1 or 2.
<error code> Heater error code: 0 = no error, 1 = heater open load, 2 = heater short.
Error condition is cleared upon querying the heater status, which will also clear the front panel error message
IEEE IEEE-488 Interface Parameter Command
Input
Format
IEEE <address>[term]
Example
nn
<address> Specifies the IEEE address: 1–30. (Address 0 and 31 are reserved.)
IEEE 4[term]
—after receipt of the current terminator, the instrument responds to address 4.
IEEE?
IEEE-488 Interface Parameter Query
Input
Returned
Format
IEEE?[term]
<address>[term] nn (refer to command for description)
| www.lakeshore.com
134
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
INCRV Input Curve Number Command
Input
Format
INCRV <input>,<curve number>[term]
Remarks
Example
a,nn
<input> Specifies which input to configure: A –D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<curve number> Specifies which curve the input uses. If specified curve type does not match the configured input type, the curve number defaults to 0. Valid entries: 0 = none, 1–20 = standard curves, 21–59 = user curves.
Specifies the curve an input uses for temperature conversion.
INCRV A,23[term]
—Input A uses User Curve 23 for temperature conversion.
INCRV?
Input Curve Number Query
Input
Format
INCRV? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> Specifies which input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<curve number>[term] nn (refer to command for description)
INNAME Sensor Input Name Command
Input
Format
INNAME <input>,<name>[term]
Example
Remarks
a,s[15]
<input>
<name>
Specifies input to configure: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
Specifies the name to associate with the sensor input.
INNAME A, “Sample Space”[term]
—the string “Sample Space” will appear on the front panel display when possible to identify the sensor information being displayed.
Be sure to use quotes when sending strings, otherwise characters such as spaces, and other non alpha-numeric characters, will be interpreted as a delimiter and the full string will not be accepted. It is not recommended to use commas or semi-colons in sensor input names as these characters are used as delimiters for query responses.
INNAME?
Sensor Input Name Query
Input
Format
INNAME? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> Specifies input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<name>[term] s[15] (refer to command for description)
INTSEL Interface Select Command
Input
Format
INTSEL <interface>[term]
Remarks
n
<interface> Specifies the remote interface to enable: 0 = USB, 1 = Ethernet,
2 = IEEE-488.
The Ethernet interface will attempt to configure itself based on the current configuration parameters, which can be set using the NET command. Configuring the Ethernet interface parameters prior to enabling the interface is recommended.
INTSEL?
Interface Select Query
Input
Returned
Format
INTSEL?[term]
<interface>[term] n (refer to command for description)
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 135
INTYPE Input Type Parameter Command
Input
INTYPE <input>,<sensor type>,<autorange>,<range>,<compensa-
Format tion>,<units> [term]
a,n,n,n,n,n
<input> Specifies input to configure: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option)
<sensor type> Specifies input sensor type:
0 = Disabled
1 = Diode (3062 option only)
<autorange>
<range>
2 = Platinum RTD
3 = NTC RTD
4 = Thermocouple (3060 option only)
5 = Capacitance (3061 option only)
Specifies autoranging: 0 = off and 1 = on.
Specifies input range when autorange is off:
Diode (3062 option only)
PTC RTD
NTC RTD
0 = 2.5 V
1 = 10 V
0 = 10
)
1 = 30
)
2 = 100
)
3 = 300
)
4 = 1 k
)
5 = 3 k
)
6 = 10 k
)
0 = 10
)
1 = 30
)
2 = 100
)
3 = 300
)
4 = 1 k
)
5 = 3 k
)
6 = 10 k
)
7 = 30 k
)
8 = 100 k
)
Thermocouple 0 = 50 mV
Example
Remarks
TABLE 6-8
Input range
<compensation> Specifies input compensation where 0 = off and 1 = on. Reversal for thermal EMF compensation if input is resistive, room compensation if input is thermocouple. Always 0 if input is a diode (3062 option only).
<units> Specifies the preferred units parameter for sensor readings and for the control setpoint: 1 = kelvin, 2 = Celsius, 3 = Sensor
INTYPE A,2,1,0,1,1[term]
—sets Input A sensor type to Platinum RTD, autorange on, thermal compensation on, and preferred units to kelvin.
The <autorange> and <range> parameters do not apply to Thermocouple sensor type, and the <autorange> and <compensation> parameters do not apply to Diode sensor type. When configuring diode or thermocouple sensor types, these parameters must be included, but are ignored. A setting of 0 for each is recommended in this case.
INTYPE?
Input Type Parameter Query
Input
Format
INTYPE? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> Specifies input to query: A - D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<sensor type>,<autorange>,<range>,<compensation>,<units> [term] n,n,n,n,n (refer to command for description)
If autorange is on, the returned range parameter is the currently auto-selected range.
| www.lakeshore.com
136
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
KRDG?
Kelvin Reading Query
Input
Format
KRDG? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> option).
<kelvin value>[term]
Specifies which input to query: A - D (D1–D5 for 3062
±nnnnnn
Also see the RDGST? command.
LEDS Front Panel LEDS Command
Input
Format
LEDS <off/on>[term]
Remarks
Example
n
<off/on> 0 = LEDs Off, 1 = LEDs On
If set to 0, front panel LEDs will not be functional. Function can be used when display brightness is a problem.
LED 0[term]
—turns all front panel LED functionality off.
LEDS?
Front Panel LEDS Query
Input
Returned
Format
LEDS?[term]
<off/on> [term] n (refer to command for description)
LOCK Front Panel Keyboard Lock Command
Input
Format
LOCK <state>,<code>[term]
Remarks
Example
n,nnn
<state>
<code>
0 = Unlocked, 1 = Locked
Specifies lock-out code. Valid entries are 000 –999.
Locks out all front panel entries except pressing the
All Off
key to immediately turn
off all heater outputs. Refer to section 4.7.
LOCK 1,123[term]
—enables keypad lock and sets the code to 123.
LOCK?
Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query
Input
Returned
Format
LOCK?[term]
<state>,<code>[term] n,nnn (refer to command for description)
MDAT?
Minimum/Maximum Data Query
Input
Format
MDAT? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> Specifies which input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<min value>,<max value>[term]
±nnnnnn,±nnnnnn
Returns the minimum and maximum input data. Also see the RDGST? command.
MNMXRST Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Command
Input
Remarks
MNMXRST[term]
Resets the minimum and maximum data for all inputs.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 137
MODE Remote Interface Mode Command
Input
Format
MODE <mode>[term]
Example
n
<mode> 0 = local, 1 = remote, 2 = remote with local lockout.
MODE 2[term]
—places the Model 336 into remote mode with local lockout.
MODE?
Remote Interface Mode Query
Input
Returned
Format
MODE?[term]
<mode>[term] n (refer to command for description)
MOUT Manual Output Command
Input
Format
Example
Remarks
MOUT <output>,<value>[term]
n,
+ nnnnn[term]
<output> Specifies output to configure: 1–4.
<value> Specifies value for manual output.
MOUT 1,22.45[term]—
Output 1 manual output is 22.45%.
Manual output only applies to outputs in Closed Loop PID, Zone, or Open Loop modes.
MOUT?
Manual Output Query
Input
Format
MOUT? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output to query: 1 - 4.
<value>
+
nnnnn[term] (refer to command for description)
NET Network Settings Command
Input
NET <DHCP>,<AUTO IP>,<IP>,<Sub Mask>,<Gateway>,
<Pri DNS>,<Sec DNS>,<Pref Host>,<Pref Domain>,
Format
<Description>[term]
n,n,dd,dd,dd,dd,dd,s[15],s[64],s[32],
<DHCP> 0 = DHCP off, 1=DHCP on.
<AUTO IP> 0 = Dynamically configured link-local addressing (Auto IP) off, 1 = On
<IP>
<Sub Mask>
<Gateway>
<Pri DNS>
IP address for static configuration.
Subnet mask for static configuration.
Gateway address for static configuration.
Primary DNS address for static configuration.
<Sec DNS>
<Pref Host>
<Pref Domain>
<Description>
Secondary DNS address for static configuration.
Preferred Hostname (15 character maximum)
Preferred Domain name (64 character maximum)
Instrument description (32 character maximum)
NET?
Network Settings Query
Input
Returned
NET?[term]
Format
<DHCP>,<AUTO IP>,<IP>,<Sub Mask>,<Gateway>,<Pri DNS>,<Sec DNS>,<Pref Host>,<Pref
Domain>,<Description>[term] n,n,dd,dd,dd,dd,dd,s[15],s[64],s[32] (refer to command for description)
| www.lakeshore.com
138
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
NETID?
Network Configuration Query
Input
Returned
NETID?[term]
Format
Remarks
<lan status>,<IP>,<sub mask>,<gateway>,<pri DNS>,<sec DNS>,<mac addr>,<actual hostname>,<actual domain>[term] n,dd,dd,dd,dd,dd,hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh,s[15],s[32]
<lan status> Current status of Ethernet connection: 0 = Connected Using
Static IP, 1 = Connected Using DHCP, 2 = Connected Using
Auto IP, 3 = Address Not Acquired Error, 4 = Duplicate Initial
IP Address Error, 5 = Duplicate Ongoing IP Address Error,
6 = Cable Unplugged, 7 = Module Error, 8 = Acquiring
<IP>
<sub mask>
<gateway>
<pri DNS>
<sec DNS>
<actual hostname>
<actual domain>
<mac addr>
Address, 9 = Ethernet Disabled. Refer to section 6.4.2.1 for
details on lan status.
Configured IP address
Configured subnet mask
Configured gateway address
Configured primary DNS address
Configured secondary DNS address
Assigned hostname
Assigned domain
Module MAC address.
This query returns the configured Ethernet parameters. If the Ethernet interface is not configured then IP, subnet mask, gateway, primary DNS and secondary DNS parameters will be 0.0.0.0.
OPST?
Operational Status Query
Input
Returned
Format
Remarks
OPST? [term]
<bit weighting> [term] nnn
The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the operational sta-
tus bits. Refer to section 6.2.5.2 for a list of operational status bits.
OPSTE Operational Status Enable Command
Input
Format
Remarks
OPSTE <bit weighting> [term]
nnn
Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable/disable mask of the corresponding operational status bit in the Operational Status Register. This determines which status bits can set the corresponding summary bit in the Status Byte Register.
To enable a status bit, send the command OPSTE with the sum of the bit weighting for
each desired bit. Refer to section 6.2.5.2 for a list of operational status bits.
OPSTE?
Operational Status Enable Query
Input
Returned
Format
OPSTE?[term]
<bit weighting> [term]
nnn (Refer to section 6.2.5.2 for a list of operational status bits)
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 139
OPSTR?
Operational Status Register Query
Input
Returned
Format
Remarks
OPSTR? [term]
<bit weighting> [term] nnn
The integers returned represent the sum of the bit weighting of the operational status bits. These status bits are latched when the condition is detected. This register is
cleared when it is read. Refer to section 6.2.5.2 for a list of operational status bits.
OUTMODE Output Mode Command
Input
Format
OUTMODE <output>,<mode>,<input>,<powerup enable>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n,n,n
<output>
<mode>
<input>
Specifies which output to configure: 1–4.
Specifies the control mode. Valid entries: 0 = Off, 1 = Closed
Loop PID, 2 = Zone, 3 = Open Loop, 4 = Monitor Out,
5 = Warmup Supply
Specifies which input to use for control: 0 = None, 1 = A,
2 = B, 3 = C, 4 = D (5 = Input D2, 6 = Input D3, 7 = Input D4,
8 = Input D5 for 3062 option)
Specifies whether the output remains on or shuts off after <powerup enable> power cycle. Valid entries: 0 = powerup enable off,
1 = powerup enable on.
OUTMODE 1,2,1,0[term]
—Output 1 configured for Zone control mode, using Input A for the control input sensor, and will turn the output off when power is cycled.
Modes 4 and 5 are only valid for Analog Outputs (3 and 4).
OUTMODE?
Output Mode Query
Input
Format
OUTMODE? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output to query: 1–4.
<mode>,<input>,<powerup enable>[term] n,n,n (refer to command for description)
PID Control Loop PID Values Command
Input
Format
PID <output>,<P value>,<I value>,<D value>[term]
Remarks
Example
n,+nnnnn,+nnnnn,+nnnn
<output> Specifies which output’s control loop to configure: 1 or 2.
<P value>
<I value>
The value for output Proportional (gain): 0.1 to 1000.
The value for output Integral (reset): 0.1 to 1000.
<D value> The value for output Derivative (rate): 0 to 200.
Control settings, (P, I, D, and Setpoint) are assigned to outputs, which results in the settings being applied to any loop formed by the output and its control input.
PID 1,10,50,0[term]
—Output 1 P is 10, I is 50, and D is 0%.
| www.lakeshore.com
140
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
PID?
Control Loop PID Values Query
Input
Format
PID? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output’s control loop to query: 1 or 2.
<P value>,<I value>,<D value>[term]
+nnnnn,+nnnnn,+nnnn (refer to command for description)
RAMP Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Command
Input
Format
RAMP <output>,<off/on>,<rate value>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n,nnnn
<output>
<off/on>
<rate value>
Specifies which output’s control loop to configure: 1 or 2.
Specifies whether ramping is 0 = Off or 1 = On.
Specifies setpoint ramp rate in kelvin per minute from
0.1 to 100. The rate is always positive, but will respond to ramps up or down. A rate of 0 is interpreted as infinite, and will therefore respond as if setpoint ramping were off.
RAMP 1,1,10.5[term]
—when Output 1 setpoint is changed, ramp the current setpoint to the target setpoint at 10.5 K/minute.
Control loop settings are assigned to outputs, which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input.
RAMP?
Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Query
Input
Format
RAMP? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output’s control loop to query: 1 or 2.
<off/on>,<rate value>[term] n,nnnn (refer to command for description)
RAMPST?
Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query
Input
Format
RAMPST? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output>
<ramp status>[term] n
<ramp status>
Specifies which output’s control loop to query: 1 or 2.
0 = Not ramping, 1 = Setpoint is ramping.
RANGE Heater Range Command
Input
Format
RANGE <output>,<range>[term]
Remarks
n,n
<output>
<range>
Specifies which output to configure: 1–4.
For outputs 1 and 2: 0 = Off, 1 = Low, 2 = Medium, 3 = High
For outputs 3 and 4: 0 = Off, 1 = On
The range setting has no effect if an output is in the Off mode, and does not apply to an output in Monitor Out mode. An output in Monitor Out mode is always on.
RANGE?
Heater Range Query
Input
Format
RANGE? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output to query: 1–4.
<range>[term] n (refer to command for description)
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 141
RDGST?
Input Reading Status Query
Input
Format
RDGST? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> Specifies which input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<status bit weighting>[term] nnn
The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the input status flag bits. A “000” response indicates a valid reading is present..
Bit Bit Weighting Status Indicator
5
6
0
4
7
1
16
32
64
128 invalid reading temp underrange temp overrange sensor units zero sensor units overrange
RELAY Relay Control Parameter Command
Input
Format
RELAY <relay number>,<mode>,<input alarm>,<alarm type>[term]
Example
n,n,a,n
<relay number>
<mode>
<input alarm>
Specifies which relay to configure: 1 or 2.
Specifies relay mode. 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2 = Alarms.
Specifies which input alarm activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode: A - D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<alarm type> Specifies the input alarm type that activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode. 0 = Low alarm, 1 = High Alarm,
2 = Both Alarms.
RELAY 1,2,B,0[term]
–relay 1 activates when Input B low alarm activates.
RELAY?
Relay Control Parameter Query
Input
Format
RELAY? <relay number>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<relay number> Specifies which relay to query: 1 or 2.
<mode>,<input alarm>,<alarm type>[term] n,a,n (refer to command for description)
RELAYST?
Relay Status Query
Input
Format
RELAYST? <relay number>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<relay number>
<status>[term] n
Specifies which relay to query: 1 or 2.
0 = Off, 1 = On.
| www.lakeshore.com
142
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
SCAL Generate SoftCal Curve Command
Input
SCAL <std>,<dest>,<SN>,<T1 value>,<U1 value>,<T2 value>,<U2
Format
Remarks
Example value>,<T3 value>,<U3 value>[term]
n,nn,S[10],+nnnnnn,±nnnnnn,+nnnnnn,±nnnnnn,+nnnnnn,±nnnnnn
<std> Specifies the standard curve from which to generate a SoftCal™ curve.
Valid entries: 1, 6, 7.
<dest>
<SN>
<T1 value>
<U1 value>
<T2 value>
<U2 value>
<T3 value>
Specifies the user curve to store the SoftCal™ curve.
Valid entries: 21–59.
Specifies the curve serial number. Limited to 10 characters.
Specifies first temperature point in kelvin.
Specifies first sensor units point.
Specifies second temperature point in kelvin.
Specifies second sensor units point.
Specifies third temperature point in kelvin.
<U3 value> Specifies third sensor units point.
Generates a SoftCal™ curve. Refer to Paragraph 5.3.
SCAL 1,21,1234567890,4.2,1.6260,77.32,1.0205,300.0,0.5189[term]–generates a three-point SoftCal™ curve from standard curve 1 and saves it in user curve 21.
SETP Control Setpoint Command
Input
Format
SETP <output>,<value>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,±nnnnnn
<output>
<value>
Specifies which output’s control loop to configure: 1–4.
The value for the setpoint (in the preferred units of the control loop sensor).
SETP 1,122.5[term]
—Output 1 setpoint is now 122.5 (based on its units).
For outputs 3 and 4, setpoint is only valid in Warmup mode. Control settings, that is,
P, I, D, and Setpoint, are assigned to outputs, which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input.
SETP?
Control Setpoint Query
Input
Format
SETP? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n
<output> Specifies which output to query: 1–4.
<value>[term]
±nnnnnn (refer to command for description)
SRDG?
Sensor Units Input Reading Query
Input
Format
SRDG? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
Remarks
a
<input> Specifies which input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062 option).
<sensor units value>[term]
±nnnnnn
Also see the RDGST? command.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 143
TEMP?
Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query
Input
Returned
Format
Remarks
TEMP?[term]
<junction temperature>[term]
+nnnnn
Temperature is in kelvin. This query returns the temperature of the ceramic thermocouple block used in the room temperature compensation calculation
TLIMIT Temperature Limit Command
Input
Format
TLIMIT <input>,<limit>[term]
Example
Remarks
a,+nnnn
<input> option).
<limit>
Specifies which input to configure: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062
The temperature limit in kelvin for which to shut down all control outputs when exceeded. A temperature limit of zero turns the temperature limit feature off for the given sensor input.
TLIMIT B,450[term]
—if the temperature of the sensor on Input B exceeds 450 K, all control outputs will be turned off.
A temperature limit setting of 0 K turns the temperature limit feature off.
TLIMIT?
Temperature Limit Query
Input
Format
TLIMIT? <input>[term]
Returned
Format
a
<input> option).
< limit>[term]
Specifies which input to query: A–D (D1–D5 for 3062
+nnnn (refer to command for description)
TUNEST?
Control Tuning Status Query
Input
Returned
Format
Remarks
TUNEST?[term]
<tuning status>,<output>,<error status>,<stage status>[term] n,n,n,nn
<tuning status>
<output>
0 = no active tuning, 1 = active tuning.
Heater output of the control loop being tuned (if tuning):
<error status>
<stage status>
1 = output 1, 2 = output 2
0 = no tuning error, 1 = tuning error
Specifies the current stage in the Autotune process.
If tuning error occurred, stage status represents stage that failed.
If initial conditions are not met when starting the autotune procedure, causing the autotuning process to never actually begin, then the error status will be set to 1 and the stage status will be stage 00.
| www.lakeshore.com
144
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
WARMUP Warmup Supply Parameter Command
Input
Format
WARMUP <output>,<control>,<percentage>[term]
Example
Remarks
n,n,+nnn.nn
<output>
<control>
Specifies which unpowered analog output to configure: 3 or
4
Specifies the type of control used: 0 = Auto Off,
1 = Continuous
<percentage> Specifies the percentage of full scale (10 V) Monitor Out voltage to apply to turn on the external power supply.
WARMUP 3,1,50[term]
—Output 3 will use the Continuous control mode, with a 5 V
(50%) output voltage for activating the external power supply.
The Output Mode parameter and the Control Input parameter must be configured using the OUTMODE command.
WARMUP?
Warmup Supply Parameter Query
Input
Format
WARMUP? <output>[term]
Returned
Format
n,+nnn.nn
<output> Specifies which unpowered analog output to query: 3 or 4.
<control>,<percentage>[term] n,+nnn (refer to command for description)
WEBLOG Website Login Parameters
Input
Format
WEBLOG <username>,<password>[term]
Example
Remarks
s[15],s[15]
<username>
<password>
15 character string representing the website username.
15 character string representing the website password.
WEBLOG “user”, “pass”
—sets the username to user and the password to pass.
Strings can be sent with or without quotation marks, but to send a string that contains spaces, commas, or semi-colons quotation marks must be used to differentiate the actual parameter separator.
WEBLOG?
Website Login Parameter Query
Input
Returned
Format
Remarks
WEBLOG?[term]
<username>,<password>[term] s[15],s[15] (refer to command for description)
Note that all strings returned by the Model 336 will be padded with spaces to maintain a constant number of characters.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
6.6.1 Interface Commands 145
ZONE Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Command
Input
ZONE <output>,<zone>,<upper bound>,<P value>,<I value>,
Format
Remarks
Example
<D value>,<mout value>,<range>,<input>,<rate>[term]
n,nn,+nnnnn, +nnnnn,+nnnnn,+nnnn,+nnnnn, n,n, +nnnn [term]
<output> Specifies which heater output to configure: 1 or 2.
<zone> Specifies which zone in the table to configure.
Valid entries are: 1–10.
<upper bound>
<P value>
<I value>
<D value>
<mout value>
<range>
<input>
Specifies the upper Setpoint boundary of this zone in kelvin.
Specifies the P for this zone: 0.1 to 1000.
Specifies the I for this zone: 0.1 to 1000.
Specifies the D for this zone: 0 to 200%.
Specifies the manual output for this zone: 0 to 100%.
Specifies the heater range for this zone. Valid entries:
0 = Off, 1 = Low, 2 = Med, 3 = High.
Specifies the sensor input to use for this zone. 0 = Default
(Use previously assigned sensor), 1 = Input A, 2 = Input B,
3 = Input C, 4 = Input D (5 = Input D2, 6 = Input D3,
<rate>
7 = Input D4, 8 = Input D5 for 3062 option)
Specifies the ramp rate for this zone: 0.1 –100 K/min.
Configures the output zone parameters. Refer to Paragraph 2.9.
ZONE 1,1,25.0,10,20,0,0,2,2,10[term]
—Output 1 zone 1 is valid to 25.0 K with
P = 10, I = 20, D = 0, a heater range of medium, sensor input B, and a ramp rate of 10 K/min.
ZONE?
Output Zone Table Parameter Query
Input
Format
ZONE? <output>,<zone>[term]
Returned
Format
n,nn
<output>
<zone>
Specifies which heater output to query: 1 or 2.
Specifies which zone in the table to query.
Valid entries: 1–10.
< upper boundary>,<P value>,<I value>,<D value>,<mout value>,<range>,<input>,<rate>[term]
+nnnnn,+nnnnn,+nnnnn,+nnnn, +nnnnn,n,n, +nnnn
(refer to command for description)
| www.lakeshore.com
146
c
HAPTER
6:
Computer Interface Operation
Model 336 Temperature Controller
7.1 General
7.2 Models
7.3 Options
7.4 Accessories
Chapter 7: Options and
Accessories
7.1 General 147
This chapter provides information on the models, options, and accessories available for the Model 336 temperature controller.
The list of Model 336 model numbers is provided as follows:
Model
336
Description of Models
Standard temperature controller. 4 diode/RTD inputs and 4 control outputs
TABLE 7-1
Model description
Power configurations—the instrument is configured at the factory for customerselected power as follows:
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
100 V-US (NEMA 5-15)
120 V-US (NEMA 5-15)
220 V-EU (CEE 717)
240 V-EU (CEE 717)
240 V-UK (BS 1363)
240 V-Swiss (SEV 1011)
220 V-China (GB 1002)
TABLE 7-2
Power configurations
The list of Model 336 options is provided as follows:
Model
3060
3061
3062
Description of Options
Dual Thermocouple Input Option Card. Adds 2 thermocouple inputs to the Model 336.
Capacitance Input Option Card. Adds one capacitive sensor input to the Model 336.
Diode/RTD Expansion Input Option Card. Adds 4 scanner diode/RTD inputs to the Model 336.
TABLE 7-3
Model description
Accessories are devices that perform a secondary duty as an aid or refinement to the primary unit. Refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog for details. A list of accessories available for the Model 336 is as follows:
Model Description of Accessories
106-009*
115-006*
MAN-336*
†
G-106-233*
G-106-755*
†
G-112-325
†
†
†
Heater Output Connector. Dual banana jack for heater output.
Sensor Input Mating Connector. 6-pin DIN plug for diode/resistor input; 4 included
Terminal Block Mating Connector. 10-pin terminal block for relays and Outputs 3 and 4.
Detachable 120 VAC Line Cord.
Model 336 Temperature Controller User's Manual.
Sensor/Heater Cable Assembly—10 Feet. Cable assembly for 2 diode/resistor sensors and
1 heater output. Approximately 3 m (10 ft) long. Requires 2 to use 4 sensors and 2 heaters.
G-112-326
Sensor/Heater Cable Assembly —20 Feet. Cable assembly for 2 diode/resistor sensors and 1 heater output. Approximately 6 m (20 ft) long. Requires 2 to use 4 sensors and 2 heaters.
6201
† IEEE-488 Cable. 1 m (3 ft) long IEEE-488 computer interface cable.
CAL-336-CERT
† Instrument recalibration with certificate.
CAL-336-DATA
† Instrument recalibration with certificate and data.
TABLE 7-4
Accessories
| www.lakeshore.com
148
c
HAPTER
7:
Options and Accessories
Model Description of Accessories
ES-2-20
ID-10-XX
IF-5
GAH-25
GAN-25
Stycast® Epoxy 2850-FT, Catalyst 9 (20 packets, 2 g each).
Stycast® is a common, highly versatile, nonconductive epoxy resin system for cryogenic use. The primary use for Stycast® is for vacuum feedthroughs or permanent thermal anchors. Stycast® is an alternative to
Apiezon® N Grease when permanent sensor mountings are desired.
Indium Solder Disks (Quantity 10). Indium is a semi-precious non-ferrous metal, softer than lead, and extremely malleable and ductile. It stays soft and workable down to cryogenic temperatures. Indium can be used to create solder "bumps" for microelectronic chip attachments and also as gaskets for pressure and vacuum sealing purposes.
ID-10-31 Indium Disks are 7.92 mm diameter × 0.13 mm (0.312 in diameter × 0.005 in)
ID-10-56 Indium Disks are 14.27 mm diameter × 0.127 mm (0.562 diameter × 0.005 in)
Indium Foil Sheets (Quantity 5). When used as a washer between DT-470-CU silicon diode or other temperature sensors and refrigerator cold stages, indium foil increases the thermal contact area and prevents the sensor from detaching due to vibration. It also may be used as a sealing gasket for covers, flanges, and windows in cryogenic applications. Each sheet is
0.13 mm × 50.8 mm × 50.8 mm (0.005 in × 2 in × 2 in).
Apiezon® H Grease, 25 g Tube. It is designed for general purposes where operating temperatures necessitate the use of a relatively high melting point grease. Melting point is 523 K
(250 °C). Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse.
Apiezon® N Grease, 25 g Tube. General purpose grease well-suited for cryogenic use because of its low viscosity. It is often used as a means of thermally anchoring cryogenic sensors as well as lubricating joints and o-rings. Contains high molecular weight polymeric hydrocarbon additive that gives it a tenacious, rubbery consistency allowing the grease to form a cushion between mating surfaces. Melting point is 316 K (43 °C). Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse.
HTR-25
HTR-50
RM-1
VGE-7031
25
)
Cartridge Heater. The heater features precision-wound nickel-chromium resistance wire, magnesium oxide insulation, 2 solid pins, non-magnetic package, and has UL and CSA component recognition. The heater is 25
)
, 6.35 mm (0.25 in) diameter by 25.4 mm (1 in) long. The 25
)
rating is in dead air. With proper heat sinking, the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating.
50
)
Cartridge Heater. The heater features precision-wound nickel-chromium resistance wire, magnesium oxide insulation, 2 solid pins, non-magnetic package, and has UL and CSA component recognition. The heater is 50
)
, 6.35 mm (0.25 in) diameter by 25.4 mm (1 in) long. The 50
)
rating is in dead air. With proper heat sinking, the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating.
Rack Mounting Kit. Mounting brackets, ears, and handles to attach 1 Model 336 to a
482.6 mm (19 in) rack mount cabinet. See FIGURE 7-2.
IMI-7031 Varnish (formerly GE 7031 Varnish) (1 pint can). IMI-7031 Insulating Varnish and
Adhesive possesses electrical and bonding properties which, when combined with its chemical resistance and good saturating properties, make it an excellent material for cryogenic temperatures. As an adhesive, IMI-7031 bonds a variety of materials, has fast tack time, and may be air dried or baked. It is also an electrically insulating adhesive at cryogenic temperatures and is often used as a calorimeter cement. When soaked into cigarette paper, it makes a good, high thermal conductivity, low electrical conductivity heat sinking layer. Maximum operating temperature: 423 K (150 °C).
Wire
Lake Shore Cryogenic Wire. Lake Shore sells the following types of cryogenic wire:
DT = Duo-Twist, MN = Single Strand, MW = Manganin, NC = Nichrome Heater,
ND = Heavy Duty, QL = Quad-Lead, and QT = Quad-Twist.
Lake Shore Coaxial Cable.
Lake Shore sells the following types of coaxial cable:
CC = Ultra Miniature Coaxial Cable, SR = Semi-Rigid Coaxial Cable, CRYC = CryoCable.
*Accessories included with a new Model 336
†
RoHS compliant
TABLE 7-4
Accessories
Model 336 Temperature Controller
7.5 Rack Mounting 149
FIGURE 7-1
Model 336 sensor and heater cable assembly 10 ft: P/N G-112-325, 20 ft: P/N G-112-326
7.5 Rack Mounting
The Model 336 can be installed into a 482.6 mm (19 in) rack mount cabinet using the optional Lake Shore Model RM-1 Rack Mount Kit. The kit contains mounting ears, handles and screws that adapt the front of the instrument to fit into a 88.9 mm
(3.5 in) tall, full rack space. Additional support may be required in the rear of the instrument and to relieve strain on heavy cables. The mounting ears are painted and do not guarantee good electrical contact between the instrument and cabinet. They should not be used for ground strapping unless paint is removed from under all screws.
Ensure that there is a 25 mm (1 in) clearance on both sides of the instrument after rack mounting.
7.6 Input Option
Card Installation
Item Description
Rack mount ear
PN Qty
107-440
*
Screw, 6-32×3/8, PH, FLHD, MS, SS
0-033 4
Rack mount handles, 3 in, black
107-433
Screw, 8-32×3/8, PH, FLHD, MS, SS
0-081 4
*Remove and discard 4 screws from case; replace with 4 screws from kit
FIGURE 7-2
Model RM-1 rack mount kit
The field installable Model 3060 adds thermocouple functionality to inputs C and D, the Model 3061 adds capacitance functionality to input D, and the Model 3062 adds
4 scanners to input D. While the options can be easily removed, this is not necessary as the standard inputs remain fully functional when they are not being used to measure thermocouple or capacitance temperature sensors. Calibration for the options are stored on the card so you can install it in the field and use it with multiple
Model 336 temperature controllers without recalibration.
| www.lakeshore.com
150
c
HAPTER
7:
Options and Accessories
7.6.1 Input Option Card
Installation
The Model 336 input option cards are field-installable. You will need a small Phillipshead screwdriver and the 5/64-in hex driver. Follow this procedure to install an input option card.
To avoid potentially lethal shocks, turn off controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures.
The components on this board are electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) devices.
Follow ESD procedures in section 8.11 to avoid inducing an electrostatic discharge (ESD)
into the device.
If you are installing the Model 3061, use the instructions for the full rack only. The Model
3060 can be installed in either a full or half rack.
1. Turn the Model 336 power switch Off. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, then from the instrument.
2.
Half rack only:
Remove the two screws used to attach the ceramic block to the fullrack adapter plate; set aside the screws, and discard the full-rack adapter plate.
3. Stand the unit on its face. Use the hex driver to remove the 4 screws on both sides
of the top cover. Loosen the 2 rear bottom screws (FIGURE 7-3).
Remove
rear plastic bezel
Loosen
bottom rear side cover screws
(both sides)
Remove
top side cover screws
(both sides)
Remove
top cover screws
Remove
rear bottom cover screw
(unshown)
To remove top cover, slide it to the rear on the tracks
Rear panel option plate screws
Model 336 Temperature Controller
FIGURE 7-3
Cover and option plate screws (full rack)
4.
Full rack only:
use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2 top cover screws
and 1 rear bottom screw (FIGURE 7-3).
5. Remove the rear plastic bezel. The cover is tracked. Slide the top cover to the rear on the track to remove it.
6. Remove the rear panel option plate screws and set aside. Remove the rear panel option plate.
7. With the instrument still standing on its face, turn it to view the inside circuit board.
8. Place the option card into its position in the rear panel from inside the instrument. Orient the card so that the 14-pin ribbon cable connector is toward the
bottom of the instrument, closest to the main circuit board(FIGURE 7-4).
9.
Half rack only:
use the screws removed in step 1 to attach the card by starting both screws in a few threads before tightening either.
7.6.1 Input Option Card Installation 151
10.
Full rack only:
use the screws removed in step 6 to attach the card by starting both screws in a few threads before tightening either.
11. Fully tighten both screws
12.
This step is not applicable to the 3062 option card.
Insert the 14-pin ribbon cable connector plug into the socket on the option board. Orient the ribbon cable connector plug so that the arrow nub slides into the plug slot, and the ribbon cable exits
FIGURE 7-4
Proper orientation of the ribbon cable connector plug
13. Plug the other end of the cable into the main board, option connector J12
14. Slide the top panel forward in the track provided on each side of the unit.
15. Replace the rear plastic bezel by sliding it straight into the unit.
16.
Full rack only:
use a small Phillips head screwdriver to replace the 2 top cover screws and the 1 bottom cover screw.
17. Use the hex key to replace the 4 screws on the sides of the top covers. Tighten the two rear bottom screws.
18. Replace the power cord in the rear of the unit and set the power switch to On.
19. To verify option card installation, check the instrument information by pressing and holding the
Escape
key. Refer to section 8.7 for more information on instru-
ment information.
| www.lakeshore.com
152
c
HAPTER
7:
Options and Accessories
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.1 General 153
Chapter 8: Service
8.1 General
This chapter provides basic service information for the Model 336 temperature controller. Customer service of the product is limited to the information presented in this chapter. Factory trained service personnel should be consulted if the instrument requires repair.
This section provides USB interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new installations, existing installations, and intermittent lockups.
8.2 USB
Troubleshooting
8.2.1 New Installation
8.2.2 Existing
Installation No Longer
Working
8.2.3 Intermittent
Lockups
1. Check that the instruments interface is set to USB.
2. Check that the USB driver is installed properly and that the device is functioning.
In Microsoft Windows®, the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right-clicking
Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller
under
Ports
(COM & LPT) or
Other Devices
and then clicking
Properties
. Refer to
section 6.3.3 for details on installing the USB driver.
3. Check that the correct com port is being used. In Microsoft Windows®, the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under
Ports
(COM & LPT).
4. Check that the correct settings are being used for communication. Refer to
section 6.3.3 for details on installing the USB driver.
5. Check cable connections and length.
6. Send the message terminator.
7. Send the entire message string at one time including the terminator. (Many terminal emulation programs do not.)
8. Send only one simple command at a time until communication is established.
9. Be sure to spell commands correctly and use proper syntax.
1. Power the instrument off, then on again to see if it is a soft failure.
2. Power the computer off, then on again to see if communication port is locked up.
3. Check all cable connections.
4. Check that the com port assignment has not been changed. In
Microsoft Windows®, the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under
Ports
(COM & LPT).
5. Check that the USB driver is installed properly and that the device is functioning.
In Microsoft Windows®, the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right-clicking
Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller
under
Ports
(COM & LPT) or Other Devices and then clicking
Properties
.
1. Check cable connections and length.
2. Increase the delay between all commands to 100 ms to make sure the instrument is not being overloaded.
3. Ensure that the USB cable is not unplugged and that the Model 336 is not powered down while the com port is open. The USB driver creates a com port when the USB connection is detected, and removes the com port when the USB connection is no longer detected. Removing the com port while in use by software can cause the software to lock up or crash.
| www.lakeshore.com
154
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
8.3 IEEE Interface
Troubleshooting
8.3.1 New Installation
8.3.2 Existing
Installation No Longer
Working
8.3.3 Intermittent
Lockups
8.4 Fuse Drawer
This section provides IEEE interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new installations, old installations, and intermittent lockups.
1. Check the instrument address.
2. Always send a message terminator.
3. Send the entire message string at one time including the terminator.
4. Send only one simple command at a time until communication is established.
5. Be sure to spell commands correctly and use proper syntax.
6. Attempt both Talk and Listen functions. If one works but not the other, the hardware connection is working, so look at syntax, terminator, and command format.
1. Power the instrument off, then on again to see if it is a soft failure.
2. Power the computer off then on again to see if the IEEE card is locked up.
3. Verify that the address has not been changed on the instrument during a memory reset.
4. Check all cable connections.
1. Check cable connections and length.
2. Increase the delay between all commands to 50 ms to make sure the instrument is not being overloaded.
The fuse drawer supplied with the Model 336 holds the instrument line fuses and line voltage selection module. The drawer holds two 5 mm × 20 mm (0.2 in × .79 in) time delay fuses. It requires two good fuses of the same rating to operate safely.
Refer to Section 8.5 for details.
8.5 Line Voltage
Selection
Fuse
120
Fuse
Front view Side view
FIGURE 8-1
Fuse drawer
Rear view
Use the following procedure to change the instrument line voltage selector.
To avoid potentially lethal shocks, turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures.
1. Identify the line input assembly on the instrument rear panel. See FIGURE 8-2.
2. Turn the line power switch OFF (O).
3. Remove the instrument power cord.
4. With a small screwdriver, release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse.
5. Slide out the removable plastic fuse holder from the drawer.
6. Rotate the fuse holder until the proper voltage indicator shows through the window.
7. Re-assemble the line input assembly in the reverse order.
8. Verify the voltage indicator in the window of the line input assembly.
9. Connect the instrument power cord.
10. Turn the line power switch On (l) Refer to FIGURE 8-2.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.6 Fuse Replacement 155
FIGURE 8-2
Power fuse access
Use this procedure to remove and replace a line fuse.
8.6 Fuse
Replacement
8.7 Factory Reset
Menu
To avoid potentially lethal shocks, turn off controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures.
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace only with the same fuse type and rating specified for the line voltage selected.
Test fuse with an ohmmeter. Do not rely on visual inspection of fuse.
1. Locate the line input assembly on the instrument rear panel. See Figure 8-2.
2. Turn the power switch Off (O).
3. Remove the instrument power cord.
4. With a small screwdriver, release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse.
5. Remove existing fuse(s). Replace with proper Slow-Blow (time-delay) fuse ratings as follows:
100/120 V
220/240 V
4 A T 250 V
4 A T 250 V
5 × 20 mm
5 × 20 mm
6. Re-assemble the line input assembly in reverse order.
7. Verify voltage indicator in the line input assembly window.
8. Connect the instrument power cord.
9. Turn the power switch On (l).
It is sometimes necessary to reset instrument parameter values or clear the contents of curve memory. Both are stored in nonvolatile memory called NOVRAM, but they can be cleared individually. Instrument calibration is not affected except for Room
Temperature Calibration, which should be recalibrated after parameters are set to default values or any time the thermocouple curve is changed.
| www.lakeshore.com
156
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
8.7.1 Default Values
Input Setup – General
Sensor type
Filter
Input name
Temperature limit
Input units
Curve
Input Setup – Diode
Range
Diode current
Input Setup –
Platinum/NTC RTD
Autorange
Current reversal
Input Setup – Thermocouple
Room comp
Room cal
Output Setup
Output mode
Control input
Heater resistance
Power up enable
Heater out display
Setpoint ramping
Display Setup
Display mode
Number of locations
Location 1 source
Location 1 units
Location 2 source
Location 2 units
Location 3 source
Location 3 units
Location 4 source
Location 4 units
Location 5 source
Location 5 units
Location 6 source
Location 6 units
Location 7 source
Location 7 units
Location 8 source
Location 8 units
Contrast
The factory defaults can be reset, and the user curves cleared, using the Factory Reset menu. To access the Factory Reset menu, press and hold the
Escape
key for 5 s. Once the menu appears, set either Reset to Defaults or Clear Curves, or both, to Yes, then highlight Execute and press
Enter
.
Default
Diode
Off
Input A (B, C, D)
0 K (Off)
Kelvin
DT-670
Default
2.5 V (Silicon)
10 µA
Default
On
On
Default
On
Cleared
Default
Closed loop PID (off for Output 3 and 4)
Input A for Output 1; Input B for Output 2 none for output 3 and 4
25
)
Off
Current
Off
Default
Custom
2 (large)
Input A
Kelvin
Input B
Kelvin
Input C
Kelvin
Input D
Kelvin
Input A
Sensor
Input B
Sensor
Input C
Sensor
Input D
Sensor
28
TABLE 8-1
Default values
Interface Setup – General
Enabled
Interface Setup – IEEE
IEEE Address
Interface Setup – Ethernet
DHCP
Auto-IP
Static-IP
Static Subnet Mask
Static Gateway
Static Primary DNS
Static Secondary DNS
Preferred hostname
Web username
Web password
Alarm
Alarm
Relay
Relay
Keypad Locking
Mode
Lock code
PID/Manual Heater Power
(MHP) Output
Proportional (P)
Integral (I)
Derivative (D)
Manual Output
Heater
Setpoint
Heater range
Setpoint value
Remote/Local
Remote/Local
Zone Settings – All Zones
Upper boundary
Proportional (P)
Integral (I)
Derivative (D)
Manual output
Range
Ramp rate
Control input
Default
USB
Default
12
Default
On
Off
192.168.0.12
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
LSCI-336 user
Default
Off
Default
Off
Default
Unlocked
123
Default
50.0
20.0
0.0
0.000%
Default
Off
Default
0.000 K
Default
Local
Default
0.000 K
50.0
20.0
0.00
0.000%
Off
0.100 K/min
Default
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.7.2 Product
Information
8.8 Error
Messages
8.9 Calibration
Procedure
8.7.2 Product Information 157
Product information for your instrument is also found in the Factory Reset menu.The following information is provided:
D
Firmware version
D
Firmware date
D
Serial number
D
Option card type
D
Option card serial number
D
Ethernet version
The following are error messages that may be displayed by the Model 336 during operation.
Message Description
DISABL
NOCURV
S.OVER
S.UNDER
T.OVER
T.UNDER
Cannot Communicate with
Input uP
NOVRAM Corrupt
A temperature limit has been exceeded
*** Keypad Locked ***
*** Heater Short Circuit
Detected ***
*** Heater Open Circuit
Detected ***
*** Invalid Calibration ***
*** Invalid Option Card
Calibration ***
Input is disabled. Refer to section 4.4.
Input has no curve.Refer to section 4.4.9.
Input is at or over full-scale sensor units.
Input is at or under negative full-scale sensor units.
Input at or over the high end of the curve.
Input at or under the low end of the curve.
The main microprocessor has lost communication with the sensor input microprocessor.
Invalid data or contents in NOVRAM–when this message appears, options are provided for resetting the instrument to default values, and for clearing all user curve locations
(21– 59). To perform the reset, set the desired parameters to “Yes”, then choose the
“Execute” option.
The temperature reading on a sensor input has exceeded the Temperature Limit setting. A detailed message will follow, which includes a reference to which sensor input's temperature limit has been exceeded.
An attempt has been made to change a parameter while the keypad is locked.
A short circuit condition has been observed on 1 of the heater outputs. A detailed message will follow, which includes a reference to which output caused the condition. The output will be turned off when this occurs.
An open circuit condition has been observed on 1 of the heater outputs. A detailed message will follow, which includes a reference to which output caused the condition. The output will be turned off when this occurs.
The calibration memory is either corrupt, or is at the default, uncalibrated state. This message appears when the Model 336 is first powered on. To clear the message, and continue with instrument start-up, press the Escape and Enter keys simultaneously.
The installed option card calibration memory is either corrupt, or is at the default, uncalibrated state. This message appears when the Model 336 is first powered on. To clear the message, and continue with instrument start-up, press the
Escape
and
Enter
keys simultaneously.
*** Firmware Update in
Progress ***
This indicates that the Model 336 is in firmware update mode.
TABLE 8-2
Error messages
Instrument calibration can be obtained through Lake Shore Service. Refer to
section 8.14 for technical inquiries and contact information.
| www.lakeshore.com
158
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
8.10 Rear Panel
Connector
Definition
The sensor input, heater output, terminal block, USB, Ethernet, and IEEE-488 con-
nectors are defined in FIGURE 8-3 through FIGURE 8-8. For thermocouple connector
FIGURE 8-3
Sensor input A through D
Pin
3
4
1
2
5
6
Symbol Description
I–
V–
None
V+
I+
None
–Current
–Voltage
Shield
+Voltage
+Current
Shield
TABLE 8-3
Sensor input A through D connector details
FIGURE 8-4
Heater output connectors
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.10 Rear Panel Connector Definition 159
FIGURE 8-5
Terminal block for relays and Output 3 and 4
Pin Description
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Output 3+
Output 3–
Output 4+
Output 4–
Relay 1 normally closed
Relay 1 common
Relay 1 normally open
Relay 2 normally closed
Relay 2 common
Relay 2 normally open
TABLE 8-4
Terminal block pin and connector details
2 1
3 4
FIGURE 8-6
USB pin and connector details
Pin Name Description
3
4
1
2
VCC
D-
D+
GND
+5 VDC
Data –
Data +
Ground
TABLE 8-5
USB pin and connector details
| www.lakeshore.com
160
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
EPWR+ EPWR+
RXD+ TXD- TXD+
8.10.1 IEEE-488
Interface Connector
FIGURE 8-7
Ethernet pin and connector details
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Symbol Description
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
EPWR+
EPWR+
RXD-
EPWR-
EPWR-
Transmit data+
Transmit data-
Receive data+
Power from switch+ (not used)
Power from switch+ (not used)
Receive data-
Power from switch- (not used)
Power from switch- (not used)
TABLE 8-6
Ethernet pin and connector details
Connect to the IEEE-488 Interface connector on the Model 336 rear with cables specified in the IEEE-488 standard. The cable has 24 conductors with an outer shield. The connectors are 24-way Amphenol 57 Series (or equivalent) with piggyback receptacles to allow daisy chaining in multiple device systems. The connectors are secured in the receptacles by 2 captive locking screws with metric threads.
The total length of cable allowed in a system is 2 m for each device on the bus, or 20 m maximum. The Model 336 can drive a bus of up to 10 devices. A connector extender is required to use the IEEE-488 interface and relay terminal block at the same time.
FIGURE 8-8 shows the IEEE-488 interface connector pin location and signal names as
viewed from the Model 336 rear panel.
12
24
11
23
10
22
9
21
8
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
16
3
15
2
14
1
13
FIGURE 8-8
IEEE-488 interface
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.11 Electrostatic Discharge 161
8.11 Electrostatic
Discharge
8.11.1 Identification of
Electrostatic Discharge
Sensitive Components
Symbol
IFC
SRQ
ATN
SHIELD
DIO 5
DIO 6
DIO 7
DIO 8
DIO 1
DIO 2
DIO 3
DIO 4
EOI
DAV
NRFD
NDAC
REN
GND 6
GND 7
GND 8
GND 9
GND 10
GND 11
Pin
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
Description
Data input/output line 1
Data input/output line 2
Data input/output line 3
Data input/output line 4
End or identify
Data valid
Not ready for data
No data accepted
Interface clear
Service request
Attention
Cable shield
Data input/output line 5
Data input/output line 6
Data input/output line 7
Data input/output line 8
Remote enable
Ground wire—twisted pair with DAV
Ground wire—twisted pair with NRFD
Ground wire—twisted pair with NDAC
Ground wire—twisted pair with IFC
Ground wire—twisted pair with SRQ
Ground wire—twisted pair with ATN
TABLE 8-7
IEEE-488 rear panel connector details
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage electronic parts, assemblies, and equipment. ESD is a transfer of electrostatic charge between bodies at different electrostatic potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. The low-energy source that most commonly destroys Electrostatic Discharge sensitive devices is the human body, which generates and retains static electricity. Simply walking across a carpet in low humidity may generate up to 35,000 V of static electricity.
Current technology trends toward greater complexity, increased packaging density, and thinner dielectrics between active elements, which results in electronic devices with even more ESD sensitivity. Some electronic parts are more ESD sensitve than others. ESD levels of only a few hundred volts may damage electronic components such as semiconductors, thick and thin film resistors, and piezoelectric crystals during testing, handling, repair, or assembly. Discharge voltages below 4000 V cannot be seen, felt, or heard.
The following are various industry symbols used to label components as
ESD sensitive.
FIGURE 8-9
Symbols indicating ESD sensitivity
| www.lakeshore.com
162
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
8.11.2 Handling
Electrostatic Discharge
Sensitive Components
8.12 Enclosure Top
Remove and
Replace Procedure
Observe all precautions necessary to prevent damage to ESDS components before attempting installation. Bring the device and everything that contacts it to ground potential by providing a conductive surface and discharge paths. As a minimum, observe these precautions:
D
De-energize or disconnect all power and signal sources and loads used with unit.
D
Place the unit on a grounded conductive work surface.
D
The technician should be grounded through a conductive wrist strap (or other device) using 1 M series resistor to protect operator.
D
Ground any tools, such as soldering equipment, that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator’s hands provides a sufficient ground for tools that are otherwise electrically isolated.
D
Place ESD sensitive devices and assemblies removed from a unit on a conductive work surface or in a conductive container. An operator inserting or removing a device or assembly from a container must maintain contact with a conductive portion of the container. Use only plastic bags approved for storage of
ESD material.
D
Do not handle ESD sensitive devices unnecessarily or remove them from the packages until they are actually used or tested.
Follow this procedure to remove the top enclosure:
To avoid potentially lethal shocks, turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures.
The components on this board are electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) devices.
Follow ESD procedures in section 8.11 to avoid inducing an electrostatic discharge (ESD)
into the device.
1. Turn the Model 336 power switch Off. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, then from the instrument.
2. Stand the unit on its face. Use a 5/64 in hex driver to remove the four screws on both sides of the top cover. Loosen the two rear bottom screws (FIGURE 8-10).
Remove
rear plastic bezel
Loosen
bottom rear side cover screws
(both sides)
Remove
top side cover screws
(both sides)
Remove
top cover screws
Remove
rear bottom cover screw
(unshown)
To remove top cover, slide it to the rear on the tracks
FIGURE 8-10
Cover removal
3. Use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the two top cover screws and one rear bottom screw (FIGURE 8-10).
4. Remove the rear plastic bezel. The cover is tracked. Slide the top cover to the rear on the track to remove it.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.12 Enclosure Top Remove and Replace Procedure 163
Follow this procedure to install the top enclosure:
5. Slide the top panel forward in the track provided on each side of the unit.
6. Use a small Phillips screwdriver to replace the two top cover screws and 1 rear bottom screw.
7. Use the hex driver to replace the two screws on the side of the top covers.
8. Replace the rear plastic bezel by sliding it straight into the unit.
9. Tighten the two rear bottom screws.
10. Replace the power cord in the rear of the unit and set the power switch to On.
J12 (option connector)
JMP1
JMP2
FIGURE 8-11
Location of internal components
| www.lakeshore.com
164
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
8.13 Firmware
Updates
8.13.1 Updating the
Firmware
8.13.2 Record of
Updates Made to the
Firmware
8.14 Technical
Inquiries
8.14.1 Contacting
Lake Shore
This section provides instructions on updating your firmware. It also provides a table of the updates that have been made thus far.
Periodically, Lake Shore provides updates to instrument firmware and Ethernet firmware. The files for these updates can be downloaded from our website. To access the firmware updates, follow this procedure.
1. Go to http://www.lakeshore.com/products/cryogenic-temperature-controllers/ model-336/Pages/Overview.aspx to download the instrument and Ethernet firmware.
2. Enter your name and email address so that we can keep you updated on any new firmware for your instrument.
3. Click the “Go to the download” bar and follow the prompts that are provided on the screen for you.
TABLE 8-8 and TABLE 8-9 describe the updates made to the temperature controller in
each version.
Instrument firmware version
Features added
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.5
Closed loop PID and Zone modes available on Outputs 3 and 4
Setpoint “press-and-hold” loads current temperature to setpoint, bypassing ramping
Capacitance option card support added
Scanner option card support added
Added sensor name units for custom display mode
TABLE 8-8
Instrument firmware updates
Ethernet firmware version
1.1
2.0
2.1
2.2
Features added
Instrument configuration backup utility added
Chart recorder utility added
Support for Model 350 added
Chart recorder and instrument configuration utilities updated to support Model 3062 scanner option card
Support for Model 224; increased TCP socket connections to 5; and added available TCP socket connections to Ethernet status page
TABLE 8-9
Ethernet firmware updates
Refer to the following sections when contacting Lake Shore for application assistance or product service. Questions regarding product applications, price, availability and shipments should be directed to sales. Questions regarding instrument calibration or repair should be directed to instrument service. Do not return a product to Lake Shore
without a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number (section 8.14.2).
The Lake Shore Service Department is staffed Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM EST, excluding holidays and company shut down days.
Contact Lake Shore Service through any of the means listed below. However, the most direct and efficient means of contacting is to complete the online service request form at http://www.lakeshore.com/sup/serf.html. Provide a detailed description of the problem and the required contact information. You will receive a response within
24 hours or the next business day in the event of weekends or holidays.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
8.14.2 Return of Equipment 165
If you wish to contact Service or Sales by mail or telephone, use the following:
Mailing address
E-mail address
Telephone
Fax
Web service request
Lake Shore Cryotronics
Instrument Service Department
575 McCorkle Blvd.
Westerville, Ohio USA 43082-8888 [email protected]
614-891-2244
614-891-2243 option 6
614-818-1600
614-818-1609 http://www.lakeshore.com/sup/serf.html
TABLE 8-10
Contact information
Sales
Instrument Service
Sales
Instrument Service
Sales
Instrument Service
Instrument Service
8.14.2 Return of
Equipment
The temperature controller is packaged to protect it during shipment.
The user should retain any shipping carton(s) in which equipment is originally received, in the event that any equipment needs to be returned.
If the original packaging is not available, a minimum of 76.2 mm (3 in) of shock adsorbent packing material should be placed snugly on all sides of the instrument in a sturdy corrugated cardboard box. Please use reasonable care when removing the temperature controller from its protective packaging and inspect it carefully for damage. If it shows any sign of damage, please file a claim with the carrier immediately. Do not destroy the shipping container; it will be required by the carrier as evidence to support claims. Call Lake Shore for return and repair instructions.
All equipment returns must be approved by a member of the Lake Shore Service
Department. The service engineer will use the information provided in the service request form and will issue an RMA. This number is necessary for all returned equipment. It must be clearly indicated on both the shipping carton(s) and any correspondence relating to the shipment. Once the RMA has been approved, you will receive appropriate documents and instructions for shipping the equipment to
Lake Shore.
8.14.3 RMA Valid Period RMAs are valid for 60 days from issuance; however, we suggest that equipment needing repair be shipped to Lake Shore within 30 days after the RMA has been issued. You will be contacted if we do not receive the equipment within 30 days after the RMA is issued. The RMA will be cancelled if we do not receive the equipment after
60 days.
8.14.4 Shipping
Charges
8.14.5 Restocking Fee
All shipments to Lake Shore are to be made prepaid by the customer. Equipment serviced under warranty will be returned prepaid by Lake Shore. Equipment serviced out-of-warranty will be returned FOB Lake Shore.
Lake Shore reserves the right to charge a restocking fee for items returned for exchange or reimbursement.
| www.lakeshore.com
166
c
HAPTER
8:
Service
Model 336 Temperature Controller
167
Appendix A: Temperature Scales
A.1 Definition
A.2 Comparison
A.3 Conversions
Temperature is a fundamental unit of measurement that describes the kinetic and potential energies of the atoms and molecules of bodies. When the energies and velocities of the molecules in a body are increased, the temperature is increased whether the body is a solid, liquid, or gas. Thermometers are used to measure temperature. The temperature scale is based on the temperature at which ice, liquid water, and water vapor are all in equilibrium. This temperature is called the triple point of water and is assigned the value 0 °C, 32 °F, and 273.15 K. These 3 temperature scales are defined as follows:
D
Celsius
—abbreviation: °C. A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as 0 °C and the boiling point as 100 °C under normal atmospheric pressure. Formerly known as Centigrade. Originally devised by Anders Celsius (1701 -
1744), a Swedish astronomer.
D
Fahrenheit
—abbreviation: °F. A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as 32 °F and the boiling point as 212 °F under normal atmospheric pressure. Originally devised by Gabriel Fahrenheit (1686 - 1736), a German physicist residing in Holland; developed use of mercury in thermometry.
D
Kelvin
—abbreviation: K. An absolute scale of temperature, the zero point of which is approximately -273.15°C. Scale units are equal in magnitude to Celsius degrees. Originally devised by Lord Kelvin, William Thompson, (1824 - 1907), a
British physicist, mathematician, and inventor.
The 3 temperature scales are graphically compared in FIGURE A-1.
Boiling point of water
Freezing point of water
373.15 K
273.15 K
100 °C
0 °C
212 °F
32 °F
Absolute zero kelvin
0 K -273.15 °C
Celsius
-459.67 °F
Fahrenheit
FIGURE A-1
Comparison of kelvin, Celsius and Fahrenheit temperature scales
To convert Fahrenheit to Celsius: subtract 32 from °F then divide by 1.8, or:
°C = (°F - 32) ÷ 1.8
To convert Celsius to Fahrenheit: multiply °C by 1.8 then add 32, or:
°F = (1.8 × °C) + 32
To convert Fahrenheit to kelvin, first convert °F to °C, then add 273.15.
To convert Celsius to kelvin, add 273.15.
| www.lakeshore.com
168
Appendices
°C
-228.71
-223.33
-223.15
-220
-217.78
-217.59
-213.15
-212.22
-243.15
-240
-239.82
-234.44
-234.26
-233.15
-230
-228.89
-256.67
-256.48
-253.15
-251.11
-250.93
-250
-245.56
-245.37
-273.15
-270
-267.78
-267.59
-263.15
-262.22
-262.04
-260
-195.56
-195.37
-193.15
-190
-189.82
-184.44
-184.26
-183.15
-212.04
-210
-206.67
-206.48
-203.15
-201.11
-200.93
-200
°F
-379.67
-370
369.67
-364
-360
-359.67
-351.67
-350
-405.67
-400
-399.67
-390
-389.67
-387.67
-382
-380
-430
-429.67
-423.67
-420
-419.67
-418.00
-410
-409.67
-459.67
-454
-450
-449.67
-441.67
-440
-439.67
-436
-320
-319.67
-315.67
-310
-309.67
-300
-299.67
-297.67
-349.67
-346
-340
-339.67
-333.67
-330
-329.67
-328
44.44
49.82
50
53.15
55.37
55.56
60
60.93
30
33.15
33.33
38.71
38.89
40
43.15
44.26
16.48
16.67
20
22.04
22.22
23.15
27.59
27.78
0
3.15
5.37
5.56
10
10.93
11.11
13.15
77.59
77.78
80
83.15
83.33
88.71
88.89
90
61.11
63.15
66.48
66.67
70
72.04
72.22
73.15
K °F °C K °F
-209.67
-207.67
-202
-200
-199.67
-190
-189.67
-184
-239.67
-238
-230
-229.67
-225.67
-220
-219.67
-210
-261.67
-260
-259.67
-256
-250
-249.67
-243.67
-240
-292
-290
-289.67
-280
-279.67
-274
-270
-269.67
-153.67
-150
-149.67
-148
-140
-139.67
-135.67
-130
-180
-179.67
-171.67
-170
-169.67
-166
-160
-159.67
TABLE A-1
Temperature conversions
-134.26
-133.15
-130
-128.89
-128.71
-123.33
-123.15
-120
-150.93
-150
-145.56
-145.37
-143.15
-140
-139.82
-134.44
-163.15
-162.22
-162.04
-160
-156.67
-156.48
-153.15
-151.11
-180
-178.89
-178.71
-173.33
-173.15
-170
-167.78
-167.59
-103.15
-101.11
-100.93
-100
-95.96
-95.37
-93.15
-90
-117.78
-117.59
-113.15
-112.22
-112.04
-110
-106.67
-106.48
138.89
140
143.15
144.26
144.44
149.82
150
153.15
122.22
123.15
127.59
127.78
130
133.15
133.33
138.71
110
110.93
111.11
113.15
116.48
116.67
120
122.04
93.15
94.26
94.44
99.82
100
103.15
105.57
105.56
170
172.04
172.22
173.15
177.59
177.78
180
183.15
155.37
155.56
160
-160.93
161.11
163.15
166.48
166.67
-45.67
-40
-39.67
-30
-29.67
-27.67
-22
-20
-70
-69.67
-63.67
-60
-59.67
-58
-50
-49.67
-99.67
-94
-90
-89.67
-81.67
-80
-79.67
-76
-129.67
-120
-119.67
-117.67
-112
-110
-109.67
-100
10.33
14
20
20.33
26.33
30
30.33
32
-19.67
-10
-9.67
-4
0
+0.33
8.33
10
°C
-43.15
-40
-39.82
-34.44
-34.26
-33.15
-30
-28.89
-56.67
-56.48
-53.15
-51.11
-50.93
-50
-45.56
-45.37
-73.15
-70
-67.78
-67.59
-63.15
-62.22
-62.04
-60
-89.82
-84.44
-84.44
-83.15
-80
-78.89
-78.71
-73.33
-12.04
-10
-6.67
-6.48
-3.15
-1.11
-0.93
0
-28.71
-23.33
-23.15
-20
-17.78
-17.59
-13.15
-12.22
K
230
233.15
233.33
238.71
238.89
240
243.15
244.26
216.48
216.67
220
222.04
222.22
223.15
227.59
227.78
200
203.15
205.37
205.56
210
210.93
211.11
213.15
183.33
188.71
188.89
190
193.15
194.26
194.44
199.82
261.11
263.15
266.48
266.67
270
272.04
272.22
273.15
244.44
249.82
250
253.15
255.37
255.56
260
260.93
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Appendix B: Handling Liquid
Helium and Nitrogen
169
B.1 General
B.2 Properties
B.3 Handling
Cryogenic Storage
Dewars
Use of liquid helium (LHe) and liquid nitrogen (LN
2
) is often associated with the Model
336 temperature controller. Although not explosive, there are a number of safety considerations to keep in mind in the handling of LHe and LN
2
.
LHe and LN
2
are colorless, odorless, and tasteless gases. Gaseous nitrogen makes up about 78 percent of the Earth's atmosphere, while helium comprises only about
5 ppm. Most helium is recovered from natural gas deposits. Once collected and isolated, the gases will liquefy when properly cooled. A quick comparison between LHe and LN
2 is provided in Table C-1.
Property Liquid Helium Liquid Nitrogen
Boiling Point at 1 atm
Thermal Conductivity (Gas), w/cm-K
Latent Heat of Vaporization, Btu/L
Liquid Density, lb/L
4.2 K
0.083
2.4
0.275
TABLE B-1
Comparison of liquid helium and liquid nitrogen
77 K
0.013
152
0.78
Cryogenic containers (Dewars) must be operated in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. Safety instructions will also be posted on the side of each Dewar.
Cryogenic Dewars must be kept in a well-ventilated place where they are protected from the weather and away from any sources of heat. A typical cryogenic Dewar is
B.4 Liquid Helium and Nitrogen
Safety Precautions
FIGURE B-1
Typical cryogenic storage
Dewar
Transferring LHe and LN
2
and operation of the storage Dewar controls should be in accordance with the manufacturer/supplier's instructions. During this transfer, it is important that all safety precautions written on the storage Dewar and recommended by the manufacturer be followed.
| www.lakeshore.com
170
Appendices
Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen are potential asphyxiants and can cause rapid suffocation without warning. Store and use in area with adequate ventilation. DO NOT vent container in confined spaces. DO NOT enter confined spaces where gas may be present unless area has been well ventilated. If inhaled, remove to fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. Get medical help.
B.5 Recommended
First Aid
Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen can cause severe frostbite to the eyes or skin. DO NOT touch frosted pipes or valves. In case of frostbite, consult a physician at once. If a physician is not readily available, warm the affected areas with water that is near body temperature.
The two most important safety aspects to consider when handling LHe and LN
2
are adequate ventilation and eye and skin protection. Although helium and nitrogen gases are non-toxic, they are dangerous in that they replace the air in a normal breathing atmosphere. Liquid products are of an even greater threat since a small amount of liquid evaporates to create a large amount of gas. Therefore, it is imperative that cryogenic Dewars be stored and the MTD system be operated in open and well ventilated areas.
Persons transferring LHe and LN
2
should make every effort to protect eyes and skin from accidental contact with liquid or the cold gas issuing from it. Protect your eyes with full-face shield or chemical splash goggles. Safety glasses (even with side shields) are not adequate. Always wear special cryogenic gloves (Tempshield Cryo-
Gloves® or equivalent) when handling anything that is, or may have been, in contact with the liquid or cold gas, or with cold pipes or equipment. Long sleeve shirts and cuffless trousers that are of sufficient length to prevent liquid from entering the shoes are recommended.
Every site that stores and uses LHe and LN2 should have an appropriate Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) present. The MSDS may be obtained from the manufacturer/distributor. The MSDS will specify the symptoms of overexposure and the first aid to be used. A typical summary of these instructions is provided as follows.
If symptoms of asphyxia such as headache, drowsiness, dizziness, excitation, excess salivation, vomiting, or unconsciousness are observed, remove the victim to fresh air.
If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration. Call a physician immediately.
If exposure to cryogenic liquids or cold gases occurs, restore tissue to normal body temperature (98.6 °F) as rapidly as possible, then protect the injured tissue from further damage and infection. Call a physician immediately. Rapid warming of the affected parts is best achieved by bathing it in warm water. The water temperature should not exceed 105 °F (40 °C), and under no circumstances should the frozen part be rubbed, either before or after rewarming. If the eyes are involved, flush them thoroughly with warm water for at least 15 minutes. In case of massive exposure, remove clothing while showering with warm water. The patient should not drink alcohol or smoke. Keep warm and rest. Call a physician immediately.
Model 336 Temperature Controller
C.1 General
Appendix C: Curve Tables
171
Standard curve tables included in the Model 336 temperature controller are as follows:
Curve Location
Curve 01
Curve 02
Curve 03 & 04
Curve 06 & 07
Curve 08
Curve 09
Curve 12
Curve 13
Curve 14
Curve 15
Curve 16
Model
DT-470 Silicon Diode
DT-670 Silicon Diode
DT-500-D/-E1 Silicon Diode
PT-100/-1000 Platinum RTD
RX-102A Rox™
RX-202A Rox™
Type K Thermocouple
Type E Thermocouple
Type T Thermocouple
Chromel-AuFe 0.03% Thermocouple
Chromel-AuFe 0.07% Thermocouple
TABLE C-1
Table
Table D-1
Table D-2
Table D-3
Table D-4
Table D-5
Table D-6
Table D-7
Table D-8
Table D-9
Table D-10
Table D-11
Breakpoint
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
25
26
27
28
29
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Temp (K)
345.0
330.0
325.0
305.0
300.0
285.0
265.0
250.0
235.0
220.0
205.0
190.0
180.0
435.0
430.0
420.0
410.0
400.0
395.0
380.0
365.0
475.0
470.0
465.0
460.0
455.0
450.0
445.0
440.0
Volts Breakpoint Temp (K) Volts
50
51
52
53
46
47
48
49
54
55
56
57
58
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
0.41005
0.44647
0.45860
0.50691
0.51892
0.55494
0.60275
0.63842
0.67389
0.70909
0.74400
0.77857
0.80139
0.18710
0.19961
0.22463
0.24964
0.27456
0.28701
0.32417
0.36111
0.09062
0.1.191
0.11356
0.12547
0.13759
0.14985
0.16221
0.17464
080.0
075.0
070.0
065.0
058.0
052.0
046.0
040.0
039.0
036.0
034.0
033.0
032.0
120.0
115.0
110.0
105.0
100.0
095.0
090.0
085.0
170.0
160.0
150.0
145.0
140.0
135.0
130.0
125.0
TABLE C-2
Lake Shore DT-470 Silicon Diode (Curve 01)
1.01525
1.02482
1.03425
1.04353
1.05630
1.06702
1.07750
1.08781
1.08953
1.09489
1.09864
1.10060
1.10263
0.93383
0.94440
0.95487
0.96524
0.97550
0.98564
0.99565
1.00552
0.82405
0.84651
0.86874
0.87976
0.89072
0.90161
0.91243
0.92317
Breakpoint
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
83
84
85
86
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
Temp (K)
011.5
010.5
009.5
008.5
007.5
005.2
004.2
003.4
002.6
002.1
001.7
001.4
023.0
022.0
021.0
019.5
017.0
015.0
013.5
012.5
031.0
030.0
029.0
028.0
027.0
026.0
025.0
024.0
| www.lakeshore.com
Volts
1.38012
1.40605
1.43474
1.46684
1.50258
1.59075
1.62622
1.65156
1.67398
1.68585
1.69367
1.69818
1.15558
1.17705
1.19645
1.22321
1.26685
1.30404
1.33438
1.35642
1.10476
1.10702
1.10945
1.11212
1.11517
1.11896
1.12463
1.13598
172
Appendices
Breakpoint
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
21
22
23
24
25
17
18
19
20
Volts
0.090570
0.110239
0.136555
0.179181
0.265393
0.349522
0.452797
0.513393
0.563128
0.607845
0.648723
0.686936
0.722511
0.755487
0.786992
0.817025
0.844538
0.869583
0.893230
0.914469
0.934356
0.952903
0.970134
0.986073
0.998925
Temp (K)
298.5
279.0
261.0
244.0
228.0
213.0
198.5
184.5
500.00
491.0
479.5
461.5
425.5
390.0
346.0
320.0
171.5
159.5
148.0
137.5
127.5
118.0
109.0
100.5
93.5
Breakpoint Volts Temp (K)
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
46
47
48
49
50
42
43
44
45
TABLE C-3
Standard DT-670 diode curve
1.09602
1.10014
1.10393
1.10702
1.10974
1.11204
1.11414
1.11628
1.01064
1.02125
1.03167
1.04189
1.05192
1.06277
1.07472
1.09110
1.11853
1.12090
1.12340
1.12589
1.12913
1.13494
1.14495
1.16297
1.17651
35.7
33.3
31.2
29.6
28.3
27.3
26.5
25.8
87.0
81.0
75.0
69.0
63.0
56.4
49.0
38.7
25.2
24.7
24.3
24.0
23.7
23.3
22.8
22.0
21.3
Breakpoint
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
55
56
57
58
51
52
53
54
71
72
73
74
75
67
68
69
70
DT-500-D Curve DT-500-E1 Curve
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
Breakpoint
Temp (K) Volts Temp (K) Volts
130.0
090.0
070.0
055.0
040.0
034.0
032.0
030.0
365.0
345.0
305.0
285.0
265.0
240.0
220.0
170.0
029.0
028.0
027.0
026.0
025.0
023.0
0.84606
0.95327
1.00460
1.04070
1.07460
1.09020
1.09700
1.10580
0.19083
0.24739
0.36397
0.42019
0.47403
0.53960
0.59455
0.73582
1.11160
1.11900
1.13080
1.14860
1.17200
1.25070
100.0
075.0
060.0
040.0
036.0
034.0
032.0
030.0
330.0
305.0
285.0
265.0
240.0
220.0
170.0
130.0
029.0
028.0
027.0
026.0
025.0
024.0
TABLE C-4
Lake Shore DT-500 series silicon diode curves (no longer in production
0.92570
0.99110
1.02840
1.07460
1.08480
1.09090
1.09810
1.10800
0.28930
0.36220
0.41860
0.47220
0.53770
0.59260
0.73440
0.84490
1.11500
1.12390
1.13650
1.15590
1.18770
1.23570
Volts
1.36423
1.38361
1.40454
1.42732
1.45206
1.48578
1.53523
1.56684
1.19475
1.24208
1.26122
1.27811
1.29430
1.31070
1.32727
1.34506
1.58358
1.59690
1.60756
1.62125
1.62945
1.63516
1.63943
1.64261
1.64430
Temp (K)
10.75
10.0
9.25
8.50
7.75
6.80
5.46
4.56
20.2
17.10
15.90
14.90
14.00
13.15
12.35
11.55
4.04
3.58
3.18
2.62
2.26
1.98
1.74
1.53
1.40
Model 336 Temperature Controller
173
DT-500-D Curve DT-500-E1 Curve
27
28
29
23
24
25
26
Breakpoint
Temp (K) Volts Temp (K) Volts
021.0
017.0
015.0
013.0
009.0
003.0
001.4
1.35050
1.63590
1.76100
1.90660
2.11720
2.53660
2.59840
022.0
018.0
013.0
009.0
004.0
003.0
001.4
TABLE C-4
Lake Shore DT-500 series silicon diode curves (no longer in production
1.32570
1.65270
1.96320
2.17840
2.53640
2.59940
2.65910
Breakpoint
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
25
26
27
28
29
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
PT-100 PT-1000
Temp (K) Ohms (
)
) Temp (K)
98.784
116.270
131.616
148.652
165.466
182.035
198.386
216.256
232.106
247.712
261.391
276.566
289.830
12.180
15.015
19.223
23.525
32.081
46.648
62.980
75.044
3.820
4.235
5.146
5.650
6.170
6.726
7.909
9.924
270.0
315.0
355.0
400.0
445.0
490.0
535.0
585.0
630.0
675.0
715.0
760.0
800.0
058.0
065.0
075.0
085.0
105.0
140.0
180.0
210.0
030.0
032.0
036.0
038.0
040.0
042.0
046.0
052.0
TABLE C-5
Lake Shore PT-100/-1000 platinum RTD curves
270.0
315.0
355.0
400.0
445.0
490.0
535.0
585.0
630.0
675.0
715.0
760.0
800.0
058.0
065.0
075.0
085.0
105.0
140.0
180.0
210.0
030.0
032.0
036.0
038.0
040.0
042.0
046.0
052.0
Ohms (
)
)
987.84
1162.70
1316.16
1486.52
1654.66
1820.35
1983.86
2162.56
2321.06
2477.12
2613.91
2765.66
2898.30
121.80
150.15
192.23
235.25
320.81
466.48
629.80
750.44
38.20
42.35
51.46
56.50
61.70
67.26
79.09
99.24
| www.lakeshore.com
174
Appendices
Breakpoint
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
33
34
35
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 log
)
3.03971
3.04065
3.04164
3.04258
3.04357
3.04460
3.04569
3.04685
3.03176
3.03280
3.03393
3.03500
3.03615
3.03716
3.03797
3.03882
3.04807
3.04936
3.05058
3.02537
3.02605
3.02679
3.02749
3.02823
3.02903
3.02988
3.03078
3.02081
3.02133
3.02184
3.02237
3.02294
3.02353
3.02411
3.02472
Temp (K)
18.45
17.95
17.45
17.00
16.55
16.10
15.65
15.20
24.0
23.1
22.2
21.4
20.6
19.95
19.45
18.95
14.75
14.30
13.90
31.4
30.4
29.4
28.5
27.6
26.7
25.8
24.9
40.0
38.8
37.7
36.6
35.5
34.4
33.4
32.4
Breakpoint log
)
Temp (K)
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
68
69
70
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
TABLE C-6
Lake Shore RX-102A Rox™ curve
3.11558
3.12085
3.12622
3.13211
3.13861
3.14411
3.14913
3.15454
3.08447
3.08786
3.09150
3.09485
3.09791
3.10191
3.10638
3.11078
3.16002
3.16593
3.17191
3.06537
3.06760
3.06968
3.07190
3.07428
3.07685
3.07922
3.08175
3.05186
3.05322
3.05466
3.05618
3.05780
3.05952
3.06135
3.06330
5.18
4.90
4.64
4.38
4.12
3.92
3.75
3.58
7.60
7.25
6.90
6.60
6.35
6.05
5.74
5.46
3.42
3.26
3.11
10.30
9.90
9.55
9.20
8.85
8.50
8.20
7.90
13.50
13.10
12.70
12.30
11.90
11.50
11.10
10.70
Breakpoint
99
100
101
102
95
96
97
98
103
104
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
log
)
3.63222
3.68615
3.75456
3.82865
3.91348
4.01514
4.14432
4.34126
4.54568
4.79803
3.37196
3.39220
3.41621
3.44351
3.47148
3.50420
3.54057
3.58493
3.24842
3.26000
3.27169
3.28462
3.29779
3.31256
3.32938
3.34846
3.17838
3.18540
3.19253
3.20027
3.20875
3.21736
3.22675
3.23707
Temp (K)
0.412
0.354
0.295
0.245
0.201
0.162
0.127
0.091
0.066
0.050
1.020
0.935
0.850
0.765
0.690
0.615
0.545
0.474
1.87
1.75
1.64
1.53
1.43
1.33
1.23
1.130
2.96
2.81
2.67
2.53
2.39
2.26
2.13
2.00
Model 336 Temperature Controller
175
Breakpoint
29
30
31
32
33
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 log
)
3.38829
3.38993
3.39165
3.39345
3.39516
3.39695
3.39882
3.40079
3.40286
3.37575
3.37785
3.37942
3.38081
3.38226
3.38377
3.38522
3.38672
3.36192
3.36340
3.36495
3.36659
3.36831
3.37014
3.37191
3.37377
3.35085
3.35222
3.35346
3.35476
3.35612
3.35755
3.35894
3.36039
Temp (K)
16.05
15.50
14.95
14.40
13.90
13.40
12.90
12.40
11.90
21.2
20.2
19.50
18.90
18.30
17.70
17.15
16.60
29.7
28.6
27.5
26.4
25.3
24.2
23.2
22.2
40.0
38.5
37.2
35.9
34.6
33.3
32.1
30.9
Breakpoint log
)
Temp (K)
62
63
64
65
66
58
59
60
61
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
TABLE C-7
Lake Shore RX-202A Rox™ curve
3.48122
3.48524
3.48955
3.49421
3.49894
3.50406
3.50962
3.51528
3.52145
3.44984
3.45355
3.45734
3.46180
3.46632
3.47012
3.47357
3.47726
3.42380
3.42637
3.42910
3.43202
3.43515
3.43853
3.44230
3.44593
3.40482
3.40688
3.40905
3.41134
3.41377
3.41606
3.41848
3.42105
3.51
3.35
3.19
3.03
2.88
2.73
2.58
2.44
2.30
5.30
5.02
4.76
4.48
4.22
4.02
3.85
3.68
8.05
7.70
7.35
7.00
6.65
6.30
5.94
5.62
11.45
11.00
10.55
10.10
9.65
9.25
8.85
8.45
Breakpoint
95
96
97
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
log
)
3.73889
3.76599
3.79703
3.83269
3.87369
3.92642
3.98609
4.05672
4.14042
4.24807
4.40832
4.57858
4.76196
4.79575
4.81870
3.59830
3.61092
3.62451
3.63912
3.65489
3.67206
3.69095
3.71460
3.52772
3.53459
3.54157
3.54923
3.55775
3.56646
3.57616
3.58708
Temp (K)
0.153
0.120
0.088
0.067
0.055
0.051
0.050
0.575
0.510
0.448
0.390
0.336
0.281
0.233
0.190
1.25
1.150
1.055
0.965
0.880
0.800
0.725
0.645
2.17
2.04
1.92
1.80
1.68
1.57
1.46
1.35
| www.lakeshore.com
176
Appendices
Breakpoint
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
45
46
47
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36 mV
-6.43672
-6.43378
-6.43065
-6.42714
-6.42321
-6.41905
-6.41442
-6.40952
-6.40435
-6.39841
-6.39214
-6.38554
-6.37863
-6.37077
-6.36253
-6.35391
-6.45774
-6.45733
-6.45688
-6.45632
-6.45565
-6.45494
-6.4541
-6.4531
-6.45201
-6.45073
-6.44934
-6.44774
-6.44601
-6.44403
-6.44189
-6.43947
-6.34422
-6.33408
-6.3235
-6.3117
-6.29939
-6.2866
-6.27241
-6.25768
-6.24239
-6.22656
-6.21019
-6.19115
-6.17142
-6.15103
-6.12998
Temp (K)
Breakpoint mV Temp (K)
Breakpoint mV Temp (K)
Breakpoint
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
92
93
94
88
89
90
91
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
-5.5626
-5.51535
-5.46705
-5.4177
-5.36731
-5.3159
-5.26348
-5.19928
-5.13359
-5.06651
-4.99801
-4.92813
-4.85687
-4.78426
-4.71031
-4.63503
-6.10828
-6.08343
-6.05645
-6.02997
-6.00271
-5.97469
-5.94591
-5.91637
-5.8861
-5.85508
-5.82334
-5.78268
-5.74084
-5.69792
-5.6539
-5.60879
-4.55845
-4.48056
-4.38814
-4.29393
-4.19806
-4.10051
-4.00133
-3.90053
-3.79815
-3.6942
-3.58873
-3.46638
-3.34204
-3.21584
-3.08778
113.5
116.5
119.5
122.5
125.5
128.5
131.5
134.5
92.5
95
97.5
100
102.5
105
107.5
110.5
73.5
75.5
77.5
80
82.5
85
87.5
90
57.4
59.4
61.5
63.5
65.5
67.5
69.5
71.5
165
168.5
172
176
180
184
188
137.5
140.5
144
147.5
151
154.5
158
161.5
23
24.2
25.4
26.6
27.8
29.1
30.4
31.7
14.7
15.65
16.6
17.6
18.65
19.7
20.8
21.9
8.05
8.8
9.55
10.35
11.15
12
12.85
13.75
3.15
3.68
4.2
4.78
5.4
6
6.65
7.35
45.2
46.8
48.4
50.2
52
53.8
55.6
33.1
34.5
35.9
37.4
38.9
40.4
42
43.6
TABLE C-8
Type K (Nickel-Chromium vs. Nickel-Aluminum) thermocouple curve
123
124
125
126
119
120
121
122
115
116
117
118
111
112
113
114
107
108
109
110
103
104
105
106
99
100
101
102
95
96
97
98
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
131
132
133
134
127
128
129
130
3.75883
4.29687
4.74986
5.17977
5.60705
6.03172
6.49428
7.09465
0.053112
0.350783
0.651006
0.973714
1.31919
1.70801
2.14052
2.69954
-2.95792
-2.82629
-2.6762
-2.52392
-2.36961
-2.21329
-2.05503
-1.87703
-1.69672
-1.51427
-1.32972
-1.12444
-0.91675
-0.70686
-0.47553
-0.22228
8.15226
8.75291
9.25576
9.74087
10.2285
10.7186
11.2317
11.7883
12.3888
13.054
13.7844
14.5592
15.3786
16.2428
17.1518
365
378
389
399.5
410
420.5
432
447
274.5
282
289.5
297.5
306
315.5
326
339.5
228.5
233.5
238.5
244
249.5
255
261
267.5
192
196
200.5
205
209.5
214
218.5
223.5
577.5
593.5
611
629.5
649
669.5
691
473.5
488.5
501
513
525
537
549.5
563
170
171
172
173
166
167
168
169
162
163
164
165
158
159
160
161
154
155
156
157
150
151
152
153
146
147
148
149
142
143
144
145
182
183
184
185
186
187
178
179
180
181
174
175
176
177
Temp (K)
1215
1230.5
1246
1261.5
1276.5
1291.5
1306.5
1321
1088.5
1104.5
1120.5
1136.5
1152.5
1168.5
1184
1199.5
952
970.5
988.5
1006
1023
1039.5
1056
1072.5
714.5
741.5
777
832.5
864
889.5
912
932.5
1335.5
1350
1364
1378
1391.5
1405
1418
1431
1444
1456.5
1469
1481.5
1493.5
1505.5
mV
38.9915
39.6038
40.2136
40.821
41.4063
41.9893
42.5699
43.1288
33.9038
34.5561
35.2059
35.8532
36.4979
37.14
37.7596
38.3767
28.2413
29.0181
29.7714
30.5011
31.2074
31.8905
32.571
33.2489
18.1482
19.2959
20.8082
23.1752
24.5166
25.6001
26.5536
27.4199
43.6853
44.2394
44.7721
45.3024
45.8114
46.3182
46.8038
47.2873
47.7684
48.2287
48.6868
49.1426
49.5779
50.0111
Model 336 Temperature Controller
Breakpoint
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
49
50
51
52
53
54
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 mV Temp (K) Breakpoint mV Temp (K) Breakpoint mV
-9.581740
-9.560710
-9.537440
-9.513290
-9.486720
-9.457560
-9.427340
-9.396080
-9.363810
-9.330540
-9.296270
-9.257090
-9.216690
-9.175140
-9.132450
-9.088620
-9.043710
-8.997710
-8.950650
-8.902530
-8.840980
-8.777760
-9.787610
-9.780590
-9.773150
-9.764910
-9.755820
-9.746230
-9.735700
-9.724650
-9.713080
-9.699960
-9.686220
-9.671890
-9.655790
-9.638980
-9.621500
-9.602020
-9.834960
-9.834220
-9.833370
-9.832260
-9.830920
-9.829330
-9.827470
-9.825370
-9.822890
-9.820010
-9.816880
-9.813290
-9.809180
-9.804510
-9.799510
-9.793900
48.40
50.20
52.00
54.00
56.00
58.00
60.00
62.00
34.80
36.30
37.90
39.50
41.20
43.00
44.80
46.60
64.00
66.00
68.00
70.00
72.50
75.00
23.70
25.00
26.30
27.60
29.00
30.40
31.80
33.30
14.60
15.65
16.70
17.80
18.95
20.10
21.30
22.50
7.70
8.45
9.20
10.00
10.85
11.75
12.65
13.60
3.15
3.59
4.04
4.56
5.12
5.72
6.35
7.00
TABLE C-9
Type E (Nickel-Chromium vs. Copper-Nickel) Thermocouple Curve
137
138
139
140
133
134
135
136
129
130
131
132
125
126
127
128
121
122
123
124
117
118
119
120
113
114
115
116
109
110
111
112
153
154
155
156
149
150
151
152
157
158
159
160
161
145
146
147
148
141
142
143
144
99
100
101
102
95
96
97
98
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
103
104
105
106
107
108
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
55
56
57
58
-4.970330
-4.784590
-4.596330
-4.405600
-4.212440
-3.992330
-3.769140
-3.543070
-3.314120
-3.082340
-2.847790
-2.610520
-2.343820
-2.073770
-1.800570
-1.524210
-1.244740
-0.962207
-0.676647
-0.359204
-0.009079
0.344505
-7.338970
-7.230370
-7.120010
-6.989110
-6.855790
-6.720200
-6.582330
-6.442220
-6.299900
-6.155400
-6.008740
-5.859960
-5.687430
-5.512090
-5.334130
-5.153520
-8.713010
-8.646710
-8.578890
-8.509590
-8.438800
-8.366570
-8.292900
-8.217810
-8.141330
-8.047780
-7.952190
-7.854690
-7.755260
-7.653960
-7.550790
-7.445790
213.00
217.50
222.00
226.50
231.50
236.50
241.50
246.50
179.00
183.00
187.00
191.00
195.00
199.50
204.00
208.50
251.50
256.50
261.50
267.00
273.00
279.00
148.50
152.00
155.50
159.00
163.00
167.00
171.00
175.00
121.50
124.50
127.50
131.00
134.50
138.00
141.50
145.00
97.50
100.50
103.50
106.50
109.50
112.50
115.50
118.50
77.50
80.00
82.50
85.00
87.50
90.00
92.50
95.00
7.364360
7.881760
8.403380
8.928940
9.493760
10.0629
10.6361
11.2494
11.867
12.5253
13.188
13.892
14.6005
15.3507
16.1432
16.9403
0.701295
1.061410
1.424820
1.791560
2.161610
2.534960
2.943070
3.355100
3.770870
4.190420
4.613650
5.040520
5.470960
5.938380
6.409870
6.885210
26.0623
27.3356
28.6935
30.1761
31.8242
33.7187
36.1028
41.8502
17.7798
18.6624
19.5881
20.5573
21.5702
22.627
23.7279
24.873
44.2747
46.2907
48.1007
49.8256
51.5056
| www.lakeshore.com
177
Temp (K)
452.00
461.00
470.00
479.50
489.00
499.00
509.50
520.00
388.50
396.00
403.50
411.00
419.00
427.00
435.00
443.50
334.50
341.00
347.50
354.00
360.50
367.50
374.50
381.50
285.0
291.00
297.00
303.00
309.00
315.00
321.50
328.00
637.00
653.00
670.00
688.50
709.00
732.50
762.00
833.00
531.00
542.50
554.50
567.00
580.00
593.50
607.50
622.00
863.00
888.00
910.50
932.00
953.00
178
Appendices
Breakpoint
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
34
35
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
3
4
1
2
5
50
51
52
53
46
47
48
49
54
55
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
44
45 mV
-6.168310
-6.159280
-6.149830
-6.139220
-6.128130
-6.116580
-6.103700
-6.090300
-6.075460
-6.060040
-6.229800
-6.225630
-6.221000
-6.215860
-6.210430
-6.204430
-6.198680
-6.191780
-6.184530
-6.176930
-6.257510
-6.257060
-6.256520
-6.255810
-6.254950
-6.253920
-6.252780
-6.251380
-6.249730
-6.247810
-6.245590
-6.243040
-6.240300
-6.237210
-6.233710
-5.805860
-5.776670
-5.741100
-5.704560
-5.667130
-5.628800
-5.589590
-5.549510
-5.508560
-5.466760
-6.044070
-6.025470
-6.006200
-5.986280
-5.965730
-5.942210
-5.917930
-5.892970
-5.864730
-5.835680
Temp (K) Breakpoint mV Temp (K) Breakpoint
25.00
26.30
27.60
29.00
30.40
31.80
33.30
34.80
36.40
38.00
13.65
14.65
15.70
16.80
17.90
19.05
20.10
21.30
22.50
23.70
3.15
3.56
4.00
4.50
5.04
5.62
6.20
6.85
7.55
8.30
9.10
9.95
10.80
11.70
12.65
59.40
61.50
64.00
66.50
69.00
71.50
74.00
76.50
79.00
81.50
39.60
41.40
43.20
45.00
46.80
48.80
50.80
52.80
55.00
57.20
TABLE C-10
Type T (Copper vs. Copper-Nickel) thermocouple curve
85
86
87
88
81
82
83
84
89
90
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
69
70
56
57
58
59
60
105
106
107
108
101
102
103
104
109
110
95
96
97
98
91
92
93
94
99
100
-3.728520
-3.633620
-3.537260
-3.439460
-3.340240
-3.239610
-3.122930
-3.004370
-2.884040
-2.761910
-4.561670
-4.492700
-4.422610
-4.351390
-4.266950
-4.180930
-4.093440
-4.004430
-3.913940
-3.821970
-5.424100
-5.380600
-5.336260
-5.291080
-5.245070
-5.188800
-5.131290
-5.072630
-5.012780
-4.951770
-4.889610
-4.826300
-4.761840
-4.696250
-4.629530
-1.233640
-1.072450
-0.909257
-0.744065
-0.576893
-0.407776
-0.217705
-0.025325
0.188573
0.404639
-2.638010
-2.512340
-2.384920
-2.255770
-2.124900
-1.992320
-1.858060
-1.705090
-1.549970
-1.392820
160.50
164.00
167.50
171.00
174.50
178.00
182.00
186.00
190.00
194.00
127.00
130.00
133.00
136.00
139.50
143.00
146.50
150.00
153.50
157.00
84.00
86.50
89.00
91.50
94.00
97.00
100.00
103.00
106.00
109.00
112.00
115.00
118.00
121.00
124.00
240.00
244.50
249.00
253.50
258.00
262.50
267.50
272.50
278.00
283.50
198.00
202.00
206.00
210.00
214.00
218.00
222.00
226.50
231.00
235.50
140
141
142
143
136
137
138
139
144
145
130
131
132
133
126
127
128
129
134
135
120
121
122
123
116
117
118
119
124
125
111
112
113
114
115
160
161
162
163
164
156
157
158
159
150
151
152
153
146
147
148
149
154
155 mV
7.455590
7.814630
8.176630
8.541540
8.909320
9.306450
9.706830
10.1103
10.5169
10.9264
4.271300
4.553250
4.837770
5.148790
5.462770
5.779560
6.099160
6.421500
6.746540
7.099510
0.623032
0.843856
1.067190
1.293090
1.521570
1.752660
1.986340
2.222600
2.461410
2.702740
2.946550
3.192800
3.441440
3.715300
3.991980
16.2887
16.8224
17.3594
17.9297
18.5037
19.1116
19.7538
20.4611
20.8627
11.3664
11.8098
12.2564
12.7342
13.2155
13.7
14.1879
14.7079
15.2314
15.7583
Temp (K)
438.00
445.00
452.00
459.00
466.00
473.50
481.00
488.50
496.00
503.50
373.00
379.00
385.00
391.50
398.00
404.50
411.00
417.50
424.00
431.00
289.00
294.50
300.00
305.50
311.00
316.50
322.00
327.50
333.00
338.50
344.00
349.50
355.00
361.00
367.00
597.50
606.50
615.50
625.00
634.50
644.50
655.00
666.50
673.00
511.50
519.50
527.50
536.00
544.50
553.00
561.50
570.50
579.50
588.50
Model 336 Temperature Controller
179
Breakpoint
29
30
31
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 mV Temp (K) Breakpoint mV
-3.80464
-3.73301
-3.65274
-3.5937
-3.51113
-3.45023
-3.43451
-3.37842
-3.35469
-3.28237
-3.11919
-2.95269
-2.78168
-2.60639
-2.42737
-4.6667
-4.62838
-4.60347
-4.58043
-4.53965
-4.47226
-4.43743
-4.39529
-4.34147
-4.29859
-4.26887
-4.22608
-4.2018
-4.02151
-3.94549
-3.87498
100
110
120
130
140
150
70.5
76
80
85.5
89.5
90.5
94
95.5
29.1
31.3
34.5
36.3
49.8
55.4
60.5
65.5
6.35
8.15
9.75
12.5
16.95
19.3
22.2
26
TABLE C-11
Chromel-AuFe 0.03% thermocouple curve
56
57
58
59
60
61
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
1.3456
1.7279
1.76905
2.20705
2.51124
2.69878
2.94808
3.13562
3.43707
3.85513
4.17136
4.28662
4.64037
4.68168
-2.24537
-2.06041
-1.86182
-1.66004
-1.47556
-1.0904
-0.73397
-0.68333
-0.3517
-0.2385
0.078749
0.139668
0.426646
0.546628
0.858608
0.938667
Temp (K)
440.5
460.5
475.5
481
498
500
340
358.5
360.5
381.5
396
405
417
426
256
261.5
277
280
294.5
300.5
316
320
160
170
180.5
191
200.5
220
237.5
240
| www.lakeshore.com
180
Appendices
Breakpoint
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
33
34
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 mV
-4.648620
-4.569170
-4.499080
-4.435090
-4.370520
-4.303610
-4.234290
-4.164270
-4.093560
-4.022170
-3.950100
-3.877360
-3.803960
-3.729910
-3.655230
-3.579930
-3.504020
-3.427530
-5.279520
-5.272030
-5.263500
-5.253730
-5.242690
-5.229730
-5.214770
-5.196980
-5.176250
-5.150910
-5.116700
-5.049770
-5.002120
-4.938000
-4.876180
-4.801670
Temp (K) Breakpoint mV Temp (K) Breakpoint
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
67
68
55
56
57
58
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
74.50
78.50
82.50
86.50
90.50
94.50
98.50
102.50
106.50
110.50
42.00
46.80
51.00
54.80
58.60
62.50
66.50
70.50
10.35
11.90
13.95
17.90
20.70
24.50
28.20
32.70
3.15
3.78
4.46
5.20
6.00
6.90
7.90
9.05
TABLE C-12
Chromel-AuFe 0.07% thermocouple curve
-1.568040
-1.428520
-1.277520
-1.114900
-0.940599
-0.754604
-0.556906
-0.358437
-0.170179
0.041150
0.152699
0.163149
0.374937
0.542973
0.598604
0.774384
0.840638
1.126350
-3.340820
-3.253410
-3.165360
-3.076690
-2.977480
-2.877550
-2.776950
-2.675700
-2.563610
-2.450770
-2.337230
-2.223010
-2.097700
-1.971630
-1.844890
-1.706840
265.50
275.00
280.00
280.50
290.00
297.50
300.00
308.00
311.00
324.00
201.50
208.00
215.00
222.50
230.50
239.00
248.00
257.00
154.00
159.50
165.00
170.50
176.50
182.50
188.50
195.00
115.00
119.50
124.00
128.50
133.50
138.50
143.50
148.50
97
98
99
100
101
93
94
95
96
89
90
91
92
85
86
87
88
81
82
83
84
77
78
79
80
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72 mV
4.000810
4.246390
4.701810
4.947390
5.636410
5.870300
6.547630
6.711600
6.781410
6.931500
7.001360
7.166710
7.260420
7.412010
7.529070
7.657460
7.704410
1.313400
1.511140
1.709250
1.928940
2.127070
2.324710
2.523070
2.643480
2.708890
2.764030
2.797580
2.950200
3.008310
3.031200
3.218040
3.300110
Temp (K)
577.00
580.00
587.00
591.00
597.50
602.50
608.00
610.00
462.00
481.50
492.00
521.50
531.50
560.50
567.50
570.50
398.50
400.00
406.50
409.00
410.00
418.00
421.50
451.50
341.50
350.50
360.50
369.50
378.50
387.50
393.00
396.00
Model 336 Temperature Controller
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement